Impala 2015 Manual

2k15_chev_impala_22941531 Aai
(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

Spine = Printer Adjust
Color = Black
Date = 03/19/14
2015 Impala
2015
Impala
22941531 A
chevrolet.com (U.S.)
chevrolet.gm.ca (Canada)
Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-7576026) - Black plate (1,1)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2015 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-38 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-44 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-31
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-43
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-63
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Trademarks and License Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2015 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Additional
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-13
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Introduction iii
model variants, country Canadian Vehicle Owners

specifications, features/applications
that may not be available in your Propriétaires Canadiens
region, or changes subsequent to A French language manual can be
the printing of this owner manual. obtained from your dealer, at
If the vehicle has the bi-fuel engine, www.helminc.com, or from:
The names, logos, emblems, see the Impala Bi-Fuel supplement On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and for additional and specific ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in information on this engine. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Refer to the purchase savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, documentation relating to your
the CHEVROLET Emblem, IMPALA, Helm, Incorporated
specific vehicle to confirm the Attention: Customer Service
and the IMPALA Emblem are features.
trademarks and/or service marks of 47911 Halyard Drive
General Motors LLC, its Keep this manual in the vehicle for Plymouth, MI 48170
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. quick reference.
Using this Manual
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name "General To quickly locate information about
Motors of Canada Limited" for the vehicle, use the Index in the
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it back of the manual. It is an
appears in this manual. alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
This manual describes features that it can be found.
may or may not be on the vehicle
because of optional equipment that
was not purchased on the vehicle,
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22941531 A First Printing 2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

Cautions Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
Warning messages found on vehicle and what they mean. For more
labels and in this manual describe information on the symbol, refer to
hazards and what to do to avoid or the Index.
reduce them. A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
{ Danger Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let # : Air Conditioning
this happen.” ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result Symbols % : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls
in serious injury or death. or OnStar (if equipped)
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of $ : Brake System Warning Light
text. Symbols are shown along with " : Charging System
{ Warning the text describing the operation or I : Cruise Control
information relating to a specific
Warning indicates a hazard that component, control, message, B : Engine Coolant Temperature
could result in injury or death. gauge, or indicator. O : Exterior Lamps
M : This symbol is shown when # : Fog Lamps
you need to see your owner manual
. : Fuel Gauge
{ Caution for additional instructions or
information. + : Fuses
Caution indicates a hazard that * : This symbol is shown when
could result in property or vehicle
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
you need to see a service manual Changer
damage. for additional instructions or
information.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Introduction v
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Side Blind Zone

Steering Wheel Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Rear Vision
Instrument Panel Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 Active Emergency Braking
Initial Drive Information Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Universal Remote System . . . 1-21
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Performance and Maintenance
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Traction Control/Electronic
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-23
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Heated and Ventilated Driver Information Driving for Better Fuel
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Head Restraint Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Roadside Assistance
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Lane Departure OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Passenger Sensing Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-3
1. Instrument Panel Illumination 9. Storage Area with USB Port 16. Cruise Control on page 9-33 (If
Control on page 6-4. Inside (If Equipped). See Equipped).
2. Air Vents on page 8-7. Instrument Panel Storage on Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 4-1 and USB Port on page 9-35 (If Equipped).
3. Trunk Release. See Trunk on page 7-14.
page 2-15. Heated Steering Wheel on
10. Infotainment on page 7-1. page 5-3 (If Equipped).
Parking Assist Button. See
Assistance Systems for Parking 11. CD Player on page 7-11. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
or Backing on page 9-44 (If 12. Electric Parking Brake. See System on page 9-46 (If
Equipped). Parking Brake on page 9-29. Equipped).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 13. Data Link Connector (Out of 17. Steering Wheel Controls on
Button. See Lane Departure View). See Malfunction page 5-3 (Out of View).
Warning (LDW) on page 9-52. Indicator Lamp on page 5-17. 18. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and 14. Hood Release. See Hood on page 5-2.
Lane-Change Signals on page 10-4. 19. Horn on page 5-3.
page 6-3. 15. Instrument Panel Storage on 20. Steering Wheel Controls on
5. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9. page 4-1 (If Equipped). page 5-3.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Fuse Cover. See Instrument Driver Information Center
on page 5-26. Panel Fuse Block on Buttons. See Driver Information
6. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 10-36. Center (DIC) on page 5-26.
page 5-4. 21. Ignition Positions (Keyless
7. Hazard Warning Flashers on Access) on page 9-14 or
page 6-3. Ignition Positions (Key Access)
8. Light Sensor. See Automatic on page 9-16.
Headlamp System on page 6-2.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-4 In Brief
22. Shift Lever. See Automatic Initial Drive

Transmission on page 9-25.
23. Heated and Ventilated Front
Information
Seats on page 3-10 (If This section provides a brief
Equipped). overview about some of the
24. Traction Control/Electronic important features that may or may
Stability Control on page 9-31. not be on your specific vehicle.
25. Storage Area with Accessory For more detailed information, refer
Power Outlet Inside. See to each of the features which can be
Center Console Storage on found later in this owner manual.
page 4-2 and Power Outlets on
page 5-6. Remote Keyless Entry With Remote Start Shown
26. Climate Control Systems on (RKE) System Press the button to extend the key.
page 8-1. The RKE transmitter may work up to The key can be used for all locks.
Dual Automatic Climate Control 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle. This key is also used for the
System on page 8-3. ignition, if the vehicle does not have
pushbutton start.
K : Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors.
Q: Press to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized.
Y : Press and hold to release the
trunk.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-5
7 : Press and release one time to The engine will continue to run for Door Locks
initiate vehicle locator. Press and 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
hold for at least three seconds to 10-minute time extension. Remote Keyless Access
sound the panic alarm. Press again start can be extended only once.
to cancel the panic alarm. Canceling a Remote Start
See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote To cancel a remote start, do one of
Keyless Entry (RKE) System the following:
Operation on page 2-3.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Remote Vehicle Start vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
If equipped, the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Starting the Vehicle
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on If equipped, use the Keyless Access
page 2-9. system to lock and unlock the door.
2. Press and release Q. When the doors are locked and the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
3. Immediately, press and hold / transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the
for at least four seconds or until driver door handle, press the lock/
the turn signal lamps flash. unlock button. When unlocking from
When the vehicle starts, the parking the driver door, the first press
lamps will turn on and remain on as unlocks that door; press again
long as the engine is running. The within five seconds to unlock all
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-6 In Brief
passenger doors. See Remote Power Door Locks Trunk

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-3.
This feature may be configured. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-38.
Key Cylinder Access
Use the key in the driver door. The
key cylinder is covered by a cap.
See Door Locks on page 2-11.
Inside the Vehicle
Push down on the door lock knob to
lock that door. Pull once on the door K: Press to unlock.
To open the trunk:
handle to unlock the door and again Q: Press to lock.
to open the door. Press the power . Press | with the
door lock switch to lock or unlock all See Power Door Locks on
transmission in (P) .
doors. See Door Locks on page 2-13.
page 2-11 and Power Door Locks . Press and hold Y on the RKE
on page 2-13. transmitter.
. If equipped, press the touch pad
on the underside of the trunk lid
after unlocking all doors.
If equipped with Keyless Access,
the RKE transmitter must be within
1 m (3 ft) of the trunk. Press the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-7
touch pad on the underside of the (RAP) is active. See Retained Seat Adjustment
trunk and lift to open. See Remote Accessory Power (RAP) on
Keyless Entry (RKE) System page 9-22. Manual Front Seats
Operation on page 2-3. The power window switches on the
When closing the trunk, use the driver door control all the windows.
pull cup. Each passenger door has a switch
See Trunk on page 2-15. that controls only that window.
Press the switch to lower the
Windows window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
See Power Windows on page 2-22.
To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
The power windows only operate forth to be sure it is locked in
with the ignition in ACC/ place.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
or when Retained Accessory Power
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-8 In Brief
Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment
Lumbar with Power Recline

Press and hold the top or bottom of To adjust the seat: Shown, Manual Recline Similar
the switch to raise or lower the seat. . Move the seat forward or
Release the switch when the To adjust the lumbar support:
rearward by sliding the control
desired height is reached. . Press and hold the control
forward or rearward.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-4. forward to increase or rearward
. Raise or lower the front part of
to decrease lumbar support.
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down. . If equipped with manual recline,
press and hold the top of the
. Raise or lower the seat by
control to increase or the bottom
moving the rear of the control up
of the control to decrease
or down.
lumbar support.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3-5.
page 3-6.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-9
Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright

. Tilt the top of the control forward
position: to raise.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without See Reclining Seatbacks on
applying pressure to the page 3-6.
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. Memory Features
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and
release the lever to lock the B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
seatback in place. are used to manually save and
recall memory settings for the driver
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
To adjust a power seatback: seat, outside mirrors, and power tilt
. Tilt the top of the control and telescoping steering column (if
rearward to recline. equipped).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-10 In Brief
See Memory Seats on page 3-7 and Heated and Ventilated C : If available, press to ventilate
Vehicle Personalization on the driver or passenger seat.
page 5-38.
Seats
A ventilated seat has a fan that pulls
or pushes air through the seat. The
Second Row Seats air is not cooled.
The rear seatbacks can be folded An indicator light on the button turns
down to increase cargo space. on when the heated or ventilated
See Rear Seats on page 3-11. seat is on.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3-10.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Heated and Ventilated Seat Do not drive until the head restraints
Buttons Shown, Heated Seat for all occupants are installed and
Buttons Similar adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
If available, the buttons are on the
position, change the seatback
center console. To operate, the
recline angle as little as necessary
ignition must be on.
while keeping the seat and the head
I : If available, press to heat the restraint height in the proper
driver or passenger seatback only. position.
J: Press to heat the driver or See Head Restraints on page 3-2
passenger seat cushion and and Seat Adjustment on page 3-4.
seatback.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-11
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status

indicator lights on the overhead
System console when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-16.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
United States
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly: Canada
. Safety Belts on page 3-13. The passenger sensing system will
. How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the front outboard
Properly on page 3-14. passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions. No
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-15. other airbag is affected by the 1. Move the selector switch to L
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for passenger sensing system. See (Left) or R (Right) to choose the
Children (LATCH System) on Passenger Sensing System on driver or passenger mirror.
page 3-41. page 3-26. 2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-12 In Brief
3. Move the selector switch to ) to when the vehicle is started. See 4. Pull the lever up to lock the
deselect the mirror. Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror steering wheel in place.
on page 2-21.
The vehicle has manual folding Power Tilt Wheel
mirrors. See Folding Mirrors on Steering Wheel
page 2-20.
Adjustment
Interior Mirrors
Adjustment
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
view of the area behind the vehicle.
Manual Rearview Mirror
For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
If equipped with this feature, press
headlamps from behind. See
the control to move the steering
Manual Rearview Mirror on
wheel up and down or forward and
page 2-21.
To adjust the steering wheel: rearward.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Do not adjust the steering wheel
Mirror 1. Pull the lever down.
while driving.
For vehicles with an automatic 2. Move the steering wheel up
dimming rearview mirror, the mirror or down.
will automatically reduce the glare 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
from the headlamps from behind. closer or away from you.
The dimming feature comes on
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-13
Interior Lighting To change the dome lamp settings, Reading Lamps

press the following:
Dome Lamps
OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamp comes on
automatically when a door is
opened.
ON: Turns the lamp on.
Front Reading Lamps
The interior lamps control in the

overhead console controls both the
front and rear interior lamps.
Rear Reading Lamps

2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-14 In Brief
There are front and rear reading AUTO: Automatically turns the Windshield Wiper/Washer
lamps in the overhead console and exterior lamps on and off,
the headliner. depending on outside lighting.
# or $ : Press the button near ; : Turns on the parking lamps
each lamp to turn it on or off. including all lamps, except the
headlamps.
Exterior Lighting 2 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and
instrument panel lights. The windshield wiper/washer lever
See: is on the right side of the steering
column.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6-1 With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
move the lever to select the wiper
speed.
HI: Use for fast wipes.
The exterior lamp control is on the LO: Use for slow wipes.
turn signal lever.
There are four positions.
O : Turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO
position after it is released. Turn to
O again to reactivate the
AUTO mode.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-15
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
these systems.
INT: Move the lever up to INT for

intermittent wipes, then turn the x
INT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
the lever down. For several wipes,
hold the lever down.
Climate Control System
nL: Pull the lever toward you to
spray windshield washer fluid and
activate the wipers. 1. Fan Control 5. TEMP (Temperature Control)
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 6. Recirculation

page 5-4. 3. Air Delivery Modes 7. Rear Window Defogger
4. Defrost
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-16 In Brief
Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
This feature allows for changing
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual Mode).
2. Using the button on the top of
the shift lever, press the + (plus)
Dual Automatic Climate Control System end of the button to upshift,
or press the − (minus) end of the
1. Driver and Passenger 6. Recirculation button to downshift.
Temperature Controls 7. Air Delivery Modes See Manual Mode on page 9-27.
2. Air Conditioning or Comfort/Eco
Air Conditioning (Stop/ 8. O (Fan On/Off)
Start Only) 9. Rear Window Defogger
3. Fan Control 10. SYNC
4. Defrost See Climate Control Systems on
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) page 8-1 or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8-3 (if
equipped).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-17
Vehicle Features {: Press to go to the Home Page. Setting the Clock

MENU: Press to select a menu. See Clock (Base Radio) on
Infotainment System g : Press to seek the previous page 5-5 or Clock (Uplevel Radio)
on page 5-6.
The base radio information is station or track.
included in this manual. See the l : Press to seek the next station
infotainment manual for information
Satellite Radio
or track.
on the uplevel radios, audio players, Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
phone, navigation system, and See Overview on page 7-3 about radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
voice or speech recognition. There these and other radio features. satellite radio subscription can
is also information on settings and Storing Radio Station Presets receive SiriusXM programming.
downloadable applications (if
equipped). Up to 25 preset stations from all SiriusXM Satellite Radio
bands can be stored in the favorite Service
Radio(s) lists in any order. Up to five stations SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
can be stored in each favorite page based in the 48 contiguous United
O : Press to turn the system on. and the number of favorite pages States and 10 Canadian provinces.
Press and hold to turn it off. When can be set.
on, press to mute; press again to SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
unmute. Turn to increase or To store the station to a position in variety of programming and
decrease the volume. the list, while on the active source commercial-free music, coast to
main page, such as AM, FM, coast, and in digital-quality sound.
RADIO: Press to choose between or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and A fee is required to receive the
FM, AM, and SiriusXM®, hold a favorites/soft key button on SiriusXM service.
if equipped. the faceplate. For more information refer to:
MEDIA: Press to change the audio See “Storing Radio Station Presets”
source between CD, USB, SD card,
. www.siriusxm.com or call
under AM-FM Radio on page 7-7. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
and AUX.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-18 In Brief
. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone g: For vehicles with OnStar® or a
must be paired with the in-vehicle Bluetooth® system, press to interact
See Satellite Radio on page 7-9. Bluetooth system before it can be with those systems. See OnStar
used in the vehicle. Not all phones Overview on page 14-1 or
Portable Audio Devices will support all functions. “Bluetooth (Overview)” in the
See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) infotainment manual.
The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack, SD Card on page 7-21 or Bluetooth c : Press to reject an incoming
Reader, and two USB ports in the (Overview) on page 7-19 or call, or end a current call. Press to
center console. If equipped with Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - mute or unmute the infotainment
storage behind the radio, there is a Base Radio) on page 7-26. system when not on a call.
USB port inside. See Instrument
Panel Storage on page 4-1. Steering Wheel Controls
External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
changers, and USB storage devices
may be connected, depending on
the audio system.
See Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17,
SD Card Reader on page 7-17, and
USB Port on page 7-14.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® system allows users The favorite and volume switches
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone are on the back of the steering
to make and receive hands-free Some audio controls can be wheel.
calls using the vehicle audio system adjusted at the steering wheel.
and controls.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-19
1. Favorites: Press to select the +RES: If there is a set speed in

next or previous favorite. memory, press briefly to resume to
2. Volume: Press to increase or that speed or press and hold to
decrease the volume. accelerate. If cruise control is
already active, use to increase
See Steering Wheel Controls on vehicle speed.
page 5-3.
SET–: Press briefly to set the
speed and activate cruise control.
Cruise Control If cruise control is already active,
use to decrease vehicle speed.
*: Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
w or x : Press to move up or
See Cruise Control on page 9-33 or down in a list, or on the main view
Adaptive Cruise Control on press to cycle through the different
page 9-35 (if equipped). Info app pages.
o or p : Press o to open
Driver Information application menus on the left. Press
Center (DIC) p to open interaction menus on the
right.
The DIC display is in the instrument
cluster. It shows the status of many V : Press to select a menu item.
5: Press to turn cruise control on vehicle systems. Press and hold to reset values on
or off. A white indicator comes on in certain screens, or on the main view
the instrument cluster when cruise reset info pages to the original
is on. setting.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-20 In Brief
See Instrument Cluster on page 5-9 to detect the lane markings. The Rear Vision
and Driver Information Center (DIC) LDW light, @, is green if a lane
on page 5-26.
Camera (RVC)
marking is detected. If the vehicle
departs the lane, the light will If equipped, RVC displays a view of
Forward Collision Alert change to amber and flash. In the area behind the vehicle on the
(FCA) System addition, beeps will sound. center stack display when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) to
If equipped, FCA may help avoid or See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) aid with parking and low-speed
reduce the harm caused by on page 9-52. backing maneuvers.
front-end crashes. FCA provides a
Side Blind Zone See Assistance Systems for Parking
green indicator, V, when a vehicle or Backing on page 9-44.
is detected ahead. This indicator Alert (SBZA)
displays amber if you follow a If equipped, SBZA will detect Parking Assist
vehicle much too closely. When vehicles in the next lane over in the
approaching a vehicle ahead too If equipped, Rear Parking Assist
vehicle's side blind zone area. (RPA) uses sensors on the rear
quickly, FCA provides a red flashing When this happens, the SBZA
alert on the windshield and rapidly bumper to assist with parking and
display will light up in the avoiding objects while in
beeps. corresponding outside side mirror R (Reverse). It operates at speeds
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) and will flash if the turn signal is on. less than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may
System on page 9-46. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) display a warning triangle on the
on page 9-50. Rear Vision Camera screen and/or
Lane Departure a graphic on the instrument cluster
Warning (LDW) to provide the object distance. In
addition, multiple beeps may occur
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
if very close to an object.
unintentional lane departures at
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or See Assistance Systems for Parking
greater. LDW uses a camera sensor or Backing on page 9-44.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-21
. Inside the center console.
Active Emergency Read the instructions completely
. On the rear of the center before attempting to program the
Braking System Universal Remote system. Because
console.
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise of the steps involved, it may be
Control (ACC) it also has the Active Lift the cover to access the helpful to have another person
Emergency Braking System, which accessory power outlet. available to assist with programming
includes Intelligent Brake See Power Outlets on page 5-6. the Universal Remote system.
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic See Universal Remote System on
Collision Preparation (ACP) System. Universal Remote System page 5-44.
These systems can provide a boost
to braking or automatically brake the
vehicle to help avoid or lessen the
Sunroof
severity of crashes when driving in a If equipped, the ignition must be in
forward gear. ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
See Active Emergency Braking or in Retained Accessory Power
System on page 9-48. (RAP) to operate the sunroof and
power sunshade. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
Power Outlets page 9-22.
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
The vehicle has three accessory This system provides a way to
power outlets: replace up to three remote control
. Inside the front storage area transmitters used to activate
below the climate control devices such as garage door
system. openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-22 In Brief
Express Open/Express Close: Performance and

Fully press and release the front or
rear of ~. The sunroof opens and Maintenance
closes automatically.
Traction Control/
Sunshade Switch
Electronic Stability
Open/Close: Press and hold the
Control
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired The Traction Control System (TCS)
position. limits wheel spin. The system turns
on automatically every time the
Express Open/Express Close: vehicle is started.
Fully press and release the front or
1. ~ Sunroof Switch The StabiliTrak system assists with
rear of Q to express open or
directional control of the vehicle in
2. Q Sunshade Switch express close the sunshade. If the difficult driving conditions. The
sunroof is open, the sunshade will system also turns on automatically
Sunroof Switch express close just short of the open every time the vehicle is started.
Open/Close: Press and hold the sunroof.
. To turn off traction control, press
front or rear of ~ to open or close See Sunroof on page 2-24.
the sunroof. Release ~ at the and release the g button on the
desired position to stop movement. center console. The Traction Off
Light i illuminates.
Vent Feature: Press the front or
rear of ~ to the first detent to open
. To turn off both traction control
and close the vent feature. The and StabiliTrak, press and hold
sunshade partially opens and closes the g button, until the Traction
automatically during the vent Off Light i and the StabiliTrak
operation. Off Light g illuminate.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-23
. Press and release the g button The low tire pressure warning light Resetting the Oil Life System
again to turn on both systems. may come on in cool weather when 1. Using the DIC controls on the
the vehicle is first started, and then right side of the steering wheel,
See Traction Control/Electronic
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This display REMAINING OIL LIFE
Stability Control on page 9-31.
may be an early indicator that the on the DIC. See Driver
tire pressures are getting low and
Tire Pressure Monitor the tires need to be inflated to the
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5-26. When remaining oil
This vehicle may have a Tire proper pressure. life is low, the CHANGE
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS does not replace normal ENGINE OIL SOON message
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain will appear on the display. See
the correct tire pressures. Engine Oil Messages on
See Tire Pressure Monitor System page 5-31.
on page 10-47. 2. Press V on the DIC controls and
hold down for a few seconds to
Engine Oil Life System clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The low tire pressure warning light The engine oil life system calculates SOON message and reset the
alerts to a significant loss in engine oil life based on vehicle use oil life at 100%.
pressure of one of the vehicle's and displays the CHANGE ENGINE Be careful not to reset the oil life
tires. If the warning light comes on, OIL SOON message when it is time display accidentally at any time
stop as soon as possible and inflate to change the engine oil and filter. other than after the oil is
the tires to the recommended The oil life system should be reset changed. It cannot be reset
pressure shown on the Tire and to 100% only following an oil accurately until the next oil
Loading Information label. See change. change.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-24 In Brief
The oil life system can also be reset E85 or FlexFuel Driving for Better Fuel
as follows:
Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can Economy
1. Turn the ignition on with the use either unleaded gasoline or
engine off. Driving habits can affect fuel
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% mileage. Here are some driving tips
2. Fully press and release the ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel to get the best fuel economy
accelerator pedal three times on page 9-55. For all other vehicles, possible.
within five seconds. use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Fuel on page 9-53.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL smoothly.
SOON message is not on, the
system is reset.
. Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10-10.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
. When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
. Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Brief 1-25
Replace the vehicle's tires with

OnStar®
.
the same TPC Spec number

molded into the tire's sidewall This vehicle may be equipped with a
near the size. comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
. Follow recommended scheduled
Advisor for Emergency, Security,
maintenance.
Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
Roadside Assistance services may require a paid
Program subscription. See OnStar Overview
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 on page 14-1.
TTY Users (U.S. Only):

1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13-5.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1-26 In Brief
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Immobilizer Operation (Key
Keys and Locks
Windows Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Immobilizer Operation Keys
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks Exterior Mirrors
{ Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 an ignition key or Remote
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 dangerous and children or others
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9 could be seriously injured or
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Interior Mirrors killed. They could operate the
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-21 power window or other controls or
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-21 make the vehicle move. The
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-13 Automatic Dimming Rearview windows will function with the key
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 in the ignition or with the RKE
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 transmitter in the vehicle, and
Windows
Doors children or others could be caught
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 in the path of a closing window.
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Do not leave children in a vehicle
Vehicle Security with the ignition key or an RKE
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Roof transmitter.
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-16 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
With an active OnStar subscription,

an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14-1.
Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
The key that is part of the Remote RKE With Remote Start Shown, . Check the distance. The
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can Without Similar transmitter may be too far from
be used for the ignition and all locks Press the button on the RKE the vehicle.
if the vehicle is a Key Access transmitter to extend the key. Press
vehicle. If the vehicle has the
. Check the location. Other
the button and the key blade to vehicles or objects may be
keyless ignition, the key can be retract the key.
used for the locks. blocking the signal.
If the vehicle has an ignition and it . Check the transmitter's battery.
becomes difficult to turn the key, See “Battery Replacement” later
inspect the key blade for debris. in this section.
Periodically clean with a brush
or pick. . If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
See your dealer if a new key is dealer or a qualified technician
needed. for service.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Remote Keyless Entry See “Remote Lock, Unlock, Start” Pressing K will disarm the alarm
under Vehicle Personalization on system. See Vehicle Alarm System
(RKE) System Operation page 5-38. on page 2-16.
The transmitter functions may work If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout is
up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the Memory seat positions may be
enabled through Vehicle recalled when unlocking the vehicle.
vehicle. Personalization and the driver door See Memory Seats on page 3-7 and
Keep in mind that other conditions, is open when Q is pressed, all “Auto Memory Recall” under Vehicle
such as those previously stated, can doors lock and the driver door will Personalization on page 5-38.
impact the performance of the immediately unlock. See “Remote
transmitter. Lock, Unlock, Start” under Vehicle
Y (Remote Trunk Release):
Press and hold to release the trunk.
Personalization on page 5-38.
If the passenger door is open when
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release one
Q is pressed, all doors lock. time to initiate vehicle locator. The
Pressing Q may also arm the alarm exterior lamps flash and the horn
system. See Vehicle Alarm System chirps three times.
on page 2-16. Press and hold 7 for at least
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the three seconds to sound the panic
driver door or all doors. See “Power alarm. The horn sounds and the
Door Locks” under Vehicle turn signals flash for about
Personalization on page 5-38. 30 seconds until 7 is pressed again
The turn signal indicators may flash or the vehicle is started.
With Remote Start Shown
to indicate unlocking. See “Remote / (Remote Vehicle Start):
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. Unlock Light Feedback” under
If equipped, press Q and release
The turn signal indicators may flash Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-38. and then immediately press and
and/or the horn may sound on the
hold / for at least four seconds to
second press to indicate locking.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
start the engine from outside the Keyless Unlocking/Locking from

vehicle using the RKE transmitter. the Driver Door
See Remote Vehicle Start on When the doors are locked and the
page 2-9. RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)
If equipped with a keyed ignition, of the driver door handle, pressing
the RKE transmitter buttons will not the lock/unlock button on the driver
operate when the key is in the door handle will unlock the driver
ignition. door. If the lock/unlock button is
pressed again within five seconds,
Keyless Access Operation all passenger doors will unlock. Pull
Some vehicles have the Keyless the door handle to unlatch the door.
Access system that lets you lock
and unlock the doors and access Driver Side Shown, Passenger
the trunk without removing the RKE Similar
transmitter from your pocket, purse, Pressing the lock/unlock button will
briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter cause all doors to lock if any of the
must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the door following occur:
being unlocked. If the vehicle has
this feature, there will be a button on . It has been more than
the outside door handles. five seconds since the first lock/
unlock button press.
The Keyless Access can be
programmed to unlock all doors on . Two lock/unlock button presses
the first unlock/lock button press were used to unlock all doors.
from the driver door. See Vehicle . Any vehicle door has opened
Personalization on page 5-38. and all doors are now closed.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from If passive locking is enabled, the Programming Transmitters to

Passenger Doors doors may lock with the RKE the Vehicle
When the doors are locked and the transmitter inside the vehicle. Do
not leave the RKE transmitter in an Only RKE transmitters programmed
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) to the vehicle will work. If a
of the door handle, pressing the unattended vehicle.
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
lock/unlock button on that door Temporarily Disable Passive replacement can be purchased and
handle will unlock all doors. Locking Feature programmed through your dealer.
Pressing the lock/unlock button will The vehicle can be reprogrammed
Temporarily disable the locking so that lost or stolen transmitters no
cause all doors to lock if any of the
following occur: feature by pressing and holding K longer work. Any remaining
on the door for several seconds with transmitters will need to be
. The lock/unlock button was used a door open. Passive locking will reprogrammed. Each vehicle can
to unlock all doors.
then remain disabled until Q is have up to eight transmitters
. Any vehicle door has opened pressed, or until the vehicle is matched to it.
and all doors are now closed. turned on. Programming with a Recognized
Passive Locking To customize whether the doors Transmitter (Key Vehicles Only)
automatically lock when you exit the To program a new key:
If equipped with Keyless Access, vehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,
the vehicle will lock several seconds Start” under Vehicle Personalization 1. Insert the original, already
after all doors are closed if the on page 5-38. programmed key in the ignition
vehicle is off and at least one and turn to the key to the ON/
transmitter has been removed or Keyless Trunk Opening RUN position.
none remain in the vehicle.
Press the touch pad on the trunk lid 2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and
If other electronic devices interfere to open the trunk if the RKE remove the key.
with the RKE transmitter signal, the transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the
vehicle may not detect the RKE trunk.
transmitter inside the vehicle.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
3. Insert the new key to be vehicle must be off and all of the To program, the vehicle must be off
programmed and turn it to the keys you wish to program must be and at least one currently
ON/RUN position within with you. recognized transmitter and all new
five seconds. 1. Insert the new vehicle key into transmitters, must be with you.
The security light will turn off the ignition. 1. Place the recognized
once the key has been 2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
programmed. light will come on. 2. Remove the key lock cylinder
4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additional 3. Wait 10 minutes until the cap. See Door Locks on
keys are to be programmed. security light turns off. page 2-11. Then insert the
If a key is lost or damaged, see your vehicle key into the key lock
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. cylinder on the driver door
dealer to have a new key made.
5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more handle and turn the key,
Programming without a times. After the third time, turn to counterclockwise, to the unlock
Recognized Transmitter (Key ON/RUN; the key is learned and position five times within
Vehicles Only) all previously known keys will no 10 seconds.
Program a new key to the vehicle longer work with the vehicle. The Driver Information Center
when a recognized key is not Remaining keys can be learned by (DIC) displays READY FOR
available. Canadian regulations following the procedure in REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.
require that owners see their dealer. “Programming with a Recognized
If there are no currently recognized Transmitter.”
keys available, follow this procedure Programming with a Recognized
to program the first key. Transmitter (Keyless Access
This procedure will take Vehicles Only)
approximately 30 minutes to A new transmitter can be
complete for the first key. The programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
5. Remove the transmitter from the 1. Remove the key lock cylinder
transmitter pocket and press K. cap. See Door Locks on
page 2-11. Then insert the
To program additional vehicle key into the key lock
transmitters, repeat Steps 3–5. cylinder on the driver door
When all additional transmitters handle and turn the key,
are programmed, press and hold counterclockwise, to the unlock
the ENGINE START/STOP position five times within
button for 12 seconds to exit 10 seconds.
programming mode. The Driver Information Center
Programming without a (DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN
Recognized Transmitter (Keyless PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
3. Place the new transmitter into Access Vehicles Only) 2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC
the transmitter pocket. The displays PRESS ENGINE
If there are no currently recognized
transmitter pocket is located START BUTTON TO LEARN
transmitters available, follow this
inside the center console and then press the ENGINE
procedure to program up to eight
storage area. START/STOP button.
transmitters. This feature is not
4. Press the ENGINE START/ available in Canada. This procedure The DIC displays will again
STOP button. When the will take approximately 30 minutes show REMOTE LEARN
transmitter is learned, the DIC to complete. The vehicle must be off PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
will show that it is ready to and all of the transmitters you wish
program the next transmitter. to program must be with you.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional 6. Remove the transmitter from the To start the vehicle:
times. After the third time, all transmitter pocket and press K.
previously known transmitters
will no longer work with the To program additional
vehicle. Remaining transmitters transmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.
can be relearned during the next When all additional transmitters
steps. are programmed, press and hold
The DIC display should now the ENGINE START/STOP
show READY FOR REMOTE button for 12 seconds to exit
# 1. programming mode.
4. Place the new transmitter into Starting the Vehicle with a Low
the transmitter pocket. The Transmitter Battery or Wireless
transmitter pocket is inside the Interference
center console storage area.
If the transmitter battery is weak or 1. Open the center console and
5. Press the ENGINE START/ there is wireless interference, the place the transmitter in the
STOP button. When the DIC may display NO REMOTE transmitter pocket with the
transmitter is learned the DIC DETECTED or PLACE buttons facing the front of the
will show that it is ready to TRANSMITTER IN POCKET TO vehicle.
program the next transmitter. START when you try to start the
vehicle. The REPLACE BATTERY 2. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also N (Neutral), press the brake
be displayed at this time. pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button. See
Starting the Engine on
page 9-18.
Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Battery Replacement Remote Vehicle Start

Replace the battery if the DIC The vehicle may have this feature
indicates that battery replacement is that allows the engine to be started
necessary. See Key and Lock from outside the vehicle.
Messages on page 5-32.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): This
button will be on the RKE
{ Caution transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
When replacing the battery, do
not touch any of the circuitry on The climate control system will use
the transmitter. Static from your the previous settings during a
body could damage the remote start. The rear window
transmitter. 2. Remove the battery cover by defogger may come on during a
prying it with a finger. remote start based on cold ambient
3. Remove the battery by pushing conditions. The rear defog indicator
The battery is not rechargeable. To light does not come on during a
replace the battery: on the battery and sliding it
toward the key blade. remote start.
1. Press the button on the If the vehicle has heated and/or
transmitter to extend the key 4. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Push the battery ventilated seats, they may come on
blade. during a remote start. See Heated
down until it is held in place.
Replace with a CR2032 or and Ventilated Front Seats on
equivalent battery. page 3-10.
5. Snap the battery cover back on Laws in some local communities

to the transmitter. may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote start
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
to have the vehicle in view. Check The engine will continue to run for The vehicle's ignition must be
local regulations for any 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a changed to ON/RUN/START and
requirements. 10-minute time extension. Remote then back to OFF before the remote
Other conditions can affect the start can be extended only once. start procedure can be used again.
performance of the transmitter. See To drive the vehicle, turn the ignition Canceling a Remote Start
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) to ON/RUN for Key Access
System on page 2-2. vehicles, or press the brake pedal To cancel a remote start, do one of
and the ENGINE START/STOP the following:
Starting the Vehicle button for Keyless Access vehicles. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
To start the engine using the remote
Extending Engine Run Time vehicle and press and hold /
start feature: until the parking lamps turn off.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the The engine run time can also be
extended by another 10 minutes,
. Turn on the hazard warning
vehicle. flashers.
if during the first 10 minutes
2. Press and release Q. Steps 1–3 are repeated while the . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
engine is still running. This provides
3. Immediately after completing a total of 20 minutes. Conditions in Which Remote Start
Step 2, press and hold / for at Will Not Work
The remote start can only be
least four seconds or until the The remote vehicle start feature will
extended once.
turn signal lamps flash. The turn not operate if:
signal lamps flashing confirms When the remote start is extended,
the request to remote start the the second 10-minute period is
. The key is in the ignition (Key
vehicle has been received. added on to the first 10 minutes and Access) or if the key is in the
the engine will run for a total of vehicle (Keyless Access).
When the engine starts, the parking
20 minutes. . The hood is not closed.
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The A maximum of two remote starts, . The hazard warning flashers
doors will be locked and the climate or a remote start with an extension, are on.
control system may come on. are allowed between ignition cycles.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. The malfunction indicator lamp Keyless Access
is on. Warning (Continued)
. The engine coolant temperature safety belts properly and the
is too high. doors should be locked
. The oil pressure is low. whenever the vehicle is
driven.
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a
single remote start with an . Young children who get into
extension, have already unlocked vehicles may be
been used. unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
Door Locks heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it. If equipped, use the Keyless Access
{ Warning . Outsiders can easily enter system to lock and unlock the door.
Unlocked doors can be through an unlocked door When the doors are locked and the
when slowing or stopping the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
dangerous.
vehicle. Lock the doors to transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the
. Passengers, especially help prevent this from driver door handle, press the lock/
children, can easily open the happening. unlock button. When unlocking from
doors and fall out of a moving the driver door, the first press
vehicle. The chance of being unlocks that door; press again
thrown out of the vehicle in a within five seconds to unlock all
crash is increased if the passenger doors. See Remote
doors are not locked. So, all Keyless Entry (RKE) System
passengers should wear Operation on page 2-3.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Key Cylinder Access
3. Move the cap forward and press

to snap the cap in place.
To access the key cylinder:
4. Release the door handle.
1. Pull the door handle (1) to the
open position. Inside the Vehicle
2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3) Push down on the door lock knob to
on the bottom of the cap (2) and lock the door manually. Pull once on
pry outward. the door handle to unlock the door
and again to open the door.
3. Move the cap (2) rearward and
remove. Press the power door lock switch to
lock or unlock all doors
4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder. automatically. See Power Door
To replace the cap: 2. Insert the two tabs (7) at the Locks on page 2-13.
1. Pull the door handle to the open back of the cap (8) between the
position. seal (5) and the metal base (6).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Power Door Locks When delayed locking is active and Automatic door unlocking can be
Q is pressed on the door lock programmed through the Driver
switch while the door is open, a Information Center (DIC). See
chime will sound three times. Vehicle Personalization on
When all the doors are closed, the page 5-38.
doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If a door is reopened Lockout Protection
before five seconds have elapsed, Key Access
the five-second timer will reset once
all the doors are closed again. If the key is in the ignition and the
power door lock switch is pressed
Press Q on the door lock switch with the driver door open, all doors
again or press Q on the RKE will lock and only the driver door will
transmitter to override this feature unlock.
and lock the doors immediately. Keyless Access
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. If equipped with Keyless Access,
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the Automatic Door Locks when the vehicle is in ACC/
doors. The doors will lock automatically ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START
when all doors are closed, the and the power door lock switch is
Delayed Locking ignition is on, and the shift lever is pressed with the driver door open,
moved out of P (Park). all doors will lock and only the driver
This feature is activated through
To unlock the doors: door will unlock.
vehicle personalization. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-38. If the vehicle is off and locking is
. Press K on a door. requested while a door is open,
. Shift the transmission into when all doors are closed the
P (Park). vehicle will check for RKE
transmitters inside. If an RKE
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
transmitter is detected and the Safety Locks If a rear door handle is being pulled
number of RKE transmitters has not at the same time the safety lock is
reduced, the driver door will unlock. The rear door safety locks prevent deactivated, that door will remain
passengers from opening the rear locked and the indicator light may
Lockout Protection Override doors from inside the vehicle. flash. Release the handle, then
Lockout protection can be manually press the safety lock twice to
overridden with the driver door open deactivate the safety locks.
by pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When this feature is on and door
locking is requested with the driver
door open, all doors will lock and
only the driver door will unlock. The
driver door must be closed before
locking is requested for all doors to
remain locked. When this feature is
off, the Delayed Door Lock menu Press Z { to activate the safety
will be available. locks on the rear doors. The
This feature can also be indicator light in the switch will
programmed. See Vehicle illuminate when activated.
Personalization on page 5-38. The rear door power windows are
also disabled. See Power Windows
on page 2-22.
Press Z { again to deactivate the
safety locks.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Doors Warning (Continued)

Trunk . Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
{ Warning brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems” in the
liftgate, hatch/trunk open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle is equipped with
seal between the body and the a power liftgate, disable the
hatch/trunk or liftgate. Engine power liftgate function.
To open the trunk:
exhaust contains carbon For more information about
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Press | with the transmission
seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 9-24. in P (Park).
unconsciousness and even death.
. Press and hold Y on the RKE
If the vehicle must be driven with transmitter.
the liftgate or hatch/trunk open: . If equipped, press the touch pad
. Close all of the windows. on the underside of the trunk lid
. Fully open the air outlets on after unlocking all doors.
or under the instrument If equipped with Keyless Access,
panel. the RKE transmitter must be within
(Continued) 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk. Press the
touch pad on the underside of the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
trunk and lift to open. See Remote Vehicle Security

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2-3. This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
When closing the trunk, use the
the vehicle impossible to steal.
pull cup.
Emergency Trunk Release Vehicle Alarm System
Handle This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
{ Caution
Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or There is a glow-in-the-dark
anchor point when securing items emergency trunk release handle on
in the trunk as it could damage the trunk lid. This handle will glow
the handle. following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle to open the trunk
from the inside.
After use, return to the stored
position.
If equipped with the anti-theft alarm

system, the indicator light, on the
instrument panel near the
windshield, indicates the status of
the system.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Off: Alarm system is disarmed. flash indicating the alarm system Disarming the System
On Solid: Vehicle is secured is operating. Pressing Q on the To disarm the system, do one of the
during the delay to arm the system. RKE transmitter a second time following:
will bypass the 30-second delay
Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured. and immediately arm the alarm . Press K on the RKE transmitter.
A door or the hood is open. system. . If the vehicle has Keyless
Slow Flash: Alarm system is The theft-deterrent alarm system will Access, unlock the vehicle using
armed. not arm if the doors are locked with the door handle lock/unlock
Arming the Alarm System the key. button with the RKE transmitter
within 1 m (3 ft) of the vehicle.
1. Turn off the vehicle. If the driver door is opened without
first unlocking the RKE transmitter, . Start the vehicle.
2. Lock the vehicle with one of the the horn will chirp and the lights will
following: To avoid setting off the alarm by
flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the accident:
. Use the Remote Keyless vehicle is not started, or the door is
Entry (RKE) transmitter. not unlocked by pressing K on the
. Lock the vehicle after all
occupants have left the vehicle
. If the vehicle has Keyless RKE transmitter during the
and all doors are closed.
Access, use the door 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will
handle lock/unlock button be activated. . Always unlock a door with the
with the RKE transmitter RKE transmitter.
If a door or the hood is opened
within 1 m (3 ft) of the without first disarming the system, Unlocking the driver door with the
vehicle. the turn signals will flash and the key will not disarm the system or
. With a door open, press the horn will sound for about turn off the alarm.
inside Q. 30 seconds. The alarm system will
then re-arm to monitor for the next
3. After 30 seconds the alarm unauthorized event.
system will arm, and the
indicator light will begin to slowly
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
How to Detect a Tamper The system is automatically If the engine still does not start, and
Condition disarmed when the vehicle is the key appears to be undamaged
started with the correct key. The key or the light continues to stay on, try
If K is pressed and the horn chirps uses a transponder that matches an another ignition key.
and the lights flash three times, an immobilizer control unit in the If the engine still does not start with
alarm occurred previously while the vehicle and automatically disarms the other key, the vehicle needs
alarm system was armed. the system. Only the correct key service. If the vehicle does start, the
If the alarm has been activated, a starts the vehicle. The vehicle may first key may be damaged. See your
message will appear on the DIC. not start if the key is damaged. dealer who can service the
See Security Messages on theft-deterrent system and have a
page 5-35. new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that
Immobilizer disarms or deactivates the
See Radio Frequency Statement on theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
page 13-12.
The security light in the instrument Immobilizer Operation
Immobilizer Operation cluster comes on if there is a (Keyless Access)
(Key Access) problem with arming or disarming
This vehicle has a passive
the theft-deterrent system.
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
theft-deterrent system. When trying to start the vehicle, the
The system does not have to be
security light comes on briefly when
The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed.
the ignition is turned on.
manually armed or disarmed. The vehicle is automatically
If the engine does not start and the
The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the transmitter
security light stays on, there is a
immobilized when the key is leaves the vehicle.
problem with the system. Turn the
removed from the ignition. ignition off and try again.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The immobilization system is If the engine does not start and the Exterior Mirrors
disarmed when the ignition button is security light stays on, there is a
pushed in and a valid transmitter is problem with the system. Turn the
found in the vehicle. vehicle off and try again. Convex Mirrors
If the RKE transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another transmitter. { Caution
Or, you may try placing the A convex mirror can make things,
transmitter in the transmitter pocket like other vehicles, look farther
in the center console. See “Starting
away than they really are. If you
the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
cut too sharply into the right lane,
Battery or Wireless Interference”
The security light in the instrument under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) you could hit a vehicle on the
cluster comes on When there is a System Operation on page 2-3. right. Check the inside mirror or
problem with arming or disarming glance over your shoulder before
If the engine does not start with the changing lanes.
the theft-deterrent system.
other transmitter or when the
The system has one or more transmitter is in the pocket in the
transmitters matched to an center console, your vehicle needs The passenger side mirror is convex
immobilizer control unit in your service. See your dealer who can shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
vehicle. Only a correctly matched service the theft-deterrent system curved so more can be seen from
transmitter will start the vehicle. and have a new transmitter the driver seat.
If the transmitter is ever damaged, programmed to the vehicle.
you may not be able to start your
Do not leave the transmitter or
vehicle.
device that disarms or deactivates
When trying to start the vehicle, the the theft-deterrent system in the
security light comes on briefly when vehicle.
the ignition is turned on.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Power Mirrors Exterior Automatic Dimming Puddle Light

Mirror The vehicle has a puddle light on
The vehicle may have a driver the mirror housings. The light will
exterior automatic dimming mirror illuminate the ground when the door
that will automatically adjust for the is opened.
glare of headlamps behind.
Memory Mirrors Folding Mirrors
The vehicle may have memory Manual Folding Mirrors
mirrors. See Memory Seats on The vehicle has manual folding
page 3-7. mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car
The vehicle may have SBZA. See wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
1. Move the selector switch to L Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
(Left) or R (Right) to choose the page 9-50. to return it to the original position.
driver or passenger mirror. Turn Signal Indicator
2. Press one of the four arrows to The vehicle has a turn signal
Heated Mirrors
move the mirror. indicator on the mirror housings. = (Rear Window Defogger):
3. Move the selector switch to ) to The indicator will flash when a turn If equipped, press to heat the
deselect the mirror. signal or the hazard warning mirrors.
flashers are used. See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8-3.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Reverse Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows

If equipped with memory seats, the
passenger and/or driver mirror tilts Interior Rearview Mirrors { Warning
to a preselected position when the Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
vehicle is in R (Reverse). This Never leave a child, a helpless
view of the area behind your
allows the curb to be seen when adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
vehicle.
parallel parking. especially with the windows
Do not spray glass cleaner directly closed in warm or hot weather.
The mirror(s) return to the original on the mirror. Use a soft towel
position when: They can be overcome by the
dampened with water. extreme heat and suffer
. The vehicle is shifted out of permanent injuries or even death
R (Reverse), or remains in Manual Rearview Mirror from heat stroke.
R (Reverse) for about
30 seconds. If equipped with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
. The ignition is turned off. daytime use and pull it for nighttime
. The vehicle is driven in use to avoid glare from the
R (Reverse) above a set speed. headlamps from behind.
To turn this feature on or off, see
Automatic Dimming
page 5-38. Rearview Mirror
If equipped, automatic dimming
reduces the glare of headlamps
from behind. The dimming feature
comes on when the vehicle is
started.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The vehicle aerodynamics are Express-Down/Up Windows

designed to improve fuel economy
If equipped, this feature allows the
performance. This may result in a
windows to be raised and lowered
pulsing sound when either rear
all the way without holding the
window is down and the front
switch.
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window Press or pull the switch fully and
or the sunroof, if equipped. release it to activate the express
feature.
Power Windows The express mode can be canceled
by briefly pressing or pulling the
{ Warning switch.
The power windows only operate Express Window Anti-Pinch
Children could be seriously with the ignition in ACC/
injured or killed if caught in the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
Feature
path of a closing window. Never or when Retained Accessory Power If any object is in the path of the
leave the Remote Keyless Entry (RAP) is active. See Retained window when the express-up is
(RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with Accessory Power (RAP) on active, the window will stop at the
children. When there are children page 9-22. obstruction and auto-reverse to a
in the rear seat, use the window The power window switches on the preset factory position. Weather
lockout switch to prevent driver door control all the windows. conditions such as severe icing may
operation of the windows. See Each passenger door has a switch also cause the window to
Keys on page 2-1. that controls only that window. auto-reverse. The window will return
to normal operation after the
Press the switch to lower the obstruction or condition is removed.
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Express Window Anti-Pinch Programming the Power Window Lockout

Override Windows
If the vehicle battery has been
{ Warning recharged or disconnected, or is not
working, the front power windows
If express override is activated, will need to be reprogrammed for
the window will not reverse the express-up feature to work.
automatically. You or others could Before reprogramming, replace or
be injured and the window could recharge the vehicle's battery.
be damaged. Before you use
To program:
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are 1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
clear of the window path. ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active, close all doors.
The anti-pinch feature can be 2. Press and hold the power This feature prevents the rear
overridden. Hold the window switch window switch until the window passenger windows from operating,
all the way up to the second is fully open. except from the driver position.
position. The window will rise for as 3. Pull the power window switch up Press Z { to activate the window
long as the switch is held. Once the until the window is fully closed. lockout. The indicator light in the
switch is released, the express switch will illuminate when
mode is reactivated. 4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds activated.
In this mode, the window can close after the window is completely The rear door locks are also
on an object in its path. Use care closed. disabled. See Safety Locks on
when using the override mode. page 2-14.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other Press Z { again to deactivate the
windows. lockout switch.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the indicator light flashes, the Roof Sunroof Switch

feature may not be working properly. Open/Close: Press and hold the
Sun Visors Sunroof front or rear of ~ to open or close
For vehicles equipped with a the sunroof. Release ~ at the
sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/ desired position to stop movement.
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Vent Feature: Press the front or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
rear of ~ to the first detent to open
operate the sunroof and power
sunshade. See Retained Accessory and close the vent feature. The
Power (RAP) on page 9-22. sunshade partially opens and closes
automatically during the vent
operation.
Express Open/Express Close:
Pull the sun visor down to block Fully press and release the front or
glare. Detach the sun visor from the rear of ~. The sunroof opens and
center mount to pivot to the side closes automatically.
window, or to extend along the rod.
Sunshade Switch
Open/Close: Press and hold the
front or rear of Q to open or close
the sunshade to the desired
position.
Express Open/Express Close:
1. ~ Sunroof Switch Fully press and release the front or
2. Q Sunshade Switch rear of Q to express open or
express close the sunshade. If the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
sunroof is open, the sunshade will

express close just short of the open
sunroof.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof/sunshade when it is closing,
the anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof/
sunshade from closing at the point Dirt and debris may collect on the
of the obstruction. The sunroof/ sunroof seal or in the track. This
sunshade will then return to the could cause an issue with sunroof
full-open position. To close the operation or noise. It could also plug
sunroof/sunshade, see “Express the water drainage system.
Open/Express Close” earlier in this Periodically open the sunroof and
section. remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Replacing Airbag System
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-18 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraints
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Front Seats Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-38
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-22 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-39
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 for Children (LATCH
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Replacing LATCH System
How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
What Will You See after an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-48
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
If your vehicle has rear head top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
restraints that fold down, always height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint, and pull up or
return them to the full upright head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down and
position whenever an occupant is chance of a neck injury in a crash. release the button. Pull and push on
seated in the seat. the head restraint after the button is
Front Seats released to make sure it is locked in
The vehicle's front seats have place.
adjustable head restraints in the The front seat outboard head
outboard seating positions. restraints are not removable.
Two-Way Head Restraints Four-Way Head Restraints
The height of the head restraint can The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. be adjusted.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Rear Seats
The vehicle's rear seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The height of the head restraint can
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To raise or lower the head restraint, To adjust the head restraint forward
press the button located on the side or rearward, press the button
of the head restraint, and pull up or located on the side facing of the
push the head restraint down and head restraint and move it forward
release the button. Pull and push on or rearward until the desired locking
the head restraint after the button is position is reached. Try to move the
released to make sure that it is head restraint after the button is
locked in place. released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not removable.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
head restraint after the button is When an occupant or child restraint Front Seats
released to make sure that it is is in the seat, always return the
locked in place. head restraint to the full upright
position. Push down on the head Seat Adjustment
restraint to release the locking
mechanism. Then, pull the head { Warning
restraint up and push it rearward
until it is in the full upright position. You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
Always adjust the head restraint so
seat while the vehicle is moving.
that the top of the restraint is at the
Adjust the driver seat only when
same height as the top of the
occupant's head. the vehicle is not moving.
Rear outboard head restraints are

not removable.
On some models, the rear head

restraints can be folded forward to
allow for better visibility when the
rear seat is unoccupied. To fold the
head restraint, grasp the top of the
head restraint and pull the head
restraint forward and down until it
locks in place.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Raise or lower the front part of
To adjust a manual seat: Power Seat Adjustment the seat cushion by moving the
1. Pull the handle at the front of front of the control up or down.
the seat. { Warning . Raise or lower the seat by
2. Slide the seat to the desired moving the rear of the control up
You can lose control of the
position and release the handle. or down.
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
3. Try to move the seat back and seat while the vehicle is moving. To adjust the seatback, see
forth to be sure it is locked in Adjust the driver seat only when Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-6.
place. the vehicle is not moving. To adjust the lumbar support, see
Seat Height Adjuster Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-6.
Press and hold the top or bottom of To adjust the seat:

the switch to raise or lower the seat. . Move the seat forward or
Release the switch when the rearward by sliding the control
desired height is reached. forward or rearward.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
Lumbar with Power Recline other injuries.
Shown, Manual Recline Similar Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The lap belt could go up over
To adjust the lumbar support: your abdomen. The belt forces
. Press and hold the control would be there, not at your pelvic { Warning
forward to increase or rearward bones. This could cause serious
If either seatback is not locked, it
to decrease lumbar support. internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
. If equipped with manual recline, For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause
press and hold the top of the vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
control to increase or the bottom seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
of the control to decrease the back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
lumbar support. safety belt properly. locked.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Memory Seats

Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
B (Exit) buttons on the driver door
To adjust a power seatback: are used to manually save and
release the lever to lock the
recall memory settings for the driver
seatback in place. . Tilt the top of the control seat, outside mirrors, and power tilt
3. Push and pull on the seatback to rearward to recline. and telescoping steering column (if
make sure it is locked. . Tilt the top of the control forward equipped).
To return the seatback to the upright to raise.
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Storing Memory Positions 3. Immediately press and hold B Depending upon the Auto Memory
To save positions to the “1” and “2” until two beeps sound. Recall feature enabled in the vehicle
buttons: personalization menu, memory “1”
Manually Recalling Memory or “2” positions are recalled in the
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside Positions following ways:
mirrors, and the power tilt and If the vehicle is OFF or not in
telescoping steering column (if To activate the recall when On -
P (Park), press and hold "1," "2," or Driver Door Open is selected in the
equipped) to the desired driving B to manually recall the previously
positions. vehicle personalization menu, do
stored memory positions. Releasing one of the following:
2. Press and release SET. A beep "1,” "2," or B before the stored
will sound. . On vehicles with RKE, press K
positions are reached stops the
recall. on the RKE transmitter and open
3. Immediately press and hold “1” the driver door.
until two beeps sound. If the vehicle is ON and in P (Park), . On vehicles with Keyless
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a press and release “1,” “2,” or B to Access, press the lock/unlock
second driver using “2.” manually recall the previously button on the outside driver door
stored memory positions. Placing
To save positions to the B (Exit) handle and open the driver door.
the ignition in OFF before the stored The RKE transmitter must be
button and easy exit features: positions are reached stops the present for the recall to activate.
1. Adjust the driver seat, power tilt recall.
and telescoping steering column
. If the driver door is already
(if equipped), and the outside Automatically Recalling Memory open, press K on the RKE
mirrors on some vehicles to the Positions (Auto Memory Recall)
transmitter to activate the recall.
desired positions for getting out The Auto (Automatic) Memory
of the vehicle. Recall feature automatically recalls
2. Press and release SET. A beep the current driver’s previously stored
will sound. “1” or “2” position when entering the
vehicle.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
To activate the recall when On - At Positions” listed previously. See

. If automatically recalling the
Ignition On is selected in the vehicle also Vehicle Personalization on position, press and hold the
personalization menu: page 5-38. appropriate manual control for
the memory item that is not
. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/ Easy exit recall automatically recalling for two seconds. Try
START. activates when one of the following recalling again by opening the
occurs:
See Vehicle Personalization on driver door and pressing K on
page 5-38. . The vehicle is turned off and the the RKE transmitter.
To stop recall movement, press one driver door is opened within a
short time.
. If recalling the exit position,
of the memory, power mirror, press and hold the appropriate
or power seat controls; or press the . The vehicle is turned off with the manual control for the exit
power tilt and telescoping steering driver door open. feature not recalling for
column control (if equipped). If On - two seconds. Then try recalling
At Ignition On is selected in the Obstructions
the exit position again.
vehicle personalization menu, If something has blocked the driver
placing the ignition in OFF/LOCK seat and/or power tilt and If the memory position is still not
also stops the recall. telescoping steering column (if recalling, see your dealer for
equipped) while recalling a memory service.
Easy Exit Recall position, the recall may stop.
If programmed on in the vehicle Remove the obstruction. Then do
personalization menu, the easy exit one of the following:
feature automatically moves the . If manually recalling the position,
driver seat, power tilt and press and hold the appropriate
telescoping steering column (if manual control for the memory
equipped), and outside mirrors on item that is not recalling for
some vehicles to the memory two seconds. Try recalling again
positions saved to the B (Exit) by pressing the appropriate
button. See “Storing Memory memory button.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Heated and Ventilated C (Ventilated Seat): If available,

Front Seats press to ventilate the driver or
passenger seat. A ventilated seat
has a fan that pulls or pushes air
{ Warning through the seat. The air is not
cooled.
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the An indicator light on the button turns
seat heater may cause burns. To on when the heated or ventilated
reduce the risk of burns, people seat is on.
with such a condition should use Press the button once for the
care when using the seat heater, highest setting. With each press of
especially for long periods of Heated and Ventilated Seat the button, the seat will change to
time. Do not place anything on Buttons Shown, Heated Seat the next lower setting, and then to
the seat that insulates against Buttons Similar the off setting. The lights near the
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, button indicate three for the highest
cover, or similar item. This may If available, the buttons are on the setting and one for the lowest. If the
cause the seat heater to center console. To operate, the heated seats are on high, the level
overheat. An overheated seat ignition must be on. may automatically be lowered after
heater may cause a burn or may I (Heated Seatback): If available, approximately 30 minutes.
damage the seat. press to heat the driver or The passenger seat may take
passenger seatback only. longer to heat up.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Remote Start Auto Heated and
Press to heat the driver or Ventilated Seats
passenger seat cushion and
seatback. During a remote start, the heated or
ventilated seats (if available) can be
turned on automatically. When it is
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
cold outside, the heated seats turn Rear Seats To fold the seatback:
on, and when it is hot outside the
ventilated seats turn on. The heated Folding the Seatback
or ventilated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned on. Press Either side of the seatback can be
the button to use the heated or folded for more cargo space. Fold a
ventilated seats after the vehicle is seatback only when the vehicle is
started. not moving.
The heated or ventilated seat

indicator lights on the button do not
{ Caution
turn on during a remote start. Folding a rear seat with the safety
The heated seat temperature belts still fastened may cause
performance of an unoccupied seat damage to the seat or the safety
may be reduced. This is normal. belts. Always unbuckle the safety Rear Seat with Folding Head
belts and return them to their Restraints Shown, Non-Folding
The heated or ventilated seats will
not turn on during a remote start normal stowed position before Head Restraints Similar
unless they are enabled in the folding a rear seat. 1. Lift the lever on top of the
vehicle personalization menu. See seatback to unlock it.
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-9
A tab near the seatback lever
and Vehicle Personalization on
raises when the seatback is
page 5-38.
unlocked.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Repeat the steps to fold the
other seatback, if desired.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Raising the Seatback To raise a seatback: Rear Seat Armrest

1. Lift the seatback up and push it
{ Warning rearward to lock it in place.
If either seatback is not locked, it A tab near the seatback lever
could move forward in a sudden retracts when the seatback is
stop or crash. That could cause locked in place.
injury to the person sitting there. 2. Push and pull the top of the
Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked
seatbacks to be sure they are into position.
locked. 3. Repeat the steps to raise the
other seatback, if necessary.
When the seat is not in use, it
{ Warning should be kept in the upright, locked
The rear seat has an armrest in the
position.
A safety belt that is improperly center of the seatback. Lower the
routed, not properly attached, armrest to access the two
or twisted will not provide the cupholders.
protection needed in a crash. The To fold, lift the armrest up and push
person wearing the belt could be it rearward until it is flush with the
seriously injured. After raising the seatback.
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

Warning (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
properly. It also describes some injured or killed. Do not allow
things not to do with safety belts. passengers to ride in any area of
the vehicle that is not equipped
{ Warning with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and
Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, injuries can be much This vehicle has indicators as a
worse than if you are wearing reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
page 5-15.
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
When you wear a safety belt, you
passengers in the vehicle.
and the vehicle slow down together.
It is extremely dangerous to ride There is more time to stop because
in a cargo area, inside or outside you stop over a longer distance and,
of a vehicle. In a collision, when worn properly, your strongest
passengers riding in these areas bones take the forces from the
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front
much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3-33 or Infants of you.
and Young Children on page 3-35. . Always use the correct buckle
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
should I have to wear safety for your seating position.
protection.
belts? . Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just
A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with touching the thighs. In a crash,
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong
safety belts — not instead of in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Wear the shoulder belt over the The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
shoulder and across the chest. how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it
These parts of the body are best properly. get twisted.
able to take belt restraining
forces. The shoulder belt locks if 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
there is a sudden stop or crash. adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very
straight. To see how, see “Seats” quickly. If this happens, let the
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
{ Warning Then pull the belt across you
You can be seriously injured, more slowly.
or even killed, by not wearing If the shoulder portion of a
your safety belt properly. passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
. Never allow the lap or locking feature may be engaged.
shoulder belt to become If this happens, let the belt go
loose or twisted.
back all the way and start again.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.
. Never route the lap or
shoulder belt over an
armrest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. To make the lap part tight, pull front outboard passenger seating
buckle until it clicks. up on the shoulder belt. positions.
Pull up on the latch plate to Adjust the height so the shoulder
make sure it is secure. portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
Position the release button on
should be close to, but not
the buckle so that the safety belt
contacting, the neck. Improper
could be quickly unbuckled if
shoulder belt height adjustment
necessary.
could reduce the effectiveness of
If equipped with a shoulder belt the safety belt in a crash. See How
height adjuster, move it to the to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
height that is right for you. See page 3-14.
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for
instructions on use and
important safety information.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
They can help tighten the safety

belts during the early stages of a Warning (Continued)
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold seriously injured. The shoulder
conditions for pretensioner belt should go over the shoulder
activation are met. Safety belt and across the chest. These parts
pretensioners can also help tighten of the body are best able to take
the safety belts in a side crash or a belt restraining forces.
rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and probably
Press the release button and move other parts of the vehicle's safety
the height adjuster to the desired belt system will need to be replaced.
position. The adjuster can be moved See Replacing Safety Belt System
up by pushing the slide/trim up. Parts after a Crash on page 3-19.
After the adjuster is set to the
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
desired position, try to move it down
without pushing the release button Guides
to make sure it has locked into
position. { Warning
Safety Belt Pretensioners A safety belt that is not properly Rear safety belt comfort guides may
This vehicle has safety belt worn may not provide the provide added safety belt comfort
pretensioners for front outboard protection needed in a crash. The for older children who have
occupants. Although the safety belt person wearing the belt could be outgrown booster seats and for
pretensioners cannot be seen, they (Continued) some adults. When installed on a
are part of the safety belt assembly.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
shoulder belt, the comfort guide Safety Belt Extender

positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head. If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
Adjustable comfort guides are
available through your dealer for the But if a safety belt is not long
rear outboard seating positions. enough, your dealer will order you
Instructions are included with the an extender. When you go in to
guide. order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
Safety Belt Use During long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
Pregnancy else use it, and use it only for the
Safety belts work for everyone, A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to fit. The extender
including pregnant women. Like all lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
occupants, they are more likely to portion should be worn as low as use it for securing child seats. To
be seriously injured if they do not possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
wear safety belts. throughout the pregnancy. belt. See the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety Safety System Check
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a Now and then, check that the safety
crash. For pregnant women, as for belt reminder light, safety belts,
anyone, the key to making safety buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
belts effective is wearing them anchorages are all working properly.
properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety
safety belts may not protect you in a belt assemblies inspected or
crash. They can rip apart under
System Parts after a replaced.
impact forces. If a belt is torn or Crash New parts and repairs may be
frayed, get a new one right away. necessary even if the safety belt
Make sure the safety belt reminder { Warning system was not being used at the
light is working. See Safety Belt time of the crash.
Reminders on page 5-15. A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners
Keep safety belts clean and dry. A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a
See Safety Belt Care on page 3-19. may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle
Safety Belt Care serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-15.
Keep belts clean and dry. crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
{ Warning properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as
It may severely weaken them. In possible.
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of
Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary.
soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. A roof-rail airbag for the front the risk of injury from the force of an
Airbag System outboard passenger and the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
The vehicle has the following passenger seated directly very quickly to do their job.
airbags: behind the front outboard
passenger. Here are the most important things
. A frontal airbag for the driver. to know about the airbag system:
All vehicle airbags have the word
. A frontal airbag for the front AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
outboard passenger. near the deployment opening. { Warning
. A knee airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word You can be severely injured or
. A knee airbag for the front AIRBAG is on the center of the killed in a crash if you are not
outboard passenger. steering wheel for the driver and on wearing your safety belt, even
the instrument panel for the front with airbags. Airbags are
. A seat-mounted side impact
outboard passenger. designed to work with safety
airbag for the driver.
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG belts, not replace them. Also,
. A seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate
is on the lower part of the
airbag for the front outboard in every crash. In some crashes
instrument panel.
passenger. safety belts are the only restraint.
For seat-mounted side impact
. Seat-mounted side impact See When Should an Airbag
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
airbags for the second row Inflate? on page 3-23.
side of the seatback closest to
outboard passengers.
the door. Wearing your safety belt during a
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver crash helps reduce the chance of
For roof-rail airbags, the word
and the passenger seated hitting things inside the vehicle or
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
directly behind the driver. being ejected from it. Airbags are
Airbags are designed to supplement “supplemental restraints” to the
the protection provided by safety safety belts. Everyone in the
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

vehicle should wear a safety belt Occupants should not lean on or
properly, whether or not there is sleep against the door or side
an airbag for that person. windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
There is an airbag readiness light
and/or roof-rail airbags.
on the instrument cluster, which
{ Warning shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
Because airbags inflate with great
force and faster than the blink of
{ Warning system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
an eye, anyone who is up Children who are up against, problem. See Airbag Readiness
against, or very close to any or very close to, any airbag when Light on page 5-15 for more
airbag when it inflates can be it inflates can be seriously injured information.
seriously injured or killed. Do not or killed. Always secure children
sit unnecessarily close to any properly in the vehicle. To read
airbag, as you would be if sitting how, see Older Children on
on the edge of the seat or leaning page 3-33 or Infants and Young
forward. Safety belts help keep Children on page 3-35.
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the passenger knee airbag is below the The seat-mounted side impact
center of the steering wheel. glove box. airbags for the driver and front
outboard passenger are in the side
The front outboard passenger
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel. The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
front outboard passenger, and
second row outboard passengers
are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
or even death. The path of an This vehicle is equipped with
inflating airbag must be kept airbags. See Airbag System on
clear. Do not put anything page 3-20. Airbags are designed to
between an occupant and an inflate if the impact exceeds the
airbag, and do not attach or put specific airbag system's deployment
anything on the steering wheel threshold. Deployment thresholds
hub or on or near any other are used to predict how severe a
airbag covering. crash is likely to be in time for the
Do not use seat accessories that airbags to inflate and help restrain
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, block the inflation path of a the occupants. The vehicle has
Passenger Side Similar electronic sensors that help the
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
airbag system determine the
The second row seat-mounted side Never secure anything to the roof severity of the impact. Deployment
impact airbags are in the sides of of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags thresholds can vary with specific
the rear seatback closest to by routing a rope or tie‐down vehicle design.
the door. through any door or window Frontal airbags are designed to
opening. If you do, the path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal
{ Warning inflating roof-rail airbag will be or near frontal crashes to help
blocked. reduce the potential for severe
If something is between an
injuries, mainly to the driver's or
occupant and an airbag, the front outboard passenger's head
airbag might not inflate properly and chest.
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury Whether the frontal airbags will or
should inflate is not based primarily
(Continued) on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
It depends on what is hit, the Seat-mounted side impact airbags In any particular crash, no one can
direction of the impact, and how are designed to inflate in moderate say whether an airbag should have
quickly the vehicle slows down. to severe side crashes depending inflated simply because of the
Frontal airbags may inflate at on the location of the impact. vehicle damage or repair costs.
different crash speeds depending on Seat-mounted side impact airbags
whether the vehicle hits an object are not designed to inflate in frontal What Makes an Airbag
impacts, near frontal impacts,
straight on or at an angle, and
rollovers, or rear impacts.
Inflate?
whether the object is fixed or
A seat-mounted side impact airbag In a deployment event, the sensing
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
is designed to inflate on the side of system sends an electrical signal
or wide.
the vehicle that is struck. triggering a release of gas from the
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
inflate during vehicle rollovers, in Roof-rail airbags are designed to
airbag causing the bag to break out
rear impacts, or in many side inflate in moderate to severe side
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
impacts. crashes depending on the location
and related hardware are all part of
of the impact. In addition, these
In addition, the vehicle has the airbag module.
roof-rail airbags are designed to
advanced technology frontal inflate during a rollover or in a For airbag locations, see Where Are
airbags. Advanced technology severe frontal impact. Roof-rail the Airbags? on page 3-22.
frontal airbags adjust the restraint airbags are not designed to inflate in
according to crash severity. rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags How Does an Airbag
Knee airbags are designed to inflate will inflate when either side of the Restrain?
in moderate to severe frontal or vehicle is struck, if the sensing
near frontal impacts. Knee airbags system predicts that the vehicle is In moderate to severe frontal or
are not designed to inflate during about to roll over on its side, or in a near frontal collisions, even belted
vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, severe frontal impact. occupants can contact the steering
or in many side impacts. wheel or the instrument panel. In
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
moderate to severe side collisions, What Will You See after

even belted occupants can contact
an Airbag Inflates?
{ Warning
the inside of the vehicle.
After the frontal, knee, and When an airbag inflates, there
Airbags supplement the protection may be dust in the air. This dust
provided by safety belts by seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems
distributing the force of the impact for people with a history of
more evenly over the quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble.
occupant's body. To avoid this, everyone in the
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as
are designed to help contain the they inflate. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have
head and chest of occupants in the the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot
outboard seating positions in the several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an
first and second rows. The rollover airbags, see Where Are the airbag inflates, then get fresh air
capable roof-rail airbags are Airbags? on page 3-22. by opening a window or a door.
designed to help reduce the risk of If you experience breathing
full or partial ejection in rollover The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag
events, although no system can deployment, you should seek
prevent all such ejections. but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming medical attention.
But airbags would not help in many from the vents in the deflated
types of collisions, primarily airbags. Airbag inflation does not
because the occupant's motion is The vehicle has a feature that may
prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn
not toward those airbags. See When the windshield or being able to steer
Should an Airbag Inflate? on on the interior lamps and hazard
the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the
page 3-23. people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate.
Airbags should never be regarded The feature may also activate,
as anything more than a supplement without airbag inflation, after an
to safety belts. event that exceeds a predetermined
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
threshold. You can lock the doors, Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
and turn off the interior lamps and also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
hazard warning flashers by using passenger airbag. service.
the controls for those features. . Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag Passenger Sensing
{ Warning inflates, you will need some new System
parts for the airbag system.
A crash severe enough to inflate The vehicle has a passenger
If you do not get them, the
the airbags may have also sensing system for the front
airbag system will not be there
damaged important functions in outboard passenger position. The
to help protect you in another
the vehicle, such as the fuel passenger airbag status indicator
crash. A new system will include
system, brake and steering will light on the overhead console
airbag modules and possibly
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle when the vehicle is started.
other parts. The service manual
appears to be drivable after a for the vehicle covers the need
moderate crash, there may be to replace other parts.
concealed damage that could . The vehicle has a crash sensing
make it difficult to safely operate and diagnostic module which
the vehicle. records information after a
Use caution if you should attempt crash. See Vehicle Data
to restart the engine after a crash Recording and Privacy on
has occurred. page 13-14 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13-14.
In many crashes severe enough to

. Let only qualified technicians
inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The passenger sensing system

works with sensors that are part of { Warning
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect A child in a rear-facing child
the presence of a properly seated restraint can be seriously injured
occupant and determine if the front or killed if the front outboard
outboard passenger frontal airbag passenger frontal airbag inflates.
United States This is because the back of the
and knee airbag should be allowed
to inflate or not. rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
According to accident statistics,
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in a correct child restraint can be seriously
child restraint for their weight injured or killed if the front
and size. outboard passenger frontal airbag
Canada inflates and the passenger seat is
Whenever possible, children aged in a forward position.
The words ON and OFF or the 12 and under should be secured in
symbol for on and off will be visible a rear seating position. Even if the passenger sensing
during the system check. See system has turned off the front
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Never put a rear-facing child seat in
outboard passenger airbag(s), no
on page 5-16. the front. This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, system is fail-safe. No one can
The passenger sensing system if the airbag inflates. guarantee that an airbag will not
turns off the front outboard inflate under some unusual
passenger frontal airbag and knee circumstance, even though the
airbag, under certain conditions. No airbag(s) are off.
other airbag is affected by the (Continued)
passenger sensing system.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. There is a critical problem with off the front outboard passenger
Warning (Continued) the airbag system or the frontal airbag and knee airbag,
passenger sensing system. depending upon the person’s
Secure rear-facing child restraints seating posture and body build.
When the passenger sensing
in a rear seat, even if the Everyone in the vehicle who has
system has turned off the front
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a outgrown child restraints should
outboard passenger frontal airbag
forward-facing child restraint in and knee airbag, the off indicator wear a safety belt properly —
the front outboard passenger will light and stay lit to remind you whether or not there is an airbag for
seat, always move the seat as far that the airbags are off. See that person.
back as it will go. It is better to Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
on page 5-16. { Warning
The passenger sensing system is
If the airbag readiness light ever
designed to turn on the front
The passenger sensing system is comes on and stays on, it means
designed to turn off the front and knee airbag anytime the system that something may be wrong
outboard passenger airbag and senses that a person of adult size is with the airbag system. To help
knee airbag if: sitting properly in the front outboard avoid injury to yourself or others,
passenger seat. have the vehicle serviced right
. The front outboard passenger
away. See Airbag Readiness
seat is unoccupied. When the passenger sensing Light on page 5-15 for more
. The system determines that an system has allowed the airbags to
information, including important
infant is present in a child be enabled, the on indicator will light
safety information.
restraint. and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbags are active.
. A front outboard passenger
takes his/her weight off of the For some children, including
seat for a period of time. children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
Child Restraint restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
The passenger sensing system is turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
designed to turn off the front recline the vehicle seatback and
outboard passenger frontal airbag adjust the seat cushion,
and knee airbag if the system if adjustable, to make sure that
determines that an infant is present the vehicle seatback is not
in a child restraint. If a child restraint pushing the child restraint into
has been installed and the on the seat cushion.
indicator is lit:
Also make sure the child
1. Turn the vehicle off. restraint is not trapped under the
2. Remove the child restraint from vehicle head restraint. If this
the vehicle. happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
3. Remove any additional items
on page 3-2. If a person of adult size is sitting in
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat 6. Restart the vehicle. the front outboard passenger seat,
heaters, or seat massagers. but the off indicator is lit, it could be
The passenger sensing system
because that person is not sitting
4. Reinstall the child restraint may or may not turn off the
properly in the seat. Use the
following the directions provided airbags for a child in a child
following steps to allow the system
by the child restraint restraint depending upon the
to detect that person and enable the
manufacturer and refer to child's size. It is better to secure
front outboard passenger frontal
Securing Child Restraints (Front a child restraint in a rear seat.
airbag and knee airbag:
Passenger Seat) on page 3-48
or Securing Child Restraints 1. Turn the vehicle off.
(Rear Seat) on page 3-50.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2. Remove any additional material operates. We recommend that you

from the seat, such as blankets, Warning (Continued) not use seat covers or other
cushions, seat covers, seat aftermarket equipment except when
heaters, or seat massagers. Also serious injury or even death. An approved by GM for your specific
remove laptops, or other adult-sized occupant should not vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
electronic devices. ride in the front outboard the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
passenger seat, if the passenger page 3-31 for more information
3. Place the seatback in the fully airbag off indicator is lit.
upright position. about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the
cushion, with legs comfortably System Operation performance of the passenger
extended. sensing system. Here is how:
Safety belts help keep the
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger in position on the seat . The passenger sensing system
person remain in this position for during vehicle maneuvers and may turn off the passenger
two to three minutes after the on braking, which helps the passenger frontal airbag and passenger
indicator is lit. sensing system maintain the knee airbag when liquid is
passenger airbag status. See soaked into the seat. If this
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” happens, the off indicator will be
{ Warning in the Index for additional lit, and the airbag readiness light
information about the importance of on the instrument panel will also
If the front outboard passenger
proper restraint use. be lit.
airbag is turned off for an
adult-sized occupant, the airbag A thick layer of additional material, . Liquid pooled on the seat that
will not be able to inflate and help such as a blanket or cushion, has not soaked in may make it
protect that person in a crash, or aftermarket equipment such as more likely that the passenger
resulting in an increased risk of seat covers, seat heaters, and seat sensing system will turn on the
massagers can affect how well the passenger frontal airbag and
(Continued) passenger sensing system passenger knee airbag while a
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
child restraint or child occupant

is on the seat. If the passenger Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
frontal airbag and passenger
knee airbag are turned on, the seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper
on indicator will be lit. proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you
sensing system. are close to an airbag when it
If the front passenger seat gets wet, inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
dry the seat immediately. If the They are probably part of the
airbag readiness light is lit, do not Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
install a child restraint or allow Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and
anyone to occupy the seat. See
Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5-15 for important safety should be serviced. There are parts work for you is qualified to do so.
information. of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
The on indicator may be lit if an dealer and the service manual have
Adding Equipment to the
object, such as a briefcase, information about servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
handbag, grocery bag, laptop, vehicle and the airbag system. To
or other electronic device, is put on Adding accessories that change the
purchase a service manual, see vehicle's frame, bumper system,
an unoccupied seat. If this is not Service Publications Ordering
desired, remove the object from height, front end, or side sheet
Information on page 13-11. metal, may keep the airbag system
the seat.
from working properly. The
{ Warning { Warning operation of the airbag system can
also be affected by changing or
For up to 10 seconds after the moving any parts of the front seats,
Stowing of articles under the
vehicle is turned off and the safety belts, the airbag sensing and
passenger seat or between the
battery is disconnected, an airbag diagnostic module, steering wheel,
passenger seat cushion and
(Continued) instrument panel, any of the airbag
(Continued) modules, ceiling or pillar garnish
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
trim, overhead console, front sensing system from properly

sensors, side impact sensors, turning off the passenger airbag(s). { Caution
or airbag wiring. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-26. If an airbag covering is damaged,
Your dealer and the service manual opened, or broken, the airbag
have information about the location If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail may not work properly. Do not
of the airbag sensors, sensing and airbags, see Different Size Tires open or break the airbag
diagnostic module, and airbag and Wheels on page 10-55 for coverings. If there are any
wiring. additional important information. opened or broken airbag
In addition, the vehicle has a If you have to modify your vehicle coverings, have the airbag
passenger sensing system for the because you have a disability and covering and/or airbag module
front outboard passenger position, you have questions about whether replaced. For the location of the
which includes sensors that are part the modifications will affect the airbags, see Where Are the
of the passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you Airbags? on page 3-22. See your
passenger sensing system may not have questions about whether the dealer for service.
operate properly if the original seat airbag system will be affected if the
trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with reason, call Customer Assistance. Replacing Airbag System
GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices Parts after a Crash
designed for a different vehicle. Any on page 13-3.
object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort-enhancing pad Airbag System Check { Warning
or device, installed under or on top
The airbag system does not need A crash can damage the airbag
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the regularly scheduled maintenance or systems in the vehicle.
passenger sensing system. This replacement. Make sure the airbag A damaged airbag system may
could either prevent proper readiness light is working. See not work properly and may not
deployment of the passenger Airbag Readiness Light on (Continued)
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger page 5-15.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued) Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that

come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
protect you and your Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting lap-shoulder belt until the child
in serious injury or even death. To passes the fit test below:
help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
. Sit all the way back on the seat.
after a crash, have them Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
inspected and any necessary
return to the booster seat.
replacements made as soon as
possible. . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to If no, try using the rear safety
replace airbag system parts. See belt comfort guide, if available.
your dealer for service. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
If the airbag readiness light stays on Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt
Older children who have outgrown
after the vehicle is started or comes on page 3-15. If a comfort guide
booster seats should wear the
on when you are driving, the airbag is not available, or if the
vehicle safety belts.
system may not work properly. Have shoulder belt still does not rest
the vehicle serviced right away. See on the shoulder, then return to
Airbag Readiness Light on the booster seat.
page 5-15. . Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Can proper safety belt fit be In a crash, children who are not
maintained for the length of the buckled up can strike other people
trip? If yes, continue. If no, who are buckled up, or can be
return to the booster seat. thrown out of the vehicle. Older
Q: What is the proper way to children need to use safety belts
wear safety belts? properly.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the { Warning
additional restraint a shoulder
Never allow more than one child
belt can provide. The shoulder
to wear the same safety belt. The
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit safety belt cannot properly spread
snugly below the hips, just the impact forces. In a crash, they
touching the top of the thighs. can be crushed together and { Warning
This applies belt force to the seriously injured. A safety belt
must be used by only one person Never allow a child to wear the
child's pelvic bones in a crash. safety belt with the shoulder belt
It should never be worn over the at a time.
behind their back. A child can be
abdomen, which could cause
seriously injured by not wearing
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash. the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort restrained by the shoulder belt.
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on The child could move too far
page 3-15. forward increasing the chance of
According to accident statistics, head and neck injury. The child
children are safer when properly might also slide under the lap
restrained in a rear seating position. (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young Warning (Continued)
Children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs the way back into the retractor,
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and but it cannot do this if it is
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the wrapped around a child’s neck.
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and If the shoulder belt is locked and
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the tightened around a child’s neck,
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety the only way to loosen the belt is
restraints. In fact, the law in every to cut it.
state in the United States and in Never leave children unattended
every Canadian province says in a vehicle and never allow
children up to some age must be children to play with the safety
restrained while in a vehicle.
belts.
{ Warning Every time infants and young

Children can be seriously injured children ride in vehicles, they should
or strangled if a shoulder belt is have the protection provided by
wrapped around their neck. The appropriate child restraints. Neither
shoulder belt can tighten but the vehicle's safety belt system nor
cannot be loosened if it is locked. its airbag system is designed
The shoulder belt locks when it is for them.
pulled all the way out of the Children who are not restrained
retractor. It unlocks when the properly can strike other people,
shoulder belt is allowed to go all or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
{ Warning Warning (Continued)

Never hold an infant or a child the front outboard seat, always
while riding in a vehicle. Due to move the front passenger seat as
crash forces, an infant or a child far back as it will go.
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate { Warning
restraint.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front
outboard seat. Secure a Q: What are the different types of
rear-facing child restraint in a rear add-on child restraints?
seat. It is also better to secure a A: Add-on child restraints, which
forward-facing child restraint in a are purchased by the vehicle
rear seat. If you must secure a owner, are available in four basic
forward-facing child restraint in types. Selection of a particular
(Continued) restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
weight, height, and age but also

whether or not the restraint will { Warning Warning (Continued)
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
For most basic types of child need complete support. In a injuries. To reduce the risk of
restraints, there are many
crash, if an infant is in a serious or fatal injuries during a
different models available. When
rear-facing child restraint, the crash, young children should
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in crash forces can be distributed always be secured in appropriate
a motor vehicle. If it is, the across the strongest part of an child restraints.
restraint will have a label saying infant's body, the back and
that it meets federal motor shoulders. Infants should always
vehicle safety standards. be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
The restraint manufacturer
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
{ Warning
are many kinds of restraints A young child's hip bones are still
available for children with so small that the vehicle's regular
special needs. safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Child Restraint Systems
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats

Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child
against the back of the infant. to see out the window.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
{ Warning When securing an add-on child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office.
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement { Warning
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure restraint. Secure the child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint.
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States Where to Put the
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child Restraint
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians According to accident statistics,
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child
(LATCH System) on page 3-41. use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety position.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Whenever possible, children aged Child restraints and booster seats

12 and under should be secured in Warning (Continued) vary considerably in size, and some
a rear seating position. may fit in certain seating positions
system is fail-safe. No one can better than others. Always make
Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not
the front. This is because the risk to sure the child restraint is properly
deploy under some unusual secured.
the rear-facing child is so great if the circumstance, even though it is
airbag deploys. turned off. Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
{ Warning Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
child restraint, you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
A child in a rear-facing child is off. If you secure a assemblies or LATCH anchors for
restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in additional passengers or child
or killed if the front passenger the front seat, always move the restraints. Adjacent seating
airbag inflates. This is because front passenger seat as far back positions should not be used if the
the back of the rear-facing child as it will go. It is better to secure child restraint prevents access to or
restraint would be very close to the child restraint in a rear seat. interferes with the routing of the
the inflating airbag. A child in a safety belt.
See Passenger Sensing System
forward-facing child restraint can on page 3-26 for additional Wherever a child restraint is
be seriously injured or killed if the information. installed, be sure to secure the child
front passenger airbag inflates restraint properly.
and the passenger seat is in a Keep in mind that an unsecured
forward position. When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
Even if the passenger sensing instructions that came with the child collision or sudden stop and injure
system has turned off the front restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to
passenger frontal airbag, no compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
(Continued) in it.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Lower Anchors and recommends that the booster seat The following explains how to attach
be secured with the LATCH system, a child restraint with these
Tethers for Children this can be done as long as the attachments in the vehicle.
(LATCH System) booster seat can be positioned Not all vehicle seating positions or
The LATCH system secures a child properly and there is no interference child restraints have lower anchors
restraint during driving or in a crash. with the proper positioning of the and attachments or top tether
LATCH attachments on the child lap-shoulder belt on the child. anchors and attachments.
restraint are used to attach the child Make sure to follow the instructions
restraint to the anchors in the that came with the child restraint, Lower Anchors
vehicle. The LATCH system is and also the instructions in this
designed to make installation of a manual.
child restraint easier.
When installing a child restraint with
In order to use the LATCH system in a top tether, you must also use
your vehicle, you need a child either the lower anchors or the
restraint that has LATCH safety belts to properly secure the
attachments. LATCH-compatible child restraint. A child restraint must
rear-facing and forward-facing child never be installed using only the top
seats can be properly installed tether and anchor.
using either the LATCH anchors or
The LATCH anchorage system can
the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
be used until the combined weight
use both the safety belts and the
of the child plus the child restraint is
LATCH anchorage system to secure
29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
a rear-facing or forward-facing
alone instead of the LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two
child seat.
anchorage system once the lower anchors for each LATCH
Booster seats use the vehicle’s combined weight is more than seating position that will
safety belts to secure the child in 29.5 kg (65 lbs). accommodate a child restraint with
the booster seat. If the manufacturer
lower attachments (2).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for the child
Rear Seat
the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
A top tether anchor is built into the I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
vehicle. The top tether positions with top tether anchors.
attachment (2) on the child restraint H (Lower Anchor): Seating
connects to the top tether anchor in positions with two lower anchors.
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
To assist in locating the lower Restraint on page 3-39 for
anchors, each rear anchor position additional information.
has a label, near the crease Securing a Child Restraint
between the seatback and the seat Designed for the LATCH
cushion.
System
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on { Warning
the filler panel. Be sure to use an If a LATCH-type child restraint is
anchor on the same side of the not attached to anchors or with
vehicle as the seating position
the safety belt, the child restraint
where the child restraint will be
will not be able to protect the child
To assist in locating the top tether placed.
correctly. In a crash, the child
anchors, the top tether anchor Do not secure a child restraint in a could be seriously injured or
symbol is on the cover. position without a top tether anchor killed. Install a LATCH-type child
if a national or local law requires restraint properly using the
that the top tether be attached, or if anchors, or use the vehicle safety
the instructions that come with the belts to secure the restraint,
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued) { Warning { Caution

following the instructions that Children can be seriously injured Do not let the LATCH
came with the child restraint and or strangled if a shoulder belt is attachments rub against the
the instructions in this manual. wrapped around their neck. The vehicle’s safety belts. This may
shoulder belt can tighten but damage these parts. If necessary,
cannot be loosened if it is locked. move buckled safety belts to
The shoulder belt locks when it is avoid rubbing the LATCH
{ Warning pulled all the way out of the attachments.
Do not attach more than one child retractor. It unlocks when the Do not fold the empty rear seat
restraint to a single anchor. shoulder belt is allowed to go all with a safety belt buckled. This
Attaching more than one child the way back into the retractor, could damage the safety belt or
restraint to a single anchor could but it cannot do this if it is the seat. Unbuckle and return the
cause the anchor or attachment wrapped around a child’s neck. safety belt to its stowed position,
to come loose or even break If the shoulder belt is locked and before folding the seat.
during a crash. A child or others tightened around a child’s neck,
could be injured. To reduce the the only way to loosen the belt is
to cut it. If you need to secure more than one
risk of serious or fatal injuries child restraint in the rear seat, see
during a crash, attach only one Buckle any unused safety belts Where to Put the Restraint on
child restraint per anchor. behind the child restraint so page 3-39.
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out You cannot secure three child
restraints using the LATCH anchors
of the retractor to set the lock,
in the rear seat at the same time,
and tighten the belt behind the
but you can install two of them.
child restraint after the child If you want to do this, install one
restraint has been installed. LATCH child restraint in the right
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
rear seating position, and install the

. Use anchors 1 and 2 when secure the restraints. Some
other one either in the left rear installing a child restraint using restraints also use another vehicle
seating position or in the center LATCH in the right rear seating anchor to secure a top tether.
seating position. If you need to position.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
install child restraints in both the . Use anchors 3 and 4 when attachments to the lower
center and left rear seating installing a child restraint using anchors. If the child restraint
positions, the one in the center LATCH in the center rear seating does not have lower
seating position will need to be position. attachments or the desired
secured using the vehicle safety seating position does not have
belts instead of the LATCH anchors.
. Use anchors 4 and 5 when
installing a child restraint using lower anchors, secure the child
Refer to the following illustration to LATCH in left rear seating restraint with the top tether and
learn which anchors to use. position. the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
Installing child restraints using instructions and the instructions
LATCH in the center and left rear in this manual.
seating positions at the same time is
prohibited. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
Make sure to attach the child position.
restraint at the proper anchor
location. 1.2. For outboard rear seating
positions, put the head
This system is designed to make restraint in the upright
installation of child restraints easier. position. See Head
When using lower anchors, do not Restraints on page 3-2.
use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors 1.3. Put the child restraint on
There are five lower LATCH anchors and child restraint attachments to the seat.
in the rear seat.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten If the position you are using
attachments on the child the top tether according to does not have a head
restraint to the lower the child restraint restraint and you are using
anchors. instructions and the a single tether, route the
2. If the child restraint manufacturer following instructions: tether over the seatback.
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the position you are using If the position you are using LATCH path and attempt to
does not have a head has an adjustable head move it side to side and back
restraint and you are using restraint and you are using and forth. There should be no
a dual tether, route the a single tether, route the more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
tether over the seatback. tether under the head movement for proper installation.
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts. Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
If the position you are using death in a crash. To help make
has an adjustable head sure the LATCH system is
restraint and you are using working properly after a crash,
a dual tether, route the see your dealer to have the
tether under the head system inspected and any
restraint and around the necessary replacements made as
head restraint posts. soon as possible.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the vehicle has the LATCH system Never put a rear-facing child seat in
and it was being used during a the front. This is because the risk to Warning (Continued)
crash, new LATCH system parts the rear-facing child is so great,
may be needed. if the airbag deploys. will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even
New parts and repairs may be though it is turned off.
necessary even if the LATCH { Warning
system was not being used at the Secure rear-facing child restraints
time of the crash. A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag
restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a
Securing Child Restraints or killed if the front outboard forward-facing child restraint in
passenger frontal airbag inflates. the front seat, always move the
(Front Passenger Seat) This is because the back of the front passenger seat as far back
This vehicle has airbags. A rear rear-facing child restraint would as it will go. It is better to secure
seat is a safer place to secure a be very close to the inflating the child restraint in a rear seat.
forward-facing child restraint. See airbag. A child in a forward-facing
Where to Put the Restraint on See Passenger Sensing System
child restraint can be seriously
page 3-39. on page 3-26 for additional
injured or killed if the front
information.
In addition, the vehicle has a outboard passenger frontal airbag
passenger sensing system which is inflates and the passenger seat is
designed to turn off the front in a forward position. If the child restraint uses a top
outboard passenger frontal airbag tether, see Lower Anchors and
Even if the passenger sensing Tethers for Children (LATCH
and knee airbag under certain system has turned off the front
conditions. See Passenger Sensing System) on page 3-41 for top tether
outboard passenger frontal anchor locations.
System on page 3-26 and
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Do not secure a child seat in a
on page 5-16 for more information, one can guarantee that an airbag
position without a top tether anchor
including important safety (Continued) if a national or local law requires
information. that the top tether be anchored, or if
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
the instructions that come with the 2. Put the child restraint on
child restraint say that the top strap the seat.
must be anchored. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
In Canada, the law requires that the lap and shoulder portions of
forward-facing child restraints have the vehicle's safety belt through
a top tether, and that the tether be or around the restraint. The child
attached. restraint instructions will show
When using the lap-shoulder belt to you how.
secure the child restraint in this
position, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the
following instructions:
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
1. Move the seat as far back as it out of the retractor to set the
will go before securing the lock. When the retractor lock is
forward-facing child restraint. set, the belt can be tightened but
When the passenger sensing not pulled out of the retractor.
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal
airbag and knee airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should 4. Push the latch plate into the
light and stay lit when you start buckle until it clicks.
the vehicle. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on Position the release button on
page 5-16. the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
7. Before placing a child in the Securing Child Restraints

(Rear Seat)
grasp the child restraint at the When securing a child restraint in a
safety belt path and attempt to rear seating position, study the
move it side to side and back instructions that came with the child
and forth. When the child restraint to make sure it is
restraint is properly installed, compatible with this vehicle.
there should be no more than
If the child restraint has the LATCH
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
system, see Lower Anchors and
If the airbags are off, the off Tethers for Children (LATCH
indicator in the passenger airbag System) on page 3-41 for how and
6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and where to install the child restraint
on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started. using LATCH. If a child restraint is
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed secured in the vehicle using a
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the safety belt and it uses a top tether,
and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing Children (LATCH System) on
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3-26. page 3-41 for top tether anchor
may be helpful to use your knee locations.
to push down on the child To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and Do not secure a child seat in a
restraint as you tighten the belt. position without a top tether anchor
let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the if a national or local law requires
retractor to make sure the that the top tether be anchored, or if
retractor is locked. If the the instructions that come with the
retractor is not locked, repeat child restraint say that the top strap
Steps 5 and 6. must be anchored.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint or vehicle seat
position does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the
instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
needs to be installed in the rear Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
seat, be sure to read Where to Put the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
the Restraint on page 3-39. could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
1. Put the child restraint on necessary.
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-41 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
grasp the child restraint at the
5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage If equipped with storage behind the

fuse box, push on the cover and
Compartments release to open.
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Do not store heavy or sharp
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 objects in storage compartments.
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 In a crash, these objects may
Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 cause the cover to open and
could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Management
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Instrument Panel Storage
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
If equipped with storage behind the

radio, press P and hold to open.
There is a USB port inside. See
USB Port on page 7-14.
Press P and hold again to close.
Keep the storage area closed when
not in use.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
4-2 Storage
The storage area cannot be Cupholders Center Console Storage

operated with P when valet mode
is enabled. See “Valet Mode” under
“Setting Vehicle Preferences” in
Home Page on page 7-4.
Glove Box
Pull the rear seat armrest down to Push the cover down and release to
access. access. To close, push the cover
again and release. There is an
accessory power outlet inside.
Pull the handle up to open.

2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Storage 4-3
See Power Outlets on page 5-6, Additional Storage

Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17, and
USB Port on page 7-14. If equipped Features
with uplevel auxiliary players, see
the infotainment manual. Cargo Management
System
Umbrella Storage
Press the button and lift to access.

There is a removable tray on the top
of the console. There is an auxiliary
input jack, USB port, and accessory
power outlet inside.
If equipped, there may be an
additional USB port and an SD card
reader inside. There is storage under the load floor
Slide an umbrella into the opening for small items. Pull the load floor
The rear of the center console has a on the driver or passenger door.
storage area and an accessory handle to access.
power outlet. Secure the load floor handle to seal
the access to the spare tire.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
4-4 Storage
Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a

convenience net in the trunk. The
net (1) attaches to the convenience
net hooks (2). Put small loads
behind the net. Do not use the net
for heavy loads.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15

Passenger Airbag Status
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Malfunction Vehicle Messages

Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Controls Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3 Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-30
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Service Electric Parking Brake
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine Cooling System
Clock (Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Clock (Uplevel Radio) . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-31
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-32
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-22 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-32
Indicators Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-32
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Traction Control System Object Detection System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Ride Control System
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-35
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-35
Engine Coolant Temperature Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Starting the Vehicle
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-36 Controls Power Tilt Wheel

Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-37 Steering Wheel
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-37 Adjustment
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-38
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-44
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 If equipped with this feature, press
the control to move the steering
wheel up and down or forward and
rearward.
To adjust the steering wheel: Do not adjust the steering wheel
1. Pull the lever down. while driving.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Steering Wheel Controls Heated Steering Wheel
The favorite and volume switches

are on the back of the steering
Some audio controls can be wheel.
adjusted at the steering wheel. 1. Favorites: Press to select the ( (Heated Steering Wheel): For
next or previous favorite when vehicles with a heated steering
g (Talk): For vehicles with OnStar® wheel, press to turn on or off. A light
or a Bluetooth® system, press to listening to AM, FM,
or SiriusXM® (if equipped), on the button displays when the
interact with those systems. See feature is turned on.
OnStar Overview on page 14-1 or or the next or previous track
“Bluetooth (Overview)” in the when listening to a media The steering wheel takes about
infotainment manual. source. three minutes to start heating.
c (Phone/Mute): Press to reject 2. Volume: Press to increase or
an incoming call, or end a current decrease the volume. Horn
call. Press to mute or unmute the Press a on the steering wheel pad
infotainment system when not on to sound the horn.
a call.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Windshield Wiper/Washer INT (Intermittent Wipes): Move If the windshield wiper lever is then
the lever up to INT for intermittent moved to OFF before the driver
wipes, then turn the x INT band door is opened or within 10 minutes,
up for more frequent wipes or down the wipers will restart and move to
for less frequent wipes. the base of the windshield.
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are performing wipes due to
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly windshield washing, the wipers
move the wiper lever down. For continue to run until they reach the
The windshield wiper/washer lever several wipes, hold the wiper base of the windshield.
is on the right side of the steering lever down.
column. n L (Windshield Washer): Pull
Clear snow and ice from the wiper the windshield wiper lever toward
With the ignition in ACC/ blades and windshield before using you to spray washer fluid and
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, them. If frozen to the windshield, activate the wipers. The wipers will
move the windshield wiper lever to carefully loosen or thaw them. continue until the lever is released
select the wiper speed. Damaged blades should be or the maximum wash time is
HI: Use for fast wipes. replaced. See Wiper Blade reached. When the lever is
Replacement on page 10-25. released, additional wipes may
LO: Use for slow wipes.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the occur depending on how long the
wiper motor. windshield washer had been
activated. See Washer Fluid on
Wiper Parking page 10-19 for information on filling
If the ignition is put in OFF while the the windshield washer fluid
wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they reservoir.
will immediately stop.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
will automatically determine when a To set the Auto Set:

{ Warning GPS signal is restored and provide 1. Select Settings from the Home
a heading again. See Compass Page, then select Time and Date
In freezing weather, do not use Messages on page 5-29 for the
the washer until the windshield is Settings.
messages that may be displayed for
warmed. Otherwise the washer the compass. 2. Select Auto Set.
fluid can form ice on the
3. Press the faceplate button just
windshield, blocking your vision. Clock (Base Radio) below Auto Set to turn it on
or off.
Setting the Time and Date
Compass Press q BACK to go to the last
To set the time or date:
The vehicle may have a compass menu and save the changes.
display on the Driver Information 1. Select SETTINGS from the
Home Page, then select Time Auto Set requires an OnStar
Center (DIC). The compass receives subscription.
its heading and other information and Date Settings.
from the Global Positioning 2. Select the desired function. If Auto Set is on, the time displayed
System (GPS) antenna, on the clock may not update
3. Turn the MENU knob to increase immediately when driving into a new
StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speed
or decrease the value. time zone.
information.
4. Press the MENU knob to go to To set the clock display:
The compass system is designed to
the next value. After the last
operate for a certain number of 1. Select Settings from the Home
value is selected the system will
miles or degrees of turn before Page, then select Time and Date
update and return to the
needing a signal from the GPS Settings.
satellites. When the compass SETTINGS menu. Press q
display shows CAL, drive the BACK to go to the last menu and 2. Select Clock Display.
vehicle for a short distance in an save the changes. 3. Turn the MENU knob to Off
open area where it can receive a or On.
GPS signal. The compass system
4. Press the MENU knob to select.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Press q BACK to go to the last Press q BACK to go to the last Certain electrical accessories may
menu and save the changes. not be compatible with the
menu and save the changes or { to
accessory power outlets and could
return to the Home Page. overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
Clock (Uplevel Radio) If there is a problem, see your
Setting the Time and Date Power Outlets dealer.
To set the time or date: The accessory power outlets can be When adding electrical equipment,
used to plug in electrical equipment, be sure to follow the installation
1. Select Settings from the Home such as a cell phone or MP3 player. instructions included with the
Page, then select Time and Date equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Settings. There are three accessory power
outlets: Equipment on page 9-63.
2. Select the desired function. . Inside the front storage area
To set the time or date, press « or below the climate control { Caution
ª to change the hour, minutes, system. Hanging heavy equipment from
AM, or PM. . Inside the center console. the power outlet can cause
To change the 12-24Hr setting, . On the rear of the center damage not covered by the
press the 12-24Hr button. console. vehicle warranty. The power
To turn Auto Set on and off, press outlets are designed for
The outlet is powered when the accessory power plugs only, such
the Auto Set screen button. ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ as cell phone charge cords.
Auto Set requires an OnStar ACCESSORY, or until the driver
subscription. door is opened within 10 minutes of
turning off the vehicle. See Retained Always unplug electrical equipment
If Auto Set is on, the time displayed when not in use and do not plug in
Accessory Power (RAP) on
on the clock may not update equipment that exceeds the
page 9-22.
immediately when driving into a new maximum 20 amps rating.
time zone. Open the protective cover to use the
accessory power outlet.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Power Outlet 120 Volt less than 150 watts is plugged into The power outlet is not designed for
Alternating Current the outlet, and no system fault is and may not work properly, if the
detected. following are plugged in:
The vehicle may have a power
outlet that can be used to plug in The indicator light does not come on . Equipment with high initial peak
electrical equipment that uses a if the ignition is in LOCK/OFF; if no wattage, such as
maximum limit of 150 watts. equipment is plugged into the outlet; compressor-driven refrigerators
or if the equipment is plugged in, but and electric power tools.
not fully seated in the outlet. . Other equipment requiring an
If equipment is connected using extremely stable power supply,
more than 150 watts or a system such as
fault is detected, the equipment may microcomputer-controlled
operate briefly then turn off. electric blankets or touch sensor
A protection circuit shuts off the lamps.
power supply and the indicator light
turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug
the item and plug it back in or turn
the Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) off and then back on. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The power outlet is on the rear of on page 9-22. The power restarts
the center console. when equipment using 150 watts or
less is plugged into the outlet and a
An indicator light on the outlet turns system fault is not detected.
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and equipment requiring
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Waiting to do repairs can be
prevent injury. costly and even dangerous.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
English Stop/Start Shown, Metric Similar

2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Cluster Menu
. Info app. This is where you can Phone
view the selected Driver
There is an interactive display area Information Center (DIC) Press V to select the Phone app,
in the center of the instrument displays. See Driver Information then press p to enter the Phone
cluster. Center (DIC) on page 5-26. menu. In the Phone menu, if there is
. Audio no active phone call, view recent
calls, scroll through contacts,
. Phone or select from the favorites. If there
. Navigation is an active call, mute or unmute the
phone or switch to handset or
. Settings
handsfree operation.
Audio
Navigation
In the main view of the Audio app,
press w or x to scroll through Press V to select the Navigation
radio stations or move to the next/ app, then press p to enter the
previous track of a CD/USB/ Navigation menu. If there is no
Bluetooth device that is connected active route, you can resume the
to the vehicle. Press V to select the last route, location details, and turn
Use the right steering wheel control
the voice prompts on/off. If there is
to open and scroll through the Audio app, then press p to enter
different items and displays. an active route, press V to cancel
the Audio menu. In the Audio menu
browse for music, select from the route guidance or turn the voice
Press o to access the cluster prompts on/off.
favorites, or change the audio
applications. Use w or x to scroll source. Settings
through the list of available
applications. Not all applications will Press V to select the Settings app.
be available on all vehicles. Use w or x to scroll through the
items in the Settings menu.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Units: Press p while Units is Compass: In certain vehicles the The trip odometer is accessed and
displayed to enter the Units menu. compass setting will allow for reset through the Driver Information
Choose English or metric units by manually setting the compass. The Center (DIC). See Driver
user can set the zone and calibrate Information Center (DIC) on
pressing V while the desired item is
the compass. This setting page is page 5-26.
highlighted. only available on vehicles that are
Info Pages: Press p while Info equipped with Remote Compass Tachometer
Pages is displayed to enter the Info Module.
The tachometer displays the engine
Pages menu and select the items to speed in revolutions per
be displayed in the Info App. See Speedometer minute (rpm).
Driver Information Center (DIC) on The speedometer shows the
page 5-26. For vehicles with the Stop/Start
vehicle's speed in either kilometers system, when the ignition is in ON/
Speed Warning: The Speed per hour (km/h) or miles per RUN, the tachometer indicates the
Warning display allows the driver to hour (mph). vehicle status. When pointing to
set a speed that they do not want to AUTO STOP, the engine is off but
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, Odometer the vehicle is on and can move. The
press p when Speed Warning is The odometer shows how far the engine could auto start at any time.
displayed. Press w or x to adjust vehicle has been driven, in either When the indicator points to OFF,
kilometers or miles. the vehicle is off.
the value. Press V to set the speed.
Once the speed is set, this feature When the engine is on, the
can be turned off by pressing V
Trip Odometer tachometer will indicate the engine’s
The trip odometer shows how far revolutions per minute (rpm). The
while viewing this page. If the
the vehicle has been driven since tachometer may vary by several
selected speed limit is exceeded, a
the trip odometer was last reset. hundred rpm’s, during auto stop
pop-up warning is displayed with a
mode, when the engine is shutting
chime.
off and restarting.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
A slight bump may be felt when the Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel
transmission is determining the gauge indicates about how much
most fuel efficient operating range. fuel is left in the tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
{ Caution indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
If the engine is operated with the
rpm’s in the warning area at the When the indicator nears empty, the
high end of the tachometer, the low fuel light comes on. There is still
vehicle could be damaged, and a little fuel left, but the fuel tank
the damage would not be covered should be filled soon.
by the vehicle warranty. Do not Here are four things that some
operate the engine with the rpm’s owners ask about. None of these
in the warning area. show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Metric
. At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge indicated the tank was
half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the
tank's capacity to fill the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
English
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
Engine Coolant
turned on, and goes back to Temperature Gauge
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
Metric
If the gauge pointer moves toward
the shaded area, the engine is
too hot.
This reading indicates the same
thing as the warning light. It means
that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been
operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the
vehicle, and turn off the engine as
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
soon as possible. See Engine If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the passenger safety belt is
Overheating on page 10-18 for more neither the light nor the chime buckled, neither the chime nor the
information. comes on. light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Safety Belt Reminders reminder light and chime may turn
Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder on if an object is put on the seat
There is a passenger safety belt such as a briefcase, handbag,
Light reminder light near the passenger grocery bag, laptop, or other
There is a driver safety belt airbag status indicator. See electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light on the instrument Passenger Sensing System on reminder light and/or chime, remove
cluster. page 3-26. the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light

This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag
system. The system check includes
the airbag sensor(s), passenger
When the vehicle is started, this When the vehicle is started, this
sensing system, the pretensioners,
light flashes and a chime may come light flashes and a chime may come
the airbag modules, the wiring, and
on to remind the driver to fasten on to remind passengers to fasten
the crash sensing and diagnostic
their safety belt. Then the light stays their safety belt. Then the light stays
module. For more information on the
on solid until the belt is buckled. on solid until the belt is buckled.
airbag system, see Airbag System
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if
on page 3-20.
times if the driver remains or the passenger remains or becomes
becomes unbuckled while the unbuckled while the vehicle is
vehicle is moving. moving.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If there is a problem with the airbag

system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5-35.
The airbag readiness light comes on Passenger Airbag Status United States
for several seconds when the Indicator
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed The vehicle has a passenger
immediately. sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3-26 for
important safety information. The
{ Warning passenger airbag status indicator is
in the overhead console. Canada
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or When the vehicle is started, the
comes on while driving, it means passenger airbag status indicator
the airbag system might not be will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
working properly. The airbags in for on and off, for several seconds
the vehicle might not inflate in a as a system check. Then, after
crash, or they could even inflate several more seconds, the status
without a crash. To help avoid indicator will light either ON or OFF,
injury, have the vehicle serviced or the on or off symbol, to let you
right away. know the status of the front
and knee airbag.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the word ON or the on symbol is system. Have it checked by your

lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued) dealer. Driving while this light is on
indicator, it means that the front could drain the battery.
outboard passenger frontal airbag have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness When this light comes on, the Driver
and knee airbag are allowed to Information Center (DIC) also
inflate. Light on page 5-15 for more
information, including important displays a message.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information. See Battery Voltage and Charging
lit on the airbag status indicator, it Messages on page 5-29.
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front Charging System Light If a short distance must be driven
outboard passenger frontal airbag with the light on, be sure to turn off
and knee airbag. all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a Malfunction
problem with the lights or the Indicator Lamp
passenger sensing system. See A computer system called OBD II
your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
briefly when the ignition is turned Generation) monitors the operation
{ Warning on, but the engine is not running, as of the vehicle to ensure emissions
a check to show the light is working. are at acceptable levels, helping to
If the airbag readiness light ever It should go out when the engine is maintain a clean environment. The
comes on and stays on, it means started. malfunction indicator lamp comes
that something may be wrong If the light stays on or comes on on when the vehicle is placed in
with the airbag system. To help while driving, there may be a ON/RUN for Key Access or Service
avoid injury to yourself or others, problem with the electrical charging Only Mode for Keyless Access, as a
(Continued) check to show it is working. If it
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
does not, have the vehicle serviced

by your dealer. See Ignition { Caution Caution (Continued)
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9-14 or Ignition Positions (Key If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not
Access) on page 9-16 for more with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty.
information. controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure
the vehicle fuel economy might to pass a required Emission
not be as good, and the engine Inspection/Maintenance test. See
might not run as smoothly. This Accessories and Modifications on
could lead to costly repairs that page 10-3.
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
If the malfunction indicator lamp
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
comes on while the engine is
running, this indicates that the OBD
{ Caution has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
II system has detected a problem Modifications made to the engine, could damage the emission control
and diagnosis and service might be transmission, exhaust, intake, system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
required. or fuel system of the vehicle or and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the replacement of the original
To prevent more serious damage to
the system before any problem is tires with other than those of the
the vehicle:
apparent. Being aware of the light same Tire Performance Criteria
can prevent more serious damage (TPC) can affect the vehicle's . Reduce vehicle speed.
to the vehicle. This system also emission controls and can cause . Avoid hard accelerations.
assists the dealer technician in this light to come on. . Avoid steep uphill grades.
correctly diagnosing any Modifications to these systems
malfunction.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance
possible. hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will
Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data
control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It may require at least one full tank
The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
emission control system
malfunction: See Fuel on page 9-53.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully If none of the above have made the
installed. See Filling the Tank on light turn off, your dealer can check The DLC is under the instrument
page 9-56. The diagnostic the vehicle. The dealer has the panel next to the steering wheel.
system can determine if the fuel proper test equipment and See your dealer if assistance is
cap has been left off or diagnostic tools to fix any needed.
improperly installed. A loose or mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed. The vehicle may not pass
missing fuel cap allows fuel to inspection if:
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap . The malfunction indicator lamp is
properly installed should turn the on while the engine is running,
light off. or the malfunction indicator lamp
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
is not on while the vehicle is in Brake System Warning

ON/RUN or Service Only Mode.
Light
{ Warning
See your dealer for assistance in
verifying proper operation of the The vehicle brake system consists The brake system might not be
malfunction indicator lamp. of two hydraulic circuits. If one working properly if the brake
circuit is not working, the remaining system warning light is on.
. The OBD II (On-Board Driving with the brake system
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking warning light on can lead to a
that critical emission control crash. If the light is still on after
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to
be working. the vehicle has been pulled off
completely diagnosed by the
the road and carefully stopped,
system. If this were to occur, the If the warning light comes on, there
vehicle would be considered not have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake
ready for inspection. This can system inspected right away. service.
happen if the 12-volt battery has
recently been replaced or Electric Parking Brake
run down.
Light
The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take Metric English
several days of driving. If this
This light comes on briefly when the
has been done and the vehicle
vehicle is turned on. If it does not
still does not pass the inspection Metric English
come on then, have it fixed so it will
for lack of OBD II system
be ready to warn if there is a
readiness, your dealer can This light comes on when the
problem.
prepare the vehicle for parking brake is applied. If the light
inspection. If the light comes on and stays on, continues flashing after the parking
there is a base brake problem.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
brake is released, or while driving, the vehicle that is causing the If the light comes on while driving,
there is a problem with the Electric parking brake system to work at a stop as soon as it is safely possible
Parking Brake system or another reduced level. The vehicle can still and turn off the vehicle. Then start
system. A message may also be driven, but should be taken to a the engine again to reset the
display in the Driver Information dealer as soon as possible. See the system. If the ABS light stays on,
Center (DIC). See Brake System information for the Electric Parking or comes on again while driving, the
Messages on page 5-29. Brake under Parking Brake on vehicle needs service. A chime may
If the light does not come on, page 9-29. If a message displays in also sound when the light comes on
or remains flashing, see your dealer. the Driver Information Center (DIC), steady.
see Brake System Messages on If the ABS light is the only light on,
page 5-29.
Service Electric Parking the vehicle has regular brakes, but
the antilock brakes are not
Brake Light Antilock Brake System functioning.
(ABS) Warning Light If both the ABS and the brake
system warning light are on, the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not
functioning and there is a problem
with the regular brakes. See your
dealer for service.
This light should come on briefly See Brake System Warning Light on
when starting the vehicle. If it does page 5-20 and Brake System
not come on, have it fixed so it will This light comes on briefly when the Messages on page 5-29.
be ready to warn if there is a engine is started.
problem. If the light does not come on, have it
If this light stays on, there is a fixed so it will be ready to warn if
problem with the Electric Parking there is a problem.
Brake system or another system on
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Lane Departure Warning Vehicle Ahead Indicator dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
(LDW) Light turns off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
button.
If equipped, this indicator will This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
If equipped, this light comes on display green when a vehicle is light come on when StabiliTrak is
briefly while starting the vehicle. detected ahead and amber when turned off.
you are following a vehicle ahead
If it does not come on, have the much too closely. If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
vehicle serviced. limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
This light is green if LDW is on and System on page 9-46. See Traction Control/Electronic
ready to operate. Stability Control on page 9-31.
This light changes to amber and Traction Off Light
flashes to indicate that the lane
marking has been crossed without
using a turn signal in that direction.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-52.
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System If the indicator/warning light is on

and flashing, the TCS and/or the
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light StabiliTrak system is actively
working.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Tire Pressure Light

This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, This light comes on briefly when the
have the vehicle serviced by your engine is started.
dealer.
If the light does not come on, have
This light comes on when the the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the system is working normally,
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the indicator light turns off.
Control System (TCS) is also off. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
If the light is on and not flashing, the Monitor System (TPMS), this light
If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off, TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak comes on briefly when the engine is
the system does not assist in system have been disabled. A DIC started. It provides information
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the message may display. Check the about tire pressures and the TPMS.
TCS and the StabiliTrak systems DIC messages to determine which
and the warning light turns off. feature(s) is no longer functioning When the Light Is On Steady
See Traction Control/Electronic and whether the vehicle requires This indicates that one or more of
Stability Control on page 9-31. service. the tires are significantly
underinflated.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
A Driver Information Center (DIC) could be low on oil and might have
tire pressure message may also Caution (Continued) some other system problem. See
display. See Tire Messages on your dealer.
page 5-36. Stop as soon as oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
possible, and inflate the tires to the
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Low Fuel Warning Light
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Check the oil level as soon as
Tire Pressure on page 10-45. possible. Add oil if required, but if
the oil level is within the operating
When the Light Flashes First and range and the oil pressure is still
Then Is On Steady low, have the vehicle serviced.
If the light flashes for about a minute Always follow the maintenance
and then stays on, there may be a schedule for changing engine oil.
problem with the TPMS. If the This light is near the fuel gauge and
problem is not corrected, the light comes on briefly when the ignition is
will come on at every ignition cycle. turned on as a check to show it is
See Tire Pressure Monitor working.
Operation on page 10-48. It also comes on when the fuel tank
is low on fuel. The light turns off
Engine Oil Pressure Light when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
{ Caution This light should come on briefly as
the engine is started. If it does not
Lack of proper engine oil come on, have the vehicle serviced
maintenance can damage the by your dealer.
engine. Driving with the engine
If the light comes on and stays on, it
(Continued) means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Security Light High-Beam On Light Cruise Control Light
The security light should come on This light comes on when the This light in the Driver Information
briefly as the engine is started. If it high-beam headlamps are in use. Center (DIC) is white when the
does not come on, have the vehicle See Headlamp High/Low-Beam cruise control is on and ready, and
serviced by your dealer. If the Changer on page 6-1. turns green when the cruise control
system is working normally, the is set and active.
indicator light turns off.
Lamps On Reminder See Cruise Control on page 9-33.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a Adaptive Cruise Control Light
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) on page 2-18 or
Immobilizer Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2-18.
This light comes on when the
exterior lamps are in use. See
This light in the Driver Information
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
Center (DIC) is white when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (if
equipped) is on and ready, and
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
turns green when the ACC is set Information Displays w or x : Press to move up or
and active. See Adaptive Cruise down in a list, or on the main view
Control on page 9-35. press to cycle through the different
Driver Information Info app pages.
Door Ajar Light Center (DIC)
o or p : Press o to open
The DIC displays are shown in the application menus on the left. Press
center of the instrument cluster in p to open interaction menus on the
the Info app. See Instrument Cluster right.
on page 5-9. The Info app is only
available when the vehicle is in ON/ V (Select/Reset): Press to select a
RUN. The displays show the status menu item. Press and hold to reset
of many vehicle systems. The values on certain screens, or on the
controls for the DIC are on the right main view reset info pages to the
This light comes on in the Driver
steering wheel control. original setting.
Information Center (DIC) when a
door is open or not securely latched. DIC Info Page Options
Before driving, check that all doors The info pages on the DIC can be
are properly closed. turned on or off through the
Settings app.
1. Press o to access the cluster
applications.
2. Press w or x to scroll to the
Settings application.
3. Press V to select the
Settings app.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
4. Scroll to Info Pages and Trip A and Average Fuel Economy vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel
press p. or Trip B and Average Fuel range estimate is based on an
Economy: The Trip display shows average of the vehicle's fuel
5. Select Edit List. the current distance traveled, in economy over recent driving history
6. Press w or x to move through either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), and the amount of fuel remaining in
since the trip odometer was last the fuel tank.
the list of possible information
reset. Average Speed: Displays the
displays.
The Average Fuel Economy display average speed of the vehicle in
7. Press V while an item is shows the approximate average kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
highlighted to select or deselect liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) per hour (mph). This average is
that item. When an item is or miles per gallon (mpg). This calculated based on the various
selected, a checkmark will number reflects only the vehicle speeds recorded since the
appear next to it. approximate average fuel economy last reset of this value. The average
DIC Info Pages that the vehicle has right now, and speed can be reset by pressing and
will change as driving conditions holding V while this display is
The following is the list of all change. This number is calculated active.
possible DIC info page displays. based on the number of L/
Some may not be available for your 100 km (mpg) recorded since the Timer: To start the timer, press V
particular vehicle. Some items may last time this menu item was reset. while this display is active. The
not be turned on by default but can display will show the amount of time
be turned on through the Settings The Average Fuel Economy and trip
odometer can be reset together by that has passed since the timer was
app. See “DIC Info Page Options” last reset. To stop the timer, press V
earlier in this section. pressing and holding V while this
display is active. briefly while this display is active
Current Speed: Displays the and the timer is running. To reset
vehicle speed in either kilometers Fuel Range: Displays the the timer to zero, press and hold V
per hour (km/h) or miles per approximate distance the vehicle
while this display is active.
hour (mph). can be driven without refueling.
LOW will be displayed when the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Oil Life: Displays an estimate of seconds while the Oil Life display is Vehicle Messages
the oil's remaining useful life. active. See Engine Oil Life System
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is on page 10-10. Messages displayed on the DIC
displayed, that means 99% of the indicate the status of the vehicle or
Coolant Temperature: Displays
current oil life remains. some action that may be needed to
the coolant temperature in either
correct a condition. Multiple
When the remaining oil life is low, degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
messages may appear one after
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Fahrenheit (°F).
another.
message will appear on the display. Tire Pressure: Displays the
See Engine Oil Messages on The messages that do not require
approximate pressures of all four
page 5-31. The oil should be immediate action can be
tires. Tire pressure is displayed in
changed as soon as possible. See acknowledged and cleared by
either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds
Engine Oil on page 10-8. In addition per square inch (psi). If the pressure pressing V (Set/Reset).
to the engine oil life system is low, the value for that tire is
monitoring the oil life, additional The messages that require
shown in amber. See Tire Pressure immediate action cannot be cleared
maintenance is recommended in the Monitor System on page 10-47 and
Maintenance Schedule. See until that action is performed.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
Maintenance Schedule on page 10-48. All messages should be taken
page 11-3. seriously; clearing the message
Battery Voltage: Displays the does not correct the problem.
The Oil Life display must be reset current battery voltage. The battery
after each oil change. It will not voltage can fluctuate while viewing The following are the possible
reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life this information on the DIC. This is messages and some information
display accidentally at any time normal. about them.
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset Speed Signs: Displays sign
accurately until the next oil change. information, which comes from a
To reset the engine oil life system, roadway database in the onboard
press and hold V for several navigation.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Battery Voltage and Brake System Messages pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal under these conditions. Take
Charging Messages BRAKE FLUID LOW the vehicle to your dealer for
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message is displayed when the service.
This message displays when the brake fluid level is low. See Brake SERVICE PARKING BRAKE
vehicle has detected that the battery Fluid on page 10-21.
This message is displayed when
voltage is dropping beyond a PARK BRAKE RELEASED there is a problem with the parking
reasonable point. The battery saver brake. Take the vehicle to your
system starts reducing features of This message is displayed when the
parking brake is released. dealer for service.
the vehicle that may be noticed. At
the point that features are disabled, PARK BRAKE SET STEP ON BRAKE TO
this message displays. Turn off RELEASE PARK BRAKE
unnecessary accessories to allow This message is displayed when the
the battery to recharge. parking brake is set. This message is displayed if you
attempt to release the Electric
LOW BATTERY RELEASE PARKING BRAKE Parking Brake without the brake
This message is displayed if the pedal applied. See Parking Brake
This message is displayed when the
Electric Parking Brake is on while on page 9-29.
battery voltage is low. See Battery
on page 10-22. the vehicle is in motion. See Parking
Brake on page 9-29. Compass Messages
SERVICE BATTERY Dashes may be displayed if the
CHARGING SYSTEM SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
vehicle temporarily loses
This message is displayed when This message may be displayed communication with the Global
there is a fault in the battery when there is a problem with the Positioning System (GPS).
charging system. Take the vehicle to brake boost assist system. When
your dealer for service. this message is displayed, the brake
boost assist motor might be heard
operating and you might notice
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Cruise Control Messages FRONT RADAR BLOCKED — gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC
SEE OWNER MANUAL will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise
ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET Control on page 9-35.
TO XXX This message can occur under the
following conditions: SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE
This message displays when the CONTROL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
. The radar is not clean. Keep the
speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise radar sensors free of mud, dirt, This message displays when the
Control on page 9-35. snow, ice, and slush. Clean the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
entire front and/or rear of the needs service. Take the vehicle to
ADAPTIVE CRUISE vehicle. For cleaning your dealer.
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10-72. SHIFT TO PARK BEFORE
This message displays when EXITING
attempting to activate Adaptive . Heavy rain or snow is interfering
Cruise Control (ACC) when it is with the radar object detection or This message may display if
temporarily unavailable. The ACC camera performance. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
system does not need service. engaged holding the vehicle at a
CRUISE SET TO XXX stop, and the driver attempts to exit
This can occur under the following This message displays when the the vehicle. Put the vehicle in
conditions: P (Park) before exiting.
cruise control speed is set. See
. Cruise is turned on when the Cruise Control on page 9-33.
vehicle is stopped. Door Ajar Messages
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
. The radar can't see objects well. PEDAL APPLIED DOOR OPEN
See next message.
This message displays when A door open symbol will display on
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is the DIC showing which door is
active and the driver is pressing the open. If the vehicle has been shifted
out of P (Park), a DOOR OPEN
message will also be displayed.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the shift lever is in M (Manual conditioning compressor turns back Engine Oil Messages
Mode), the DOOR OPEN message on. The vehicle can continue to be
will display if the vehicle starts to driven. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
move. Close the door completely. If this message continues to appear, This message displays when the
HOOD OPEN have the system repaired by your engine oil needs to be changed.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid When you change the engine oil, be
This message will display along with damage to the engine. sure to reset the oil life system. See
a hood open symbol when the hood Engine Oil Life System on
is open. Close the hood completely. ENGINE OVERHEATED — page 10-10, Driver Information
IDLE ENGINE Center (DIC) on page 5-26, Engine
TRUNK OPEN
This message displays when the Oil on page 10-8, and Maintenance
This message will display along with engine coolant temperature is too Schedule on page 11-3.
a symbol when the trunk is open. hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
Close the trunk completely. ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE
idle until it cools down.
ENGINE
Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED — This message displays when the
Messages STOP ENGINE engine oil temperature is too hot.
This message displays and a Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH continuous chime sounds if the until it cools down.
ENGINE TEMP engine cooling system reaches ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL
This message displays when the unsafe temperatures for operation.
engine coolant becomes hotter than Stop and turn off the vehicle as On some vehicles, this message
the normal operating temperature. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid displays when the engine oil level
To avoid added strain on a hot severe damage. This message may be too low. Check the oil level
engine, the air conditioning clears when the engine has cooled before filling to the recommended
compressor automatically turns off. to a safe operating temperature. level. If the oil is not low and this
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
message remains on, take the speed while this message is on, but Interference” under Remote Keyless
vehicle to your dealer for service. maximum acceleration and speed Entry (RKE) System Operation on
See Engine Oil on page 10-8. may be reduced. Anytime this page 2-3.
message stays on, the vehicle
OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP should be taken to your dealer for NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE
ENGINE service as soon as possible. TO RESTART
This message displays if low oil This message is displayed if the
pressure levels occur. Stop the Fuel System Messages remote is no longer detected in the
vehicle as soon as safely possible vehicle. Press the brake pedal to
and do not operate it until the cause FUEL LEVEL LOW restart the vehicle.
of the low oil pressure has been This message displays when the
corrected. Check the oil as soon as vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
NUMBER OF KEYS
possible and have the vehicle soon as possible. PROGRAMMED
serviced by your dealer. This message displays when
TIGHTEN GAS CAP programming new keys to the
Engine Power Messages This message displays when the vehicle.
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED fuel cap. REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE
This message displays when the This message displays when
vehicle's engine power is reduced. Key and Lock Messages leaving the vehicle with the RKE
Reduced engine power can affect transmitter still inside.
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. NO REMOTE DETECTED
If this message is on, but there is no REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays when trying
reduction in performance, proceed to start the vehicle if an RKE
REMOTE KEY
to your destination. The transmitter is not detected. The This message displays when the
performance may be reduced the transmitter battery may be weak. battery in the RKE transmitter needs
next time the vehicle is driven. The See “Starting the Vehicle with a Low to be replaced.
vehicle may be driven at a reduced Transmitter Battery or Wireless
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
USE TRANSMITTER POCKET TURN SIGNAL ON likely to occur. See Active

TO START Emergency Braking System on
This message is displayed if the
page 9-48.
This message displays when the turn signal has been left on. Turn off
transmitter needs to be placed in the turn signal. AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP
the transmitter pocket to start the UNAVAILABLE
vehicle. See “Starting the Vehicle Object Detection System This message displays when the
with a Low Transmitter Battery or Messages
Wireless Interference” under Active Emergency Braking System
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) has been unavailable for some time.
AUTOMATIC COLLISION The Active Emergency Braking
System Operation on page 2-3. PREP OFF System does not need service. This
This message displays when the can occur under the following
Lamp Messages Active Emergency Braking System conditions:
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL has been turned off. See Active . The radar is not clean. Keep the
ON/OFF Emergency Braking System on radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
page 9-48. snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
This message is displayed when the
automatic light control has been AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP entire front and/or rear of the
turned on or off. See Automatic REDUCED vehicle. For cleaning
Headlamp System on page 6-2. instructions, see Exterior Care
This message displays when the on page 10-72.
XX TURN INDICATOR FAILURE Active Emergency Braking System
has been set to the Alert setting.
. Heavy rain or snow is interfering
When one of the turn signals is out, This setting disables most Active with the radar object detection or
this message displays to show Emergency Braking functions. Some camera performance.
which bulb needs to be replaced. last-second automatic braking This message may also be
See Bulb Replacement on capability is still provided with the displayed if there is a problem with
page 10-26 and Replacement Bulbs Alert setting, but braking is less the StabiliTrak system.
on page 10-30.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
FORWARD COLLISION This message could be due to the Braking System may not work. Do
ALERT OFF camera being blocked. Cleaning the not use these systems until the
outside of the windshield behind the vehicle has been repaired.
This message displays when the rearview mirror may correct the
Forward Collision Alert has been issue. SERVICE FRONT CAMERA
turned off.
If this message remains on after
PARK ASSIST OFF continued driving, the vehicle needs
FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED
CLEAN WINDSHIELD This message displays when the service. Do not use the Lane
Parking Assist system has been Departure Warning (LDW) and
This message displays when the turned off or when there is a Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
camera is blocked. Cleaning the temporary condition causing the features. Take the vehicle to your
outside of the windshield behind the system to be disabled. dealer.
rearview mirror may correct the
issue. The Lane Departure Warning REAR CROSS TRAFFIC SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
system will not operate. Forward ALERT OFF This message displays if there is a
Collision Alert (FCA) may not work problem with the Parking Assist
This message displays when the
or may not work as well. system. Do not use this system to
Rear Cross Traffic Alert has been
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING turned off. help you park. See your dealer for
UNAVAILABLE service.
SERVICE AUTOMATIC
This message displays when COLLISION PREP SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
attempting to activate the Lane SYSTEM
If this message displays, take the
Departure Warning (LDW) system If this message remains on after
vehicle to your dealer to repair the
when it is temporarily unavailable. continued driving, the vehicle needs
system. Adaptive Cruise Control
The LDW system does not need service. Side Blind Zone Alert
(ACC), Forward Collision Alert
service. (SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(FCA), and/or the Active Emergency
(RCTA) features will not work. Take
the vehicle to your dealer.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
SHIFT TO PARK BEFORE need service. For cleaning, see Security Messages
EXITING "Washing the Vehicle" under
Exterior Care on page 10-72. THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message may display if
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is This message displays if the vehicle
engaged holding the vehicle at a
Ride Control System detects a tamper condition.
stop, and the driver attempts to exit Messages
the vehicle. Put the vehicle in Service Vehicle Messages
P (Park) before exiting. SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there is a SERVICE POWER STEERING
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF problem with the StabiliTrak system. This message is displayed if there is
This message indicates that the If this message appears, try to reset a problem with the power steering
driver has turned the Side Blind the system. Stop; turn off the engine system and a chime may sound.
Zone Alert (SBZA) system off. for at least 15 seconds; then start Take the vehicle to your dealer for
the engine again. If this message service.
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM still comes on, it means there is a
UNAVAILABLE problem. See your dealer for SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message indicates that Side service. The vehicle is safe to drive; This message is displayed if there is
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear however, you do not have the a problem with the vehicle. Take the
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce vehicle to your dealer for service.
disabled either because the sensor your speed and drive accordingly.
is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in the blind zone, or the Airbag System Messages
vehicle is passing through an open
area, such as the desert, where SERVICE AIRBAG
there is insufficient data for This message displays if there is a
operation. This message may also problem with the airbag system.
activate during heavy rain or due to Take the vehicle to your dealer for
road spray. The vehicle does not service.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Starting the Vehicle TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
Messages This message displays when the
page 5-26.
system is learning new tires. See
PRESS BRAKE TO START Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
VEHICLE page 10-48. Transmission Messages
This message is displayed when TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD SERVICE TRANSMISSION
attempting to start the vehicle AIR TO TIRE This message displays if there is a
without first pressing the brake
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure problem with the transmission. See
pedal.
Monitor System (TPMS), this your dealer.
SERVICE KEYLESS START message displays when the SHIFT DENIED
SYSTEM pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low. This message displays when using
This message is displayed if there is the Driver Shift Control (DSC) and
a problem with the pushbutton start The low tire pressure warning light attempting to shift to a gear not
system. Take the vehicle to your will also come on. See Tire appropriate for the vehicle speed
dealer for service. Pressure Light on page 5-23. and engine revolutions per
If a tire pressure message displays, minute (rpm). See Manual Mode on
Tire Messages inflate the tires until the tire pressure page 9-27.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR is equal to the values shown on the
SHIFT TO PARK
SYSTEM Tire and Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 10-38, Vehicle This message displays when the
This message displays if there is a Load Limits on page 9-10, and Tire transmission needs to be shifted to
problem with the Tire Pressure Pressure on page 10-45. P (Park). This may appear when
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire turning the ignition off if the vehicle
Pressure Monitor Operation on More than one tire pressure
is not in P (Park).
page 10-48. message can be received at a time.
The DIC also shows the tire
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE selected on the wiper control. See as possible. See Engine
ENGINE Windshield Wiper/Washer on Compartment Overview on
page 5-4. page 10-5 for the location of the
This message displays and a chime windshield washer reservoir. Also,
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
Vehicle Speed Messages see Washer Fluid on page 10-19.
transmission fluid temperature high SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Window Messages
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to This message is displayed when the
vehicle speed is greater than the OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/
allow the transmission to cool. This PASSENGER WINDOW
message clears when the fluid speed warning speed. See "Speed
temperature reaches a safe level. Warning" under Instrument Cluster This message is displayed when the
on page 5-9. window needs to be reprogrammed.
Vehicle Reminder If the vehicle's battery has been
SPEED LIMIT SET TO XXX recharged or disconnected, you will
Messages This message is displayed when the need to program each front window
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE speed warning is set. See "Speed for the express-up feature to work.
Warning" under Instrument Cluster See Power Windows on page 2-22.
WITH CARE
on page 5-9.
This message is displayed when ice
conditions are possible. Washer Fluid Messages
TURN WIPER CONTROL TO WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
INTERMITTENT FIRST FLUID
This message is displayed when This message may display when the
attempting to adjust the intermittent washer fluid level is low. Fill the
wiper speed without intermittent windshield washer reservoir as soon
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Valet Mode
Vehicle 5. Press q BACK to return to the
previous menu. . Radio
Personalization .
Uplevel Radio Audio System Vehicle
The audio system controls are used Controls
to access the personalization
. Bluetooth
menus for customizing vehicle To access the personalization . Voice
features. menus: . Display
Base Radio Audio System 1. Press SETTINGS on the Home
page on the infotainment system
. Rear Camera
Controls
display. . Return to Factory Settings
To access the personalization
menus: 2. Press the desired feature to . Software Information
display a list of available
1. On the Home page, turn the Each menu is detailed in the
options.
MENU knob to highlight Settings following information.
and press the MENU knob. 3. Press the desired option.
Time and Date
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 4. Press to select the desired
option setting. Manually set the time and date. See
the desired feature and press Clock (Base Radio) on page 5-5 or
the MENU knob to display a list 5. Press q BACK to return to the Clock (Uplevel Radio) on page 5-6.
of available options. previous menu.
3. Turn the MENU knob to scroll Language (Language)
through and highlight the desired Personalization Menus Select Language, then select from
option, then press the The following list of features may be the available language(s).
MENU knob. available:
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight . Time and Date
the desired option setting and . Language (Language)
press the MENU knob.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Valet Mode Climate and Air Quality Select Off or On.

To turn valet mode on and off, see Select and the following may Auto Rear Defog
“Valet Mode” under “Setting Radio display:
If equipped, this allows the Auto
Preferences” in Home Page on . Auto Fan Max Speed Rear Defog to be turned on or off.
page 7-4.
. Air Conditioning Mode This feature will automatically turn
Radio on the rear window defogger when it
. Auto Defog is cold outside.
To manage the radio features, see . Auto Rear Defog Select Off or On.
“Radio Setup” under “Setting Radio
Preferences” in Home Page on Auto Fan Max Speed Collision/Detection Systems
page 7-4.
This feature will set the maximum Select and the following may
Vehicle auto fan speed. display:
Select and the following may Select Low, Medium, or High. . Auto Collision Preparation
display: Air Conditioning Mode . Go Notifier
. Climate and Air Quality This feature changes the mode of . Side Blind Zone Alert
. Collision/Detection Systems the air conditioning. . Rear Cross Traffic Alert
. Comfort and Convenience Select Off, On, or Last Setting.
Auto Collision Preparation
. Lighting Auto Defog
This feature will turn on or off the
. Power Door Locks When set to On, the front defog will Forward Collision Alert feature as
. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start automatically react to temperature well as the Automatic Braking
and humidity conditions that may capability of the Auto Collision
cause fogging. Only vehicles with Preparation feature. With the Alert
the dual automatic climate control and Brake setting, both Forward
will have this option. Collision Alert as well as the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Automatic Braking capability of the See Active Emergency Braking Auto Memory Recall
Auto Collision Preparation feature System on page 9-48. This feature automatically recalls
are available. The Alert setting the current driver’s previously stored
disables most automatic braking Side Blind Zone Alert
1 or 2 button positions when
functions of the Auto Collision This allows the feature to be turned entering the vehicle. See Memory
Preparation feature. Some on or off. Seats on page 3-7.
last-second automatic braking Select Off or On.
capability is still provided with the Select Off, On - Driver Door Open,
Alert setting, but it is much less See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) or On - At ignition On.
likely to be triggered by most driving on page 9-50.
Easy Exit Options
conditions. Off disables all Forward Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Collision Alert and Automatic This feature automatically recalls
Braking capabilities of the Auto This allows the feature to be turned the current driver’s previously stored
Collision Preparation feature. on or off. Exit button position when exiting the
Select Off or On. vehicle. See Memory Seats on
Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert. page 3-7.
See Driver Assistance Systems on See Driver Assistance Systems on
page 9-43. Select Off or On.
page 9-43.
Comfort and Convenience Chime Volume
Go Notifier
Select and the following may This allows the selection of the
This feature will give a reminder that chime volume level.
Adaptive Cruise Control provides display:
when it has brought the vehicle to a . Auto Memory Recall Press + or − to adjust the volume.
complete stop behind another Reverse Tilt Mirror
stopping vehicle, and then that
. Easy Exit Options
vehicle drives on. . Chime Volume When on, both the driver and
passenger, driver, or passenger
Select Off or On. . Reverse Tilt Mirror mirrors will tilt downward when the
vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) to
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
improve visibility of the ground near Exit Lighting Select Off or On.
the rear wheels. They will return to This allows the selection of how
their previous driving position when Auto Door Unlock
long the exterior lamps stay on
the vehicle is shifted out of when leaving the vehicle when it is This allows selection of which of the
R (Reverse) or the ignition is turned dark outside. doors will automatically unlock when
to OFF. the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60
Select Off, On - Driver and Seconds, or 120 Seconds. Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
Passenger, On - Driver, or On -
Passenger. Daytime Tail Lights Delayed Door Lock
This feature allows the taillamps to When on, this feature will delay the
Lighting locking of the doors. To override the
be on during the day.
Select and the following may delay, press the power door lock
display: Select Off or On. switch on the door.
. Vehicle Locator Lights Power Door Locks Select Off or On.
. Exit Lighting Select and the following may Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
. Daytime Tail Lights display:
Select and the following may
. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout display:
Vehicle Locator Lights
. Auto Door Unlock
This feature will flash the exterior
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback
lamps when K on the Remote
. Delayed Door Lock . Remote Lock Feedback
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout . Remote Door Unlock
pressed to locate the vehicle.
When on, this feature will keep the . Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
Select Off or On. driver door from locking when the . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
door is open. If Off is selected, the
Delayed Door Lock menu will be . Passive Door Unlock
available. . Passive Door Lock
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
Remote Unlock Light Feedback If equipped and turned on, this This feature sounds an alert when
When on, the exterior lamps will feature will turn the heated seats on the RKE transmitter is left in the
flash when unlocking the vehicle when using remote start on vehicle.
with the RKE transmitter. cold days. Select Off or On.
Select Off or Flash Lights. Select Off or On.
Bluetooth
Remote Lock Feedback Passive Door Unlock
This allows selection of what type of This allows the selection of what display:
feedback is given when locking the doors will unlock when using the . Pair New Device
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. button on the driver door to unlock
the vehicle. . Device Management
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights
Only, or Horn Only. Select All Doors or Driver Door. . Ringtones
Passive Door Lock . Voice Mail Numbers
Remote Door Unlock
This allows selection of which doors This feature can be turned on or off, Pair New Device
or can be used to select feedback
will unlock when pressing K on the Select to pair a new device. See
when using the button on the driver “Pairing” under Bluetooth (Voice
RKE transmitter. door to lock the vehicle. See Recognition) on page 7-21 or
Select All Doors or Driver Door. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-19
System Operation on page 2-3. or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
Select Off, On with Horn Base Radio) on page 7-26 or
If equipped and turned on, this Chirp, or On. “Pairing” under “Bluetooth” in the
feature will turn the ventilated seats infotainment manual.
on when using remote start on
warm days.
Select Off or On.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Device Management Prompt Length Mode

Select to connect to a different This feature adjusts the voice Select to change the display screen
phone source, disconnect a phone, prompt length. for day or night driving.
or delete a phone. Select Short or Long. Select Auto, Day, or Night.
Ringtones Audio Feedback Speed Calibrate Touchscreen
Press to change the ring tone for This feature adjusts the audio Select to calibrate the touchscreen,
the specific phone. The phone does feedback speed. then follow the prompts.
not need to be connected to change
the ring. Select Slow, Medium, or Fast. Turn Display Off
Voice Mail Numbers Display Select to turn the display off. Press
anywhere on the display area or any
This feature displays the voice mail Select and the following may
faceplate button to turn the
number for all connected phones. display:
display on.
To change the voice mail number, . Theme
select EDIT or press the EDIT Rear Camera
button. Type a new number, then . Mode
select SAVE or press the SAVE . Calibrate Touchscreen display:
button. . Turn Display Off . Guidance Lines
Voice
Theme . Rear Cross Traffic Alert
display: Select to change the color, font, and . Rear Park Assist Symbols
art of the display.
. Prompt Length Guidance Lines
Select Contemporary, Mainstreet,
. Audio Feedback Speed Edge, or Velocity. Select to turn Off or On. See
Assistance Systems for Parking or
Backing on page 9-44.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Rear Cross Traffic Alert Restore Vehicle Settings Universal Remote

Select to turn Off or On. See This allows vehicle settings to be
Assistance Systems for Parking or restored.
System
Backing on page 9-44. Select Restore or Cancel. See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-12.
Rear Park Assist Symbols Clear All Private Data
Select to turn Off or On. See This allows all private information Universal Remote System
Assistance Systems for Parking or
Backing on page 9-44.
from the vehicle to be cleared. Programming
Select Delete or Cancel.
Return to Factory Settings
Restore Radio Settings
display: This allows radio settings to be
restored.
. Restore Vehicle Settings
Select Restore or Cancel.
. Clear All Private Data
. Restore Radio Settings
Software Information
Select to view the infotainment
system current software information.
If equipped, these buttons are in the

overhead console.
This system can replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
home automation devices. These To program a garage door opener, hand-held transmitter was
instructions refer to a garage door park outside directly in line with and supplied by the manufacturer of
opener, but can be used for other facing the garage door opener the garage door opener receiver.
devices. receiver. Clear all people and 2. At the same time, press and
Do not use the Universal Remote objects near the garage door. hold both the hand-held
system with any garage door opener Make sure the hand-held transmitter transmitter button and one of the
that does not have the stop and has a new battery for quick and three Universal Remote system
reverse feature. This includes any accurate transmission of the buttons to be used to operate
garage door opener model radio-frequency signal. the garage door. Do not release
manufactured before April 1, 1982. either button until the indicator
Programming the Universal light changes from a slow to a
Read these instructions completely Remote System
before programming the Universal rapid flash. Then release both
Remote system. It may help to have For questions or help programming buttons.
another person assist with the the Universal Remote system, call Some garage door openers may
programming process. 1-800-355-3515 or see require substitution of Step 2
www.homelink.com. with the procedure under in
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles Programming involves “Radio Signals for Canada and
as well as for future programming. time-sensitive actions, and may time Some Gate Operators” later in
Erase the programming when out causing the procedure to be this section.
vehicle ownership is terminated. repeated. 3. Press and hold the newly
See “Erasing Universal Remote To program up to three devices: programmed Universal Remote
System Buttons” later in this system button for five seconds
section. 1. Hold the end of the hand-held while watching the indicator light
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to and garage door activation.
3 in) away from the Universal
Remote system buttons with the . If the indicator light stays on
indicator light in view. The continuously or the garage
door moves when the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
button is pressed, then does not flash, press and hold

programming is complete. the same button a second time
There is no need to for two seconds, then release it.
complete Steps 4–6. Again, if the door does not move
. If the indicator light does or the garage door lamp does
not come on or the garage not flash, press and hold the
door does not move, a same button a third time for
second button press may two seconds, then release it.
be required. For a second The Universal Remote system
Learn or Smart Button
time, press and hold the should now activate the
newly programmed button 4. After completing Steps 1–3 , garage door.
for five seconds. If the light locate the Learn or Smart button
Repeat the process for
stays on or the garage door inside garage on the garage
programming the two remaining
moves, programming is door opener receiver. The name
buttons.
complete. and color of the button may vary
. by manufacturer. Radio Signals for Canada and
If the indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds, 5. Press and release the Learn or Some Gate Operators
then changes to a solid light Smart button. Step 6 must be For questions or programming help
and the garage door does completed within 30 seconds of call 1-800-355-3515 or see
not move, continue with pressing this button. www.homelink.com.
programming Steps 4–6. 6. Inside the vehicle, press and Canadian radio-frequency laws and
hold the newly programmed some U.S. gate operators require
Universal Remote system button transmitter signals to time out or quit
for two seconds and then after several seconds of
release it. If the garage door transmission. This may not be long
does not move or the lamp on
the garage door opener receiver
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
enough for the Universal Remote Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single
system to pick up the signal during Universal Remote System
programming.
Operation
Button
If the programming did not work, Using the Universal Remote To reprogram any of the system
replace Step 2 under “Programming System buttons:
the Universal Remote System” with Press and hold the appropriate
the following: 1. Press and hold any one of the
Universal Remote system button for buttons. Do not release the
Press and hold the Universal at least one-half second. The button.
Remote system button while indicator light will come on while the
pressing and releasing the signal is being transmitted. 2. The indicator light will begin to
hand-held transmitter button every flash after 20 seconds. Without
two seconds until the signal has Erasing Universal Remote releasing the button, proceed
been successfully accepted by the System Buttons with Step 1 under “Programming
Universal Remote system. The Erase all programmed buttons when the Universal Remote System.”
Universal Remote system indicator vehicle ownership is terminated.
light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under To erase:
“Programming the Universal Remote 1. Press and hold the two outside
System” to complete. buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash. This should take
about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic): Automatically

turns the exterior lamps on and off,
depending on outside lighting.
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 parking lamps including all lamps,
Exterior Lamps Off except the headlamps.
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam headlamps together with the parking
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 lamps and instrument panel lights.
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exterior Lamps Off
Automatic Headlamp Reminder
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 A warning chime sounds if the driver
The exterior lamp control is on the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 door is opened while the ignition is
turn signal lever.
Turn and Lane-Change off and the exterior lamps are on.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Turn the control to the following
positions:
Interior Lighting Headlamp High/
Instrument Panel Illumination O (Off): Turns off the exterior
Low-Beam Changer
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 lamps. The knob returns to the
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 AUTO position after it is released. 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Turn to O again to reactivate the Changer): Push the turn signal
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 AUTO mode. lever away from you and release, to
turn the high beams on. To return to
Lighting Features In Canada, the headlamps and low beams, push the lever again or
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) will pull it toward you and release.
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 automatically reactivate when the
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6 vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
6-2 Lighting
The DRL system turns on the This vehicle may have a DRL
low-beam headlamps at a reduced disabling function. When the DRL
brightness. For vehicles with High are on and a turn signal is activated,
Intensity Discharge (HID) the DRL on that side will be off until
headlamps, there is a dedicated the turn signal goes off.
DRL. The DRL will come on when
This indicator light turns on in the all of the following conditions Automatic Headlamp
are met:
instrument cluster when the System
high-beam headlamps are on. . The ignition is on.
When the exterior lamp control is
. The exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough
Flash-to-Pass in AUTO. outside, the headlamps come on
To flash the high beams, pull the . The light sensor determines it is automatically.
turn signal lever toward you, and daytime.
release.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Daytime Running When the DRL are on, the taillamps,
Lamps (DRL) sidemarker lamps, instrument panel
lights, and other lamps will not
DRL can make it easier for others to be on.
see the front of your vehicle during
the day. Fully functional DRL are The DRL turn off when the
required on all vehicles first sold in headlamps are turned to O or the
Canada. ignition is off.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Lighting 6-3
There is a light sensor on top of the not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change
instrument panel. Do not cover the Move the exterior lamp control to P
sensor, otherwise the headlamps
Signals
or ; to disable this feature.
will come on when they are not
needed.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition An arrow on the instrument cluster
is off. flashes in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
Lights On with Wipers Raise or lower the lever until the
If the windshield wipers are arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
activated in daylight with the engine
| (Hazard Warning Flashers): change. Hold it there until the lane
Press this button to make the front
on, and the exterior lamp control is change is completed. If the lever is
and rear turn signal lamps flash on
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking briefly pressed and released, the
and off. Press again to turn the
lamps, and other exterior lamps turn signal flashes three times.
flashers off.
come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on The hazard warning flashers turn on
wiper speed. When the wipers are automatically if the airbags deploy.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
6-4 Lighting
The turn and lane-change signal Interior Lighting Dome Lamps

can be turned off manually by
moving the lever back to its original
position. Instrument Panel
If after signaling a turn or lane
Illumination Control
change, the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
Have any burned out bulbs
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses on
page 10-31.
The brightness of the instrument The interior lamps control in the

panel lighting and steering wheel overhead console controls both the
controls can be adjusted. front and rear interior lamps.
D (Instrument Panel To change the dome lamp settings,
Illumination): Move the press the following:
thumbwheel up or down to brighten OFF: Turns the lamp off, even
or dim the lights. when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamp comes on
Courtesy Lamps automatically when a door is
The courtesy lamps come on when opened.
any door is opened and the dome ON: Turns the lamp on.
lamp is in the DOOR position.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Lighting 6-5
Reading Lamps There are front and rear reading Lighting Features
lamps in the overhead console and
the headliner.
Entry Lighting
# or $ (Reading Lamps): Press
the button near each lamp to turn it The headlamps, taillamps, license
on or off. plate lamps, back-up lamps, dome
lamps, and most of the interior lights
turn on briefly when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter K
button is pressed. See Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9-14 or Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9-16. After about
30 seconds the exterior lamps turn
Front Reading Lamps off, then the dome lamps and
remaining interior lights dim to off.
Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
pressing the RKE transmitter Q
button.
This feature can be changed. See
page 5-38.
Rear Reading Lamps

2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
6-6 Lighting
Exit Lighting Battery Load A high electrical load occurs when

several of the following are on, such
The headlamps, taillamps, back-up Management as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, parking lamps, and license The vehicle has Electric Power lamps, rear window defogger,
plate lamps come on at night, or in Management (EPM), which climate control fan at high speed,
areas with limited lighting, when the estimates the battery's temperature heated seats, engine cooling fans,
key is removed from the ignition. and state of charge. It then adjusts trailer loads, and loads plugged into
The dome lamps also come on the voltage for best performance accessory power outlets.
when the key is removed from the and extended life of the battery.
ignition. The exterior lamps and EPM works to prevent excessive
dome lamps remain on after the When the battery's state of charge discharge of the battery. It does this
door is closed for a set amount of is low, the voltage is raised slightly by balancing the generator's output
time, then automatically turn off. to quickly bring the charge back up. and the vehicle's electrical needs.
When the state of charge is high, It can increase engine idle speed to
If equipped with Keyless Access, the voltage is lowered slightly to generate more power, whenever
the exterior lamps and dome lamps prevent overcharging. If the vehicle needed. It can temporarily reduce
automatically turn on when the has a voltage display on the Driver the power demands of some
driver door is opened after the Information Center (DIC), you may accessories.
ignition is turned off. See Ignition see the voltage move up or down.
Positions (Keyless Access) on Normally, these actions occur in
This is normal. If there is a problem, steps or levels, without being
page 9-14 or Ignition Positions (Key an alert will be displayed.
Access) on page 9-16. noticeable. In rare cases at the
The battery can be discharged at highest levels of corrective action,
The exterior lamps turn off idle if the electrical loads are very this action may be noticeable to the
immediately by turning the exterior high. This is true for all vehicles. driver. If so, a DIC message might
lamp control off. This is because the generator be displayed and it is recommended
This feature can be changed. See (alternator) may not be spinning fast that the driver reduce the electrical
Vehicle Personalization on enough at idle to produce all the loads as much as possible. See
page 5-38. power that is needed for very high Battery Voltage and Charging
electrical loads. Messages on page 5-29.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-19
Introduction
System Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Infotainment
Bluetooth (Infotainment Base radio information is included in
Introduction Controls - Base Radio) . . . . . 7-26 this manual. See the infotainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 manual for information on other
Trademarks and License available infotainment systems.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Agreements
Trademarks and License Read the following pages to
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 become familiar with these features.
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Radio { Warning
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Taking your eyes off the road for
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 too long or too often while using
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 any infotainment feature can
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 cause a crash. You or others
could be injured or killed. Do not
Audio Players give extended attention to
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
infotainment tasks while driving.
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Limit your glances at the vehicle
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 displays and focus your attention
on driving. Use voice commands
Navigation whenever possible.
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
7-2 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in To play the infotainment system with
features intended to help avoid the ignition off, see Retained
distraction by disabling some Accessory Power (RAP) on
functions when driving. These page 9-22.
functions may gray out when they
are unavailable. Many infotainment Theft-Deterrent Feature
features are also available through
the instrument cluster and steering TheftLock® is designed to
wheel controls. discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Before driving: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
. Become familiar with the The radio does not operate if it is
operation, faceplate buttons, and stolen or moved to a different
screen buttons. vehicle.
. Set up the audio by presetting
favorite stations, setting the
tone, and adjusting the
speakers.
. Set up phone numbers in
advance so they can be called
easily by pressing a single
button or by using a single voice
command if equipped with
Bluetooth phone capability.
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Press and hold to save
Overview favorite stations.
Infotainment System Overview . Press to select options.
The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons on the faceplate
and steering wheel controls. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5-3. 3. r (Favorite Pages)
. Press to scroll forward
through the favorite pages.
4. O (Power/Volume)
. Press to turn the audio on.
. Press and hold to turn it off.
. When on, press to mute the
system. Press again to
unmute.
. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
5. MEDIA
. Press to change the audio
source between CD, USB,
SD Card, and AUX.
6. RADIO
1. q (Favorite Pages) 2. Buttons 1–5 . Press to change the audio
. Press to scroll backward
. Press to select favorite source between AM, FM,
through the favorite pages. stations. or SiriusXM, if equipped.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. For AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if
7. TONE 13. X (Eject)
. Press to open the Tone equipped), press l to
seek to the next strong
. Press to eject the CD.
Settings menu.
station.
8. g or l (Seek) Home Page
9. { (Home Page)
. Press g to seek to the Home Page Features
. Press to go to the Home
beginning of the current or Page from anywhere in the The infotainment system displays a
previous track. If the track system. See “Home Page” Home Page that makes it easy to
has been playing for less following. access all of the applications. Turn
than five seconds, it seeks the MENU knob to highlight
the previous track. If longer 10. q BACK application icons. Press the MENU
than five seconds, the . knob to access the feature’s
Press to return to the
current track starts from the options.
previous screen in
beginning.
a menu. Various functions are disabled when
. Press g and hold to 11. CD Slot the vehicle is moving.
quickly reverse through a AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen
track. Release the button to 12. MENU
icon to display the active source
return to playing speed. . Press to access the menu page. The sources available are
for the current audio AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if equipped),
. Press l to seek the next source.
track. CD, USB/iPod, AUX, and SD Card
. Press to select the Reader. See AM-FM Radio on
. Press l and hold to fast highlighted menu option. page 7-7, Satellite Radio on
forward through a track. page 7-9, CD Player on page 7-11,
. Turn to scroll through and Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17.
Release the button to return a list.
to playing speed. See CD
Player on page 7-11. . Turn to manually select a
station.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
PHONE: Select the PHONE screen display a list of languages. Select q Vehicle: See Vehicle
icon to display the Phone main BACK to go back to the Personalization on page 5-38.
page. See Bluetooth (Voice previous menu. Display: Press the MENU knob to
Recognition) on page 7-21 or turn the display on or off.
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-19 Valet Mode:
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls - Type a four-digit code on the Return to Factory Settings: See
Base Radio) on page 7-26. circular numeric keypad: “Return to Factory Settings” later in
this section.
NAV: Select the NAV screen icon 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
to display the last Turn-by-Turn a number. Radio Setup
maneuver if a destination was From the RADIO/BAND screen icon,
downloaded. See Navigation on 2. Press the MENU knob to select
it. Do this for each one of the the following may be displayed:
page 14-3.
four digits. Select Enter to go to Manage Favorites:
SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS the confirmation screen.
screen icon to display the Settings . Turn the MENU knob and press
main page. See “Setting Radio 3. Re-enter the four-digit code. to select a favorite.
Preferences” following. Select LOCK to lock the system.
This will also lock out access to
. To delete a favorite, press
Setting Radio Preferences the storage behind the radio, the button just below the
if equipped. See Instrument DELETE screen button.
Select the SETTINGS screen icon
Panel Storage on page 4-1. . To move a favorite, press
to display the Settings menu and
the following may display: 4. Type the four-digit code to the MOVE screen button.
Turn the MENU knob to
Time: See Clock (Base Radio) on unlock the system. Select q
select a new location, then
page 5-5 or Clock (Uplevel Radio) BACK to go back to the press the DROP screen
on page 5-6. previous menu. button to select the new
Language (Language): This will Radio: See “Radio Setup” later in location.
set the display language in the radio this section.
and instrument cluster. Select to
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
. Select q BACK to go back to the

. Driver: Adjusts the audio to give Rear Camera (If Equipped)
previous menu. the driver the best possible
sound quality. From the Rear Camera screen
Number of Favorites Shown: To button, the following may be
set the number of favorites for
. Rear: Adjusts the audio to give displayed:
display, select Auto to automatically the rear seat occupants the best
possible sound quality. Rear Park Assist Symbols: This
adjust the number of Favorites feature will display symbols where
pages shown as Favorites are . Centerpoint®: Turns on Bose objects are detected by the Rear
added and removed. Another way to Centerpoint surround Parking Assist system. Select Park
adjust is to select a number from 5– technology. Assist Symbols, then select Off
25 to show that selection of or On.
favorites. Centerpoint creates a surround
sound from nearly any audio See Assistance Systems for Parking
Audible Touch Feedback: Select source: existing CD collection, or Backing on page 9-44.
Audible Touch Feedback to turn satellite radio, and audio players.
feedback off or on. Rear Cross Traffic Alert: This
Maximum Startup Volume: This feature will display an alert icon
Auto Volume (If Equipped): This feature sets the maximum startup when cross traffic is detected.
feature adjusts the volume based on volume. If the vehicle is started and Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert, then
vehicle speed. The options are Off, the volume is greater than this level, select Off or On.
Low, Medium-Low, Medium, the volume is adjusted to this level.
Medium-High, or High. Select the To set the maximum startup volume, Return to Factory Settings
desired volume. Turn the MENU knob to increase or Select Return to Factory Settings
DSP Modes (If Equipped): This decrease startup volume. and the following list may display:
feature has four modes: Restore Vehicle Settings: This
. Normal: Adjusts the audio to option will restore factory vehicle
normal mode. This provides the personalization settings. Select
best sound quality for all seating Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen
positions. displays stating all vehicle
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
customization settings will be Software Updates Radio

restored to the factory settings.
Select Cancel or Continue. See the website for more
information. AM-FM Radio
Clear All Private Data: This option
clears all private information from In the U.S., see www.chevrolet.com Playing the Radio
the vehicle. Select Clear All Private In Canada, see While on the audio main page,
Data. Select Cancel or Continue. www.chevrolet.gm.ca press the RADIO or MEDIA button
Restore Radio Settings: This repeatedly to display and scroll
option will restore factory radio through the available sources: AM,
settings. Select Restore Radio FM, and SiriusXM® (if equipped),
Settings. A screen displays stating CD, USB, SD, and AUX.
all personalized radio settings will The steering wheel controls can
be restored back to the factory also be used to adjust the volume.
settings. Select Cancel or Continue. See Steering Wheel Controls on
English and Metric Unit page 5-3.
Conversion AM, FM, SiriusXM (If Equipped)
To change the display units between To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if
English and metric units, see “Units” equipped):
under “Settings” in Instrument
Cluster on page 5-9. 1. Press {.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the AUDIO screen icon.
3. Press the MENU knob to select.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to EQ (Equalizer) Settings:
either AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if highlight. Press the MENU knob If equipped with a Bose Sound
equipped) and press MENU to to select. Turn the MENU knob System, the available choices are
select. to the left for more sound from Manual and Talk.
the front speakers and to the
Press the RADIO faceplate button right for more sound from the DSP Modes: If equipped with a
to display and change the radio rear speakers. The middle Bose Surround Sound System, it
source. Press the MENU knob and position balances the sound will have the following four DSP
the following radio settings may between the front and rear Modes:
display: speakers. . Normal: Adjusts the audio to
Tone Settings: . EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENU normal mode. This provides the
. Bass, Midrange, and Treble: knob to highlight. Turn the best sound quality for all seating
Turn the MENU knob to MENU knob to scroll through the positions.
highlight. Press the MENU knob options. Press the MENU knob . Driver: Adjusts the audio to give
to select. Turn the MENU knob to select. Press q BACK button the driver the best possible
to adjust. to go to the previous menu. sound quality.
. Balance: Turn the MENU knob . Rear: Adjusts the audio to give
Station List: Select to display a list
to highlight. Press the MENU of AM or FM stations. Press q the rear seat occupants the best
knob to select. Turn the MENU possible sound quality.
BACK to go to the previous menu.
knob left for more sound from . Centerpoint®: Turns on Bose
the left speakers or right for Auto Volume: If equipped, this
Centerpoint® surround
more sound from the right feature adjusts the volume based on
technology.
speakers. The middle position the vehicle speed. Select the level
balances the sound between the between off, low, medium-low, Centerpoint creates a surround
left and right speakers. medium, medium-high, and high. sound from nearly any audio
Press q BACK to go to the source: existing CD collection,
previous menu. satellite radio, and audio players.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Options for SiriusXM Only Tuning a Station deleting a favorite. See “Manage
XM View: XM view allows the Turn the MENU knob to manually Favorites” under Overview on
channel list to be viewed by channel find a station. page 7-3.
name, artist playing on channel,
or song playing on channel. Select Storing Radio Station Presets Satellite Radio
to display Channel List in XM views. Up to 25 preset stations from all SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Turn the MENU knob to highlight bands can be stored in the favorite
and press the MENU knob to select.
Service
lists in any order. Up to five stations
Press q BACK to go to the can be stored in each favorite page Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
previous menu. and the number of favorites can radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
be set. satellite radio subscription can
Channel List: Select to display a receive SiriusXM programming.
list of SiriusXM channels. Turn the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
MENU knob to highlight and press Equipped): While on the active SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
source main page, such as AM, FM, based in the 48 contiguous United
the MENU knob to select. Press q
and SiriusXM (if equipped), press States and 10 Canadian provinces.
BACK to go to the previous menu. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
and hold the corresponding key.
Also see the radio settings common variety of programming and
for all sources earlier in this section. Mixed-Audio Favorites commercial-free music, coast to
Favorites can be stored including coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Finding a Station A service fee is required to receive
radio stations.
Seeking a Station the SiriusXM service. See
To display the favorites page, press www.siriusxmradio.com or call
Press g or l to search for the q or r on the radio faceplate. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.); or see
previous or next strongest station, From the Settings menu, press the www.xmradio.ca or call
or press and hold to quickly search MENU knob to select Manage 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
through stations. Favorites. The Manage Favorites
feature has the option of moving or
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
When SiriusXM is active, the FM out. In addition, traveling or standing

channel name and number, under heavy foliage, bridges,
FM signals only reach about 16 to
category name, song title, and artist garages, or tunnels may cause loss
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
display on the screen. of the SiriusXM signal for a period
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
of time.
Browsing SiriusXM Channels that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur, Cell Phone Usage
To browse the SiriusXM channels: especially around tall buildings or
1. Press the MENU knob. hills, causing the sound to fade in Cell phone usage, such as making
and out. or receiving phone calls, charging,
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight or just having the phone on may
XM Channel List. AM cause static interference in the
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
The range for most AM stations is
the desired XM Channels. if this happens.
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
Radio Reception station frequencies to interfere with Backglass Antenna
Frequency interference and static each other. Static can also occur The AM-FM antenna is integrated
can occur during normal radio when things like storms and power with the rear window defogger in the
reception if items such as phone lines interfere with radio reception. rear window. Do not scratch the
chargers, vehicle convenience When this happens, try reducing the inside surface or damage the lines
accessories, and external electronic treble on the radio. in the glass. If the inside surface is
devices are plugged into the damaged, it could interfere with
SiriusXM Satellite Radio radio reception. For proper radio
accessory power outlet. If there is Service
interference or static, unplug the reception, the antenna connector
item from the accessory power If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite needs to be properly attached to the
outlet. Radio Service provides digital radio post on the glass.
reception. Tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If attaching a cell phone antenna to Audio Players

the glass, attach it between the grid Caution (Continued)
lines.
metallic tinting materials will not CD Player
be covered by the vehicle
{ Caution warranty.
The CD player can be used for CD
and MP3 audio.
Using a razor blade or sharp
With the vehicle on, insert a disc
object to clear the inside rear Multi-Band Antenna into the slot, label side up. Press the
window can damage the rear MEDIA button to select CD as a
window antenna and/or the rear The roof antenna is for OnStar®,
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, and GPS source.
window defogger. Repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle (Global Positioning System). Keep The system is capable of playing:
warranty. Do not clear the inside clear of obstructions for clear . Most audio CDs
reception. If the vehicle has a
rear window with sharp objects. . CD-R
sunroof, and it is open, reception
can also be affected. . CD-RW
. MP3 or unprotected WMA
{ Caution formats
Do not apply aftermarket glass When playing any compatible
tinting with metallic film. The recordable disc, the sound quality
metallic film in some tinting can be reduced due to disc quality,
materials will interfere with or the method of recording, the quality
distort the incoming radio of the music that has been
reception. Any damage caused to recorded, or the way the disc has
the backglass antenna due to been handled.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
There can be increased skipping, damaged or improperly loaded, u (Seek Next/Fast Forward):
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or there is an error and the disc While on the CD main page:
difficulty in loading and ejecting. ejects. .
If these problems occur, check the Press to seek to the next track.
disc for damage or try a known Playing an Audio CD . Press and hold to fast forward
good disc. Press the MEDIA button on the through a track. Release the
To avoid damage to the CD player: faceplate until CD is selected. button to return to playing
On the CD main page, a track speed. Elapsed time displays.
. Do not use scratched or
damaged discs. number displays at the beginning of j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD
each track. Song, Artist, and Album main page, press to pause. Press
. Do not apply labels to discs. The information displays when available. again to resume.
labels could get caught in the
player. Use the following screen controls to Z (Shuffle): Press Z to play the
play the disc: songs in random order. Press again
. Insert only one disc at a time. to turn off.
t (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse):
. Keep the loading slot free of While on the CD main page: If a Blu-ray Disc® or DVD disc is
foreign materials, liquids, and loaded into the CD player and the
debris.
. Press to seek to the beginning of
the current or previous track. CD screen button is selected, a disc
. Use a marking pen to label the If the track has been playing for error occurs and the disc is ejected.
top of the disc. less than five seconds, it seeks CD Menu
Loading and Ejecting Discs to the previous track. If longer
While on the CD main page, press
than five seconds, the current
To load a disc: the MENU knob to display the CD
track starts from the beginning.
menu and the following may display:
1. Turn the vehicle on. . Press and hold to fast reverse
Browse: Select to display the files
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label through a track. Release the
or songs on the CD. See “Browse
side up. The player pulls it in the button to return to playing
CD Media” later in this section.
rest of the way. If the disc is speed. Elapsed time displays.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Tone Settings: Select to adjust Error Messages

. There are load or eject errors.
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, If the CD is not playing correctly, for
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See any other reason, try a known
comes out, it could be for one of the
“Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio good CD.
following reasons:
on page 7-7.
. The disc has an invalid or If any error continues, contact your
Auto Volume: If equipped, this dealer.
unknown format.
feature adjusts the volume based on
the vehicle speed. Select the level . The disc is very hot. Try the disc Playing an MP3 CD
between off, low, medium-low, again when the temperature To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
medium, medium-high, and high. returns to normal. instructions as “Playing an
Press q BACK to go to the . The road is very rough. Try the Audio CD.”
previous menu. disc again when the road is The following guidelines must be
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: smoother. met when creating an MP3 disc,
If equipped, this feature adjusts the . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, otherwise the CD might not play:
DSP Modes. See “EQ (Equalizer) or upside down. . Sampling rate: 16 kHz,
Settings” in AM-FM Radio on 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
. The air is very humid. Try the
page 7-7. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
disc again later.
DSP Modes: If equipped, this . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
. There was a problem while
feature adjusts the DSP Modes. 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
burning the disc.
See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
on page 7-7. . The label is caught in the CD
and 320 kbps.
player.
. Maximum number of folders:
If Disc Player Error displays, it could
eight folders with 255 files per
be for one of the following reasons:
folder.
. The player temperature is . Maximum of 1,000 files on
too high.
a disc.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.
USB Port While the USB source is active, use
Root Directory the icons on the screen to operate
Playing from a USB USB function:
The root directory is treated as a
folder. All files contained directly A USB mass storage device or . t (Seek Previous/Fast
under the root directory are Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) Reverse)
accessed prior to any root directory device can be connected to the
folders. USB port. . u (Seek Next/Fast Forward)
If equipped, the USB ports are in . j /r (Play/Pause)
Empty Folders
the center console and if equipped
If a root directory or folder is empty with storage behind the radio, there . Z (Shuffle)
or contains only folders, the player is a USB port inside.
advances to the next folder in the For information on how to use the
file structure that contains a USB MP3 Player and USB Drives screen icons, see “Playing an Audio
compressed audio file. The empty CD” previously in this section.
. The USB MP3 players and USB
folder(s) are not displayed or drives connected must comply USB Menu
numbered. with the USB Mass Storage
Press the MENU knob to display the
Class specification (USB MSC).
No Folder USB menu and the following may
. Hard disk drives are not display:
When the CD only contains
supported.
compressed audio files without any Browse: Select to display the files
folders, all files are under the root To play a USB device: and folders on the USB device.
folder. . Connect the USB. Tone Settings: Select to adjust
. Press the MEDIA button on the Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
faceplate until the connected Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
device is shown. “Tone Settings” under “Playing an
Audio CD.”
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Auto Volume: If equipped, see There may be problems with The iPod battery recharges
“Playing an Audio CD.” operation and function in the automatically while the vehicle is on.
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: following situations: When the vehicle is off while an
If equipped, this feature adjusts the . When connecting an iPod on iPod is connected using the iPod
pre-defined EQ Modes. See “EQ which a more recent version of USB cable, the iPod battery stops
(Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM the firmware is installed than is charging and the iPod automatically
Radio on page 7-7. supported by the infotainment turns off.
DSP Modes: If equipped, this system. If the iPod is an unsupported model,

feature adjusts the DSP Modes. . When connecting an iPod on it can still be listened to in the
See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio which firmware from other vehicle by connecting to the
on page 7-7. providers is installed. auxiliary input jack using a standard
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
Playing from an iPod® To connect and control an iPod:
iPod Menu
This feature supports the following 1. Connect one end of the standard
iPod USB cable to the iPod's Press the MENU knob to display the
iPod models:
dock connector. iPod Menu and the following may
. iPod nano® (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and display:
4th generation) 2. Connect the other end to the
USB port in the center console. Browse: Select to display the files
. iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5 or songs on the iPod. See “Browse
generation). 3. Press the MEDIA button to iPod Media” later in this section.
® select the source.
. iPod classic (6th generation) Tone Settings: Select to adjust
® iPod music information displays on Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
. iPod touch (1st and 2nd the radio’s display and begins
generation) Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
playing through the vehicle’s audio “Tone Settings” under “Playing an
system. Audio CD.”
Auto Volume: If equipped, see
“Playing an Audio CD.”
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: Artists: Genres:

If equipped, this feature adjusts the 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
pre-defined EQ Modes. See “EQ and press to view the artists and press to view the genres
(Equalizer) Settings” in AM-FM stored on the iPod. stored on the iPod.
Radio on page 7-7.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
DSP Modes: If equipped, this and press to select an artist and press to select a genre
feature adjusts the DSP Modes. name to view a list of all albums name to view a list of artists of
See “DSP Modes” in AM-FM Radio by the artist. that genre.
on page 7-7.
Browse iPod Media and press to select the album and press to select to view
Use the following to browse: from the list. albums by that artist.
Playlists: 4. To begin playback, select a song 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
from the album. and press to select an album to
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight view songs.
and press to view the playlists Albums:
stored on the iPod. 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to view the albums and press to select the song
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight from the list to begin playback.
and press to select a playlist stored on the iPod.
name to view a list of all songs 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Songs:
in the playlist. and press to select an album 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight name to view a list of all songs and press to view a list of all
and press to select the song on the album. songs stored on the iPod.
from the list to begin playback. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to select the song and press to select the song
from the list to begin playback. from the list to begin playback.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Playing from an iPhone® Auxiliary Jack Playing from the AUX Jack
or iPad® An auxiliary device is played
The AUX jack is in the center
This feature supports iPhone 3G, console. See Center Console through the audio system and
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, and iPad. Storage on page 4-2. controlled through the device itself.
Follow the same instructions as Possible auxiliary audio sources AUX Menu
stated earlier for using an iPod. include: Press the MENU knob to display the
. Laptop computer AUX menu and the following may
SD Card Reader display:
. Audio music player
If equipped, the SD card reader is in Tone Settings: Select to adjust
the center console. See Center This jack is not an audio output. Do Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
Console Storage on page 4-2. not plug headphones into the Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary “Tone Settings” under AM-FM Radio
1. Plug the SD card into the reader. devices should be set up while the on page 7-7.
2. Press the MEDIA button to vehicle is in P (Park).
select the SD device. Auto Volume: If equipped, see
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable “Playing an Audio CD.”
If an SD card has already been from the auxiliary device to the
connected, but a different source is auxiliary input jack. DSP: If equipped, this feature
currently active, press the MEDIA adjusts the pre-defined settings.
If an auxiliary device has already See “DSP” in AM-FM Radio on
screen button repeatedly to cycle been connected, but a different
through all of the available audio page 7-7.
source is currently active, press the
source screens, until the SD card MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this
screen is shown. to scroll through all of the available feature adjusts the pre-defined
Playing Music from the SD Card audio source screens, until the AUX equalizer settings. See “EQ
source screen is shown. (Equalizer)” in AM-FM Radio on
An SD card is played the same way page 7-7.
a USB device is played. See USB
Port on page 7-14.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Route Preview
Navigation Press the button below the MUTE
screen button to mute the . Repeat
® navigation directions. The previous
OnStar System audio selection will play. The MUTE When the system is downloading a
® screen button will change to route, the only option available is
An OnStar subscriber has the
UNMUTE. Press the button below Cancel Route. Once the route is
ability to connect to the OnStar
UNMUTE to enable the navigation downloaded, the additional list items
system (if equipped) and ask an
directions again. display.
OnStar Advisor to download a
destination into the vehicle. OnStar OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation My Destination
will send address information and If My Destination is selected, a
location coordinates of the Press the MENU knob to go to the
Turn-by-Turn menu. special version of the Maneuver
destination into the vehicle. View displays. The Destination
To access from the Home Page, Address is shown in the Street
turn the MENU knob to highlight the Name field and the total distance to
OnStar icon. Press the MENU knob the destination is shown in the
to access. Distance to Maneuver View. Press
the button below the DONE screen
button to return to the
Maneuver View.
The following options are available:

. Update Route: only shows if the
vehicle is off the route
. Cancel Route
. My Destination
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Route Preview
. Press the button below the
PREV screen button to display Phone
the previous maneuver
information, including distance Bluetooth (Overview)
between it and the previous Instructions for using the cell phone
maneuver. may differ between infotainment
While on the current maneuver, systems. For vehicles with an
the PREV screen button is uplevel radio, see the infotainment
hidden. If on the last maneuver, manual.
the NEXT screen button is Bluetooth-capable systems can
hidden. interact with many cell phones,
. If Route Preview is selected, a
special version of the Maneuver
. Press the button below the allowing:
View displays. DONE screen button to return to . Placement and receipt of calls in
the Maneuver View. a hands-free mode.
. Press the button below the
NEXT screen button to display Repeat . Sharing of the cell phone’s
the next maneuver information, Press the button below the REPEAT address book or contact list with
including distance between it screen button to go back to the the vehicle.
and the previous maneuver. Maneuver View. The audible To minimize driver distraction,
maneuver prompt is repeated. before driving, and with the vehicle
Canceling a Turn-by-Turn Route parked:
Press the button below the Cancel
. Become familiar with the
Route screen button on the features of the cell phone.
Turn-by-Turn menu. A screen Organize the phone book and
displays to confirm the cancellation. contact lists clearly and delete
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
duplicate or rarely used entries. Bluetooth Controls

If possible, program speed dial Warning (Continued)
Use the buttons on the instrument
or other shortcuts.
Taking your eyes off the road too panel, faceplate, and the steering
. Review the controls and long or too often could cause a wheel to operate the Bluetooth
operation of the infotainment crash resulting in injury or death. system.
system. Focus your attention on driving. Steering Wheel Controls
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with g (Press to Talk): Press to answer
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system incoming calls or start voice
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in can use a Bluetooth-capable cell
this section. recognition.
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to
. If the cell phone has voice make and receive phone calls. The c (End Call): Press to end a call,
dialing capability, learn to use infotainment system and voice reject a call, or cancel an operation.
that feature to access the recognition are used to control the Press to mute or unmute the
address book or contact list. See system. The system can be used infotainment system.
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this while in ON/RUN or ACC/ Infotainment System Controls
section. ACCESSORY. The range of the
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m For information about how to
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone navigate the menu system using the
Numbers” in this section. (30 ft). Not all phones support all
functions and not all phones work infotainment controls, see Overview
with the Bluetooth system. See on page 7-3.
{ Warning www.gm.com/bluetooth for more MENU: Turn to scroll through a list.
information about compatible Press to select the highlighted list
When using a cell phone, it can phones. option.
be distracting to look too long or
too often at the screen of the { (Home Page): Press to go to the
phone or the infotainment system. Home Page. See Home Page on
page 7-4.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
PHONE: From the Home Page, Audio System Bluetooth (Voice

select to enter the phone main
menu. See Bluetooth (Voice
When using the Bluetooth system, Recognition)
sound comes through the vehicle's
Recognition) on page 7-21 or Using Voice Recognition
front audio system speakers and
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-19
overrides the audio system. Use the To use voice recognition, press g
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Base Radio) on page 7-26.
O knob during a call to change the on the steering wheel. Use the
volume level. The system maintains
commands below for the various
Voice Recognition a minimum volume level.
voice features. For additional
The voice recognition system uses Bluetooth Audio Quality information, say “Help” while you
commands to control the system are in a voice recognition menu.
Turn off the Echo and Noise
and dial phone numbers.
cancellation feature on your phone, Pairing
Noise: The system may not if supported, for the best hands-free
recognize voice commands if there performance. Pairing a Phone
is too much background noise, such 1. Press g. The system responds
See www.gm.com/bluetooth.
as noise from open windows or loud
“Ready,” followed by a tone.
talking inside the vehicle. Other Information
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
When to Speak: A tone sounds to The Bluetooth® word mark and
indicate that the system is ready for logos are owned by the Bluetooth® 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
a voice command. Wait for the tone SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks with instructions and a four-digit
and then speak. by General Motors is under license. Personal Identification Number
Other trademarks and trade names (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice. are those of their respective owners. 4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
5. Locate the device named “Your 2. Say “Bluetooth.” 1. Press g. The system responds
Vehicle” in the list on the cell 3. Say “List.” “Ready,” followed by a tone.
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
PIN provided in Step 3. After the If the phone name to delete is 3. Say “Change phone.”
PIN is successfully entered, the unknown, see “Listing All Paired
system prompts you to provide a
. If another cell phone is
and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be
name for the paired cell phone.
“<Phone name> is now
This name will be used to 1. Press g. The system responds
indicate which phones are connected.”
paired and connected to the This can be repeated to
vehicle. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth.” connect any of the up to
with “<Phone name> has been 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks five paired phones.
successfully paired” after the for which phone to delete. . If another cell phone is not
pairing process is complete. 4. Say the name of the phone to found, the original phone
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair delete. remains connected.
additional phones.
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers
Phones the Bluetooth system looks for the The following commands are used
The system can list all cell phones next available cell phone in the to delete and store phone numbers.
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is order in which all available cell
also connected to the vehicle, the phones were paired. This may need Store: This command will store a
system responds with “is connected” to be repeated depending on how phone number, or a group of
after that phone name. many cell phones have been numbers as a name tag.
connected.
1. Press g. The system responds
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Digit Store: This command allows To hear all of the digits recognized Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
a phone number to be stored as a by the system, say “Verify” at Command
name tag by entering the digits one any time. This command deletes all stored
at a time. name tags in the Hands-Free
Delete: This command is used to “Ready,” followed by a tone. Calling Directory and the
delete individual name tags. Destinations Directory.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Delete All Name Tags: This To delete all name tags:
command deletes all stored name 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
tags in the Hands-Free Calling After each digit is entered, the 1. Press g. The system responds
Directory and the Destinations system repeats back the digit it “Ready,” followed by a tone.
Directory. heard followed by a tone. After 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
the last digit has been entered,
Using the “Store” Command say “Store,” and then follow the Listing Stored Numbers
directions given by the system to
1. Press g. The system responds The list command will list all the
save a name tag for this number.
“Ready,” followed by a tone. stored numbers and name tags.
2. Say “Store.” Using the “Delete” Command
Using the “List” Command
3. Say the entire phone number or 1. Press g. The system responds
a group of digits all at once with “Ready,” followed by a tone.
no pauses, then follow the 2. Say “Delete.”
directions given by the system to 2. Say “Directory.”
save a name tag for this number. 3. Say the name tag you want to
3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
delete.
Using the “Digit Store” Command 4. Say “List.”
If an unwanted number is Making a Call
recognized by the system, say
“Correction” at any time to clear the Calls can be made using the
last number. following commands.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” 1. Press g. The system responds
command can be used 3. Say “911.” “Ready,” followed by a tone.
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
Digit Dial: This command allows a Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico) 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
phone number to be dialed by After each digit is entered, the
entering the digits one at a time. 1. Press g. The system responds system repeats back the digit it
“Ready,” followed by a tone. heard followed by a tone. After
Re-dial: This command is used to the last digit has been entered,
dial the last number used on the cell 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
say “Dial.”
phone. 3. Say “066.”
Once connected, the person called
Using the “Dial” or “Call” 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.” will be heard through the audio
Command speakers.
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
1. Press g. The system responds The digit dial command allows a Using the “Re-dial” Command
“Ready,” followed by a tone. phone number to be dialed by 1. Press g. The system responds
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
3. Say the entire number without system repeats back the digit it 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
pausing or say the name tag. heard followed by a tone. system dials the last number
Once connected, the person called called from the connected cell
If an unwanted number is
will be heard through the audio phone.
recognized by the system, say
speakers. “Correction” at any time to clear the Once connected, the person called
Calling 911 Emergency (U.S. and last number. will be heard through the audio
Canada) speakers.
To hear all of the numbers
1. Press g. The system responds recognized by the system, say
“Ready,” followed by a tone. “Verify” at any time.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling transferred. The connection process

can take up to two minutes after the
When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service To Transfer Audio from the
carrier. Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
. Press g to answer the call.
1. While on a call, press g. During a call with the audio in the
. Press i to ignore a call. vehicle:
2. Say “Three-way call.”
Call Waiting 3. Use the “Dial” or “Call” command
1. Press g.
Call waiting must be supported on to dial the number of the third 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
the cell phone and enabled by the party to be called.
wireless service carrier. To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
4. Once the call is connected, System from a Cell Phone
. Press g to answer an incoming press g to link all callers During a call with the audio on the
call when another call is active. together.
cell phone, press g. The audio
The original call is placed
on hold. Ending a Call transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle, use
. Press g again to return to the Press i to end a call. the audio transfer feature on the cell
original call. phone. See your cell phone
Transferring a Call
manufacturer's user guide for more
. To ignore the incoming call, no Audio can be transferred between information.
action is required. the Bluetooth system and the cell
. Press i to disconnect the phone.
current call and switch to the call The cell phone must be paired and
on hold. connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Voice Pass-Thru menu-driven phone system. Bluetooth (Infotainment

Account numbers can also be
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
stored for use.
Controls - Base Radio)
voice recognition commands on the
For information about how to
cell phone. See your cell phone Sending a Number or Name Tag
navigate the menu system using the
manufacturer's user guide to see if During a Call
infotainment controls, see Overview
the cell phone supports this feature.
1. Press g. The system responds on page 7-3.
To access contacts stored in the cell “Ready,” followed by a tone.
phone: Switching to Handset or
2. Say “Dial.” Hands-Free Mode
3. Say the number or name tag To switch between handset mode
“Ready,” followed by a tone. to send. and hands-free mode, use the
2. Say “Bluetooth.” OnStar command, “transfer call.”
Clearing the System
3. Say “Voice.” The system Pairing
responds “OK, accessing Unless information is deleted out of
<phone name>.” the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
will be retained indefinitely. This must be paired to the Bluetooth
The cell phone's normal prompt includes all phone pairing system and then connected to the
messages will go through their cycle information. For information on how vehicle before it can be used. See
according to the phone's operating to delete this information, see your cell phone manufacturer's user
instructions. “Deleting a Paired Phone.” guide for Bluetooth functions before
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
(DTMF) Tones phone is not connected, calls can
be made using OnStar Hands-Free
The Bluetooth system can send Calling, if available. See OnStar
numbers and the numbers stored as Overview on page 14-1, if equipped.
name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone or Device 5. Locate the device named “Your
. Up to five cell phones can be 1. From the Home Page, turn the Vehicle” in the list on the cell
paired to the Bluetooth system. MENU knob to access the phone. Follow the instructions
PHONE screen button, then on the cell phone to enter the
. The pairing process is disabled PIN provided in Step 3.
when the vehicle is moving. press the MENU knob to select
the PHONE screen button. If a After the PIN is successfully
. Pairing only needs to be device has been previously entered, the system confirms the
completed once per phone, paired, the main Phone menu pairing process is complete.
unless the pairing information on will be shown. If no devices
the cell phone changes or the 6. If the phone prompts to accept
have been paired, Step 2 can be connection or allow phone book
cell phone is deleted from the skipped.
system. download, select Always Accept
2. Turn the MENU knob and press and Allow. The phone book may
. Only one paired cell phone can to select Manage Phones. not be available if not accepted.
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time. 3. Press the button just below the 7. Repeat steps 1–6 to pair
PAIR screen button. A four-digit additional phones or devices.
. If multiple paired cell phones are Personal Identification Number
within range of the system, the (PIN) appears on the display. Listing All Paired and Connected
system connects to the first The PIN is used in Step 5. Phones
available paired cell phone in the 1. To list all paired devices, from
order that they were newly 4. Start the pairing process on the
the Home Page turn the MENU
paired to the system. To connect cell phone to be paired to the
knob, then press to select the
to a different paired phone, see vehicle. See the cell phone
PHONE screen button.
“Connecting to a Different manufacturer's user guide for
Phone” later in this section. information on this process. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
to select Manage Phones.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Deleting a Paired Phone 4. Press the button just below the Making a Call Using Contacts
1. From the Home Page, turn the CONNECT screen button to and Recent Calls
MENU knob, then press to connect to the highlighted
device. For cell phones that support the
select the PHONE screen Contacts and Recent Calls feature,
button. Phone Menu the Bluetooth system can use the
2. Turn the MENU knob and press contacts stored on your cell phone
Once a phone is connected and
to select Manage Phones. to make calls. See your cell phone
selected, the following may display:
manufacturer’s user guide or
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Recent Calls: Turn the MENU contact your wireless provider to
the phone to be deleted. knob to highlight Recent Calls and find out if this feature is supported
4. Press the button below the press to select. by your phone.
DELETE screen button to delete Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to If the phone prompts to allow phone
the highlighted device. highlight Contacts and press to book download during the pairing
5. A confirmation screen is select. process, select Always Accept and
displayed. Press the button just Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to Allow. The phone book may not be
below the DELETE screen highlight Keypad and press to available if not accepted.
button to confirm deletion. select. When a cell phone supports the
Connecting to a Different Phone Active Call: Turn the MENU knob phone book feature, the Contacts
to highlight Active Call and press to and Recent Calls menus are
1. From the Home Page, turn the automatically available.
MENU knob, then press to select and display the active call
select the PHONE screen screen. The Contacts menu allows you to
button. Manage Phones: Turn the MENU access the phone book stored in the
knob to highlight Manage Phones cell phone to make a call.
2. Turn the MENU knob and press
to select Manage Phones. and press to select.
the phone to be connected.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The Recent Calls menu allows you To make a call using the Recent 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
to access the phone numbers from Calls menu: to select Keypad.
the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, 1. From the Home Page, turn the 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and Missed Calls menus on the cell MENU knob, then press to the first digit and press to select.
phone to make a call. select the PHONE screen Continue this process through
To make a call using the button. the number. To call, press the
Contacts menu: 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight button just below the CALL
1. From the Home Page, turn the Recent Calls and press to screen button.
MENU knob, then press to select. Accepting or Declining a Call
select the PHONE screen If necessary, select between
button. When an incoming call is received,
Missed, Recent, and Sent calls the infotainment system mutes and
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight by pressing the button below the a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Contacts and press to select. appropriate screen button.
Accepting a Call
the letter group and press to the contact or the phone To accept a call, do one of the
select. number. following:
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 4. Press the MENU knob to call the . Press the button just below the
the contact and press to select. contact. ANSWER screen button.
5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Making a Call Using the . Press g on the steering wheel
the desired number, then press Keypad controls.
the MENU knob to call the
contact. To make a call:
1. From the Home Page, turn the
MENU knob, then press to
select the PHONE screen
button.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Declining a Call Declining a Call Waiting Call 1. When a call is active, press the
To decline a call, do one of the To decline a call waiting call, do one button just below the KEYPAD
following: of the following: screen button.
. Press the button just below the . Press the button just below the 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
IGNORE screen button. IGNORE screen button. the first digit and press to select.
If not initially in the phone
. Press i on the steering wheel . Press i on the steering wheel application, from the Home Page,
controls. controls. turn the MENU knob, then press to
. Do nothing. . Do nothing. select the PHONE screen button.
From the PHONE main menu, turn
Call Waiting Ending a Call the MENU knob to highlight Active
Call waiting must be supported on To end a call, do one of the Call and press to select.
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by following:
the wireless service carrier to work. . Press the button just below the
Accepting a Call Waiting Call END screen button.
To accept a call waiting call, do one . Press i on the steering wheel
of the following: controls.
. Press the button just below the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
SWITCH screen button.
(DTMF) Tones
. Press g on the steering wheel The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
controls. send numbers during a call. This is
used when calling a menu-driven
phone system.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Trademarks and Explicit Language Notice: Channels

with frequent explicit language are
License Agreements indicated with an “XL” preceding the
channel name. Channel blocking is
FCC Information available for SiriusXM Satellite
See Radio Frequency Statement on Radio receivers by notifying
page 13-12. Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, SiriusXM:
taxes, one time activation fee, and . USA Customers — Visit
other fees may apply. Subscription www.siriusxm.com or call
fee is consumer only. All fees and 1-866-635-2349.
programming subject to change. . Canadian Customers — Visit
Subscriptions subject to Customer
www.xmradio.ca or call
Agreement available at
1-877-209-0079.
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM®
“Made for iPod” and “Made for service only available in the It is prohibited to copy, decompile,
iPhone” mean that an electronic 48 contiguous United States and disassemble, reverse engineer,
accessory has been designed to Canada. hack, manipulate, or otherwise
connect specifically to iPod or make available any technology or
In Canada: Some deterioration of
iPhone and has been certified by software incorporated in receivers
service may occur in extreme
the developer to meet Apple compatible with the SiriusXM®
northern latitudes. This is beyond
Satellite Radio System or that
performance standards. the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
support the SiriusXM website, the
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Radio.
Online Service or any of its content.
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in Furthermore, the AMBER voice
the U.S. and other countries. compression software included in
this product is protected by
intellectual property rights including
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
patent rights, copyrights, and trade Bluetooth

secrets of Digital Voice
The Bluetooth word mark and logos
Systems, Inc.
are owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
General Requirements: Inc. and andy use of such marks by
1. A License Agreement from General Motors is under license.
SiriusXM is required for any Other trademarks and trade names
product that incorporates are those of their respective owners.
SiriusXM Technology and/or for
use of any of the SiriusXM
marks to be manufactured,
distributed, or marketed in the
SiriusXM service Area.
2. For products to be distributed,
marketed, and/or sold in
Canada, a separate agreement
is required with Canadian
Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
SiriusXM Canada).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
1. Fan Control Fan Control: Turn the knob

2. A/C (Air Conditioning) clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
3. Air Delivery Modes
Temperature Control: Turn the
4. Defrost knob clockwise or counterclockwise
5. TEMP (Temperature Control) to increase or decrease the
temperature setting.
6. Recirculation
7. Rear Window Defogger
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
8-2 Climate Controls
Air Delivery Modes: Press Y, \, A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to If equipped with heated outside
[ , or - to change the direction of turn the air conditioning on or off. rearview mirrors, they turn on with
the airflow. An indicator light comes If the fan is turned off, the air the rear window defogger and help
on in the selected mode button. conditioner will not run and the to clear fog or frost from the surface
indicator light may turn off. of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the page 2-20.
instrument panel outlets. L (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
\ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the comes on. Air is recirculated to { Caution
instrument panel outlets and the quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
floor outlets. or reduce the outside air and odors Using a razor blade or sharp
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the that may enter. object on the inside rear window
floor outlets. can damage the antenna or
Rear Window Defogger defogger. Repairs would not be
- (Defog): Air is directed to the
K (Rear Window Defogger): covered by the vehicle warranty.
windshield and floor outlets to clear Do not stick anything to the rear
Press to turn the rear window
the windows of fog or moisture. window.
defogger on or off.
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the The rear window defogger turns off
windshield of fog or frost more
automatically after about
quickly. Air is directed to the
10 minutes. If turned on again, it
windshield and side window outlets.
runs for about five minutes before
For best results, clear all snow and turning off. At higher speeds, the
ice from the windshield before rear window defogger may stay on
defrosting. continuously.
The upper region of gridlines on the
rear window are antenna lines and
are not intended to heat when the
defogger is activated.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Climate Control Influence on Stop/

Start Operation and Fuel Economy
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with (If Equipped)
this system.
The climate control system is
dependent upon other vehicle
systems for heat and power input.
Certain climate control settings can
lead to higher fuel usage and/or
fewer auto stops.
The following are climate control
settings that use more fuel:
. Comfort air conditioning mode.
. Defrost mode.
. Extreme temperature settings,
such as 15°C (60°F) or 32°C
(90°F).
1. Driver and Passenger 7. Air Delivery Modes
Temperature Controls
. High fan speed settings.
8. O (Fan On/Off) To help reduce fuel usage:
2. Air Conditioning or Comfort/Eco
Air Conditioning (Stop/ 9. Rear Window Defogger . Use the full automatic control as
Start Only) 10. SYNC described under “Automatic
3. Fan Control Operation.”
4. Defrost
. Use eco air conditioning, instead
of the comfort air conditioning.
5. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
6. Recirculation
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Select a temperature setting that 2. Set the temperature. Allow the on. When the passenger settings
is higher in hot weather and system time to stabilize. Then are adjusted, the SYNC indicator
lower in cold weather. adjust the temperature as light is off.
. Turn off the air conditioning needed for best comfort. O (Fan On/Off): Press the knob to
when it is not needed. To improve fuel efficiency and to turn the fan on or off.
. Only use defrost when needed cool the vehicle faster, recirculation Fan Control: Turn the knob
to clear the windows. may be automatically selected in clockwise or counterclockwise to
warm weather. increase or decrease the fan speed.
Automatic Operation
The recirculation light will not come Press AUTO to return to automatic
The system automatically controls on when automatically controlled.
the fan speed, air delivery, air operation.
Press h to manually select
conditioning, and recirculation in Air Delivery Modes: Press Y, \,
order to heat or cool the vehicle to recirculation; press it again to select
the desired temperature. outside air. [ , or - to change the direction of
the airflow. An indicator light comes
When the indicator light is on, the Manual Operation on in the selected mode button.
system is in full automatic operation. Driver and Passenger Changing the mode cancels the
If the air delivery mode or fan Temperature Control: The automatic operation and the system
setting is manually adjusted, the temperature can be adjusted goes into manual mode. Press
auto indicator turns off and displays separately for the driver and AUTO to return to automatic
will show the selected settings. passenger. operation.
To place the system in Turn the knob clockwise or Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
automatic mode: counterclockwise to increase or instrument panel outlets.
1. Press AUTO. decrease the driver or passenger
temperature setting. \ (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and the
SYNC: Press to link all climate floor outlets.
zone settings to the driver settings.
The SYNC indicator light will turn
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the A/C (Comfort/Eco Air weather conditions, auto stops may
floor outlets. Conditioning) (For Stop/Start occur more frequently and the
Vehicles): Press to cycle between vehicle interior may be warmer as
- (Defog): Air is directed to the the off, eco, and comfort air compared to the comfort air
windshield and floor outlets to clear conditioning modes. The indicator conditioning setting. This setting
the windows of fog or moisture. will be lit in comfort and eco modes allows higher humidity inside the
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the and turns off when there is no A/C vehicle and window fogging before
windshield of fog or frost more function. If the fan is turned off, the the engine restarts.
quickly. Air is directed to the air conditioner will not run and the
windshield and side window outlets. indicator light may turn off. Pressing the 0 button during an
auto stop may restart the engine to
For best results, clear all snow and For comfort a/c, press A/C. The prevent window fogging. To reach
ice from the windshield before indicator will turn amber. comfort levels quickly during an
defrosting. Pressing this button again cancels auto stop, the engine will restart if
A/C (Air Conditioning) (For automatic air conditioning and turns the air conditioner is off and AUTO
Non-Stop/Start Vehicles): Press off the air conditioner. Press AUTO or A/C is selected.
to turn the air conditioning on or off. to return to automatic operation and If temperature controls are adjusted
If the fan is turned off, the air the air conditioner runs cooler by more than 1°C (1°F)
conditioner will not run and the automatically as needed. When the during an auto stop, the engine will
indicator light may turn off. indicator light is on, the air restart to ensure that comfort is
conditioner runs automatically to reached.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
cool the air inside the vehicle or to
operation and the air conditioner
dry the air as needed to defog the L (Recirculation): Press to turn
runs as needed. When the indicator on recirculation. An indicator light
windshield faster.
light is on, the air conditioner runs comes on. Air is recirculated to
automatically to cool the air inside For eco a/c, press A/C again. The quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
the vehicle or to dry the air as indicator will turn green. This setting or prevent outside air and odors
needed to defog the windshield balances fuel economy and air from entering.
faster. conditioning comfort. In warm
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Auto Defog: The climate control The upper region of gridlines on the previous settings to heat or cool the
system may have a sensor to rear window are antenna lines and inside of the vehicle. The rear defog
automatically detect high humidity are not intended to heat when the may come on during remote start
inside the vehicle. When high defogger is activated. based on cold ambient conditions.
humidity is detected, the climate If equipped with heated outside The rear defog indicator light may
control system may adjust to rearview mirrors, they turn on with not come on during a remote start.
outside air supply and turn on the the rear window defogger and help The front heated seats may turn on
air conditioner. The fan speed may to clear fog or frost from the surface if it is cold outside. The heated seat
slightly increase to help prevent of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on indicator lights may not come on
fogging. If the climate control page 2-20. during a remote start. See Remote
system does not detect possible Vehicle Start on page 2-9 and
window fogging, it returns to normal Heated and Ventilated Seats on
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or { Caution page 1-10 (if equipped).
on, see “Climate and Air Quality”
Using a razor blade or sharp Sensors
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-38. object on the inside rear window
can damage the antenna or
Rear Window Defogger defogger. Repairs would not be
K (Rear Window Defogger): covered by the vehicle warranty.
Press to turn the rear window Do not stick anything to the rear
defogger on or off. window.
The rear window defogger turns off
automatically after about Remote Start Climate Control
10 minutes. If turned on again, it Operation (If Equipped):
runs for about five minutes before If equipped with remote start, the
turning off. At higher speeds, the climate control system may run
rear window defogger may stay on when the vehicle is started remotely.
continuously. The system uses the driver’s
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The solar sensor on top of the Air Vents Side Air Vents
instrument panel near the
windshield monitors the solar heat. Center Air Vents
The climate control system uses the
sensor information to adjust the
temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Move the thumbwheels (1) up or

down to open or close off the
Move the thumbwheels (1) left or airflow.
right to open or close off the airflow. Use the slider knobs (2) to change
Use the slider knobs (2) on the air the direction of the airflow.
vents to change the direction of the Operation Tips
airflow. . Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Keep the paths under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate Maintenance
the air inside the vehicle more
effectively. Passenger Compartment
. Use of non-GM approved hood Air Filter
deflectors can adversely affect The passenger compartment air
the performance of the system. filter reduces most of the pollen and
. Do not attach any devices to the dust from the air that may enter the
air vent louvers. This restricts vehicle. The filter will need to be
airflow and may cause damage replaced periodically. See
to the air vents. Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3.
Using the climate control system
without an air filter installed is not
recommended. Water or other
debris could enter the system and
result in leaks or noises. Always
install a new filter when removing
the old filter.
For more information on filter
replacement, see your dealer.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Retained Accessory
9-20 Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Operating Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-22
9-22
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-35
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Driver Assistance Systems

Parking over Things Driver Assistance
Driving Information Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Assistance Systems for
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Assistance Systems for
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission Active Emergency Braking
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Track Events and Competitive Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Side Blind Zone
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Brakes
Antilock Brake Lane Departure
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Fuel
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-30 California Fuel
Starting and Operating Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-55
Ignition Positions (Keyless Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Ignition Positions (Key
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
9-2 Driving and Operating
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

. Designate a front seat
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Filling a Portable Fuel distractions.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Towing
and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
General Towing
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Trailer Towing (Bi-Fuel) . . . . . . 9-61 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Trailer Towing (All except governments have enacted laws driving.
Bi-Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
Conversions and Add-Ons To avoid distracted driving, always
Add-On Electrical . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the Infotainment section for drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
more information on using that tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
system, including pairing and using time. Actually doing it is
a cell phone. { Warning reaction time.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
Defensive Driving dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive driving means “always perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
expect the unexpected.” The first judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
step in driving defensively is to wear a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
page 3-13. fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
. Assume that other road users drinking. include:
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
other drivers) are going to be you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
careless and make mistakes. of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready. with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the engine ever stops while the If the steering wheel is turned until it Steering in Emergencies
vehicle is being driven, brake reaches the end of its travel and is . There are some situations when
normally but do not pump the held against that position for an
steering around a problem may
brakes. Doing so could make the extended period of time, power
be more effective than braking.
pedal harder to push down. If the steering assist may be reduced.
engine stops, there will be some . Holding both sides of the
If the steering assist is used for an
power brake assist but it will be steering wheel allows you to turn
extended period of time, power
used when the brake is applied. 180 degrees without removing
assist may be reduced.
Once the power assist is used up, it a hand.
can take longer to stop and the Normal use of the power steering . The Antilock Brake System
brake pedal will be harder to push. assist should return when the
(ABS) allows steering while
system cools down.
braking.
Steering See specific vehicle steering
messages under Service Vehicle Off-Road Recovery
Electric Power Steering Messages on page 5-35. See your
The vehicle has electric power dealer if there is a problem.
steering. It does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance Curve Tips
is not required. . Take curves at a reasonable
If power steering assist is lost due speed.
to a system malfunction, the vehicle . Reduce speed before entering a
can be steered, but may require curve.
increased effort. . Maintain a reasonable steady
See your dealer if there is a speed through the curve.
problem. . Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The vehicle's right wheels can drop

. Steering or Cornering Skid — material on the road. Learn to
off the edge of a road onto the too much speed or steering in a recognize warning clues — such
shoulder while driving. Follow curve causes tires to slip and as enough water, ice, or packed
these tips: lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a
1. Ease off the accelerator and
. Acceleration Skid — too much mirrored surface — and slow
then, if there is nothing in the throttle causes the driving down when you have any doubt.
way, steer the vehicle so that it wheels to spin. . Try to avoid sudden steering,
straddles the edge of the Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
pavement. by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed
2. Turn the steering wheel about existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any
one-eighth of a turn, until the overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause
right front tire contacts the skids are always possible. the tires to slide.
pavement edge. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
3. Turn the steering wheel to go these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
straight down the roadway. . Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Track Events and
Loss of Control way you want the vehicle to go. Competitive Driving
The vehicle may straighten out. Racing, track testing, or competitive
Skidding Be ready for a second skid if it driving may affect the vehicle
There are three types of skids that occurs. warranty. See the warranty manual
correspond to the vehicle's three . Slow down and adjust your before using the vehicle for racing
control systems: driving according to weather or other competitive driving.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not conditions. Stopping distance
rolling. can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
{ Caution { Caution { Warning

If the vehicle is used for track During a first time track or racing Wet brakes can cause crashes.
events and competitive driving, event, high rear axle They might not work as well in a
the engine may use more oil than temperatures can occur. Damage quick stop and could cause
it would with normal use. Low oil could be caused to the rear axle pulling to one side. You could
levels can damage the engine. and would not be covered by the lose control of the vehicle.
Check the oil level often and vehicle warranty. Do not drive as After driving through a large
maintain the proper level. See long or as fast the first time the puddle of water or a car/vehicle
Engine Oil on page 10-8. vehicle is driven on the track or wash, lightly apply the brake
raced. pedal until the brakes work
For the 2.5L L4 Engine Only: Add normally.
and keep the oil level at 1 L (1 qt) Driving on Wet Roads Flowing or rushing water creates
above the high mark when driving
under these conditions. For Rain and wet roads can reduce strong forces. Driving through
information on how to check and vehicle traction and affect your flowing water could cause the
add oil, see Engine Oil on ability to stop and accelerate. vehicle to be carried away. If this
page 10-8 Always drive slower in these types happens, you and other vehicle
of driving conditions and avoid occupants could drown. Do not
For the 3.6L Engine Only: Add and driving through large puddles and ignore police warnings and be
keep the oil level at 0.5 L (0.5 qt) deep‐standing or flowing water. very cautious about trying to drive
above the high mark when driving
through flowing water.
under these conditions. For
information on how to check and
add oil, see Engine Oil on
page 10-8.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
{ Warning
Hill and Mountain Roads
can build up under the vehicle's Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
tires so they actually ride on the Driving on steep hills or through or with the ignition off is
water. This can happen if the road is mountains is different than driving dangerous. This can cause
wet enough and you are going fast on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for overheating of the brakes and
enough. When the vehicle is driving in these conditions include: loss of steering. Always have the
hydroplaning, it has little or no . Keep the vehicle serviced and in engine running and the vehicle
contact with the road. good shape. in gear.
There is no hard and fast rule about . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
hydroplaning. The best advice is to tires, cooling system, and . Stay in your own lane. Do not
slow down when the road is wet. transmission. swing wide or cut across the
Other Rainy Weather Tips . Shift to a lower gear when going center of the road. Drive at
down steep or long hills. speeds that let you stay in your
Besides slowing down, other wet own lane.
weather driving tips include:
. Allow extra following distance.
{ Warning . Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
. Pass with caution. Using the brakes to slow the (stalled car, accident).
vehicle on a long downhill slope . Pay attention to special road
. Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. can cause brake overheating, can signs (falling rocks area, winding
reduce brake performance, and roads, long grades, passing or
. Keep the windshield washer fluid could result in a loss of braking. no-passing zones) and take
reservoir filled. Shift the transmission to a lower appropriate action.
. Have good tires with proper gear to let the engine assist the
tread depth. See Tires on brakes on a steep downhill slope.
page 10-38.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Tie a red cloth to an outside
Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when
mirror.
on dry pavement. See Antilock
Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 9-28.
Drive carefully when there is snow Allow greater following distance on { Warning
or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for Snow can trap engine exhaust
road, creating less traction or grip. slippery spots. Icy patches can
under the vehicle. This may
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32° occur on otherwise clear roads in
F) when freezing rain begins to fall, cause exhaust gases to get
shaded areas. The surface of a
resulting in even less traction. Avoid curve or an overpass can remain icy inside. Engine exhaust contains
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain when the surrounding roads are carbon monoxide (CO) which
until roads can be treated with salt clear. Avoid sudden steering cannot be seen or smelled. It can
or sand. maneuvers and braking while cause unconsciousness and even
on ice. death.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so Turn off cruise control on slippery If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
traction is not lost. Accelerating too surfaces. . Clear away snow from around
quickly causes the wheels to spin the base of your vehicle,
and makes the surface under the Blizzard Conditions
especially any that is blocking
tires slick, so there is even less Being stuck in snow can be a the exhaust pipe.
traction. serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
. Check again from time to
Traction Control should be turned time to be sure snow does
on. See Traction Control/Electronic If possible, use Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside not collect there.
Assistance Program on page 13-5. . Open a window about 5 cm
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) To get help and keep everyone in (2 in) on the side of the
improves vehicle stability during the vehicle safe: vehicle that is away from the
hard stops on slippery roads, but wind to bring in fresh air.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If it takes some time for help to

Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run Warning (Continued)
the engine, push the accelerator
. Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs vehicle can overheat, causing an
or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This engine compartment fire or other
panel. keeps the battery charged to restart damage. Spin the wheels as little
. Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help as possible and avoid going
system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little above 56 km/h (35 mph).
circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
vehicle and set the fan speed Rocking the Vehicle to Get
to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck it Out
“Climate Control Systems”.
Slowly and cautiously spin the Turn the steering wheel left and
For more information about wheels to free the vehicle when right to clear the area around the
carbon monoxide, see Engine stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. front wheels. Turn off any traction
Exhaust on page 9-24. system. Shift back and forth
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the between R (Reverse) and a low
To save fuel, run the engine for only traction system off and use the forward gear, spinning the wheels
short periods as needed to warm rocking method. See Traction as little as possible. To prevent
the vehicle and then shut the engine Control/Electronic Stability Control transmission wear, wait until the
off and close the window most of on page 9-31. wheels stop spinning before shifting
the way to save heat. Repeat this gears. Release the accelerator
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
{ Warning pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
cold. Moving about to keep warm If the vehicle's tires spin at high when the transmission is in gear.
also helps. speed, they can explode, and you Slowly spinning the wheels in the
or others could be injured. The forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
(Continued) free the vehicle. If that does not get
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
the vehicle out after a few tries, it Tire and Loading Information
might need to be towed out. If the Warning (Continued) Label
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on (GVWR), or either the
page 10-70. maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Load Limits This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
It is very important to know how vehicle handles. This could
much weight the vehicle can cause loss of control and a
carry. This weight is called the crash. Overloading can also
vehicle capacity weight and shorten the life of the vehicle.
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Label Example
Two labels on the vehicle show
how much weight it may 1. Number of Occupant Seating
properly carry, the Tire and Positions
Loading Information label and 2. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
the Certification label. Weight
3. Size of the Original
{ Warning Equipment Tires
4. Recommended Cold Tire
Do not load the vehicle any Inflation Pressure
heavier than the Gross A vehicle-specific Tire and
Vehicle Weight Rating Loading Information label is
(Continued) attached to the vehicle's center
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and “Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity is
Loading Information label shows Load Limit– 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
the number of occupant seating 1. Locate the statement "The = 650 lbs.)
positions (1), and the maximum combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
vehicle capacity weight (2) in occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
kilograms and pounds. never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
The Tire and Loading XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s That weight may not safely
Information label also shows the placard. exceed the available cargo
tire size of the original 2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
equipment tires (3) and the weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
recommended cold tire inflation passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing
pressures (4). For more in your vehicle. a trailer, load from your trailer
information on tires and inflation will be transferred to your
see Tires on page 10-38 and 3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and vehicle. Consult this manual
Tire Pressure on page 10-45. to determine how this
passengers from XXX kg or
There is also important loading reduces the available cargo
XXX lbs.
information on the Certification and luggage load capacity of
label. It tells you the Gross 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.”
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing (Bi-Fuel) on
and the Gross Axle Weight page 9-61 or Trailer Towing (All
Rating (GAWR) for the front and For example, if the "XXX"
amount equals 1400 lbs. and except Bi-Fuel) on page 9-61 for
rear axle. See “Certification important information on towing
Label” later in this section. there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, a trailer, towing safety rules, and
the amount of available cargo trailering tips.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight

for Example 1 = 453 kg for Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight 2. Subtract Occupant Weight 2. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
136 kg (300 lbs). 340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
(700 lbs). Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
seating positions. The combined fuel, and cargo. Never exceed If you put things inside the
weight of the driver, passengers, the GVWR for the vehicle, or the vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
and cargo should never exceed Gross Axle Weight Rating packages, or anything
the vehicle's capacity weight. (GAWR) for either the front or else — they will go as fast as the
rear axle. vehicle goes. If you have to stop
Certification Label
And, if there is a heavy load, it or turn quickly, or if there is a
should be spread out. See crash, they will keep going.
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this { Warning
section. Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
{ Warning sudden stop or turn, or in a
Do not load the vehicle any crash.
heavier than the Gross . Put things in the cargo
Vehicle Weight Rating area of the vehicle. In the
(GVWR), or either the cargo area, put them as
Label Example maximum front or rear Gross far forward as possible.
A vehicle-specific Certification Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Try to spread the weight
label is attached to the vehicle's This can cause systems to evenly.
center pillar (B-pillar). The label break and change the way the (Continued)
tells the gross weight capacity of vehicle handles. This could
the vehicle, called the Gross cause loss of control and a
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). crash. Overloading can also
The GVWR includes the weight shorten the life of the vehicle.
of the vehicle, all occupants,
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued) Starting and Caution (Continued)

Operating
. Never stack heavier breaking-in guideline every
things, like suitcases, time you get new brake
New Vehicle Break-In linings.
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above Following break-in, engine speed
the tops of the seats. { Caution and load can be gradually
The vehicle does not need an increased.
. Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint elaborate break-in. But it will
in the vehicle. perform better in the long run if Ignition Positions
you follow these guidelines:
. Secure loose items in the (Keyless Access)
. Do not drive at any one
vehicle. constant speed, fast or slow,
. Do not leave a seat folded for the first 805 km (500 mi).
down unless needed. Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
The vehicle may have an electronic If the vehicle is in P (Park), the 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
keyless ignition with pushbutton ignition will turn off, and Retained This can be done while the
start. Accessory Power (RAP) will remain vehicle is moving. After shifting
Pressing the button cycles it through active. See Retained Accessory to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY, Power (RAP) on page 9-22. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the safe location.
Engine/OFF. ignition will return to ACC/ 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
The transmitter must be in the ACCESSORY and display the to P (Park), and turn the ignition
vehicle for the system to operate. message SHIFT TO PARK in the to OFF. On vehicles with an
If the pushbutton start is not Driver Information Center (DIC). automatic transmission, the shift
working, the vehicle may be near a See Transmission Messages on lever must be in P (Park) to turn
strong radio antenna signal causing page 5-36. When the vehicle is the ignition switch to the OFF
interference to the Keyless Access shifted into P (Park), the ignition position.
system. See Remote Keyless Entry system will switch to OFF. 4. Set the parking brake. See
(RKE) System Operation on Do not turn the engine off when the Parking Brake on page 9-29.
page 2-3. vehicle is moving. This will cause a
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
{ Warning
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must the airbags. Turning off the vehicle while
be applied. If the vehicle must be shut off in an moving may cause loss of power
emergency: assist in the brake and steering
Stopping the Engine/LOCK/ systems and disable the airbags.
OFF (No Indicator Lights): When 1. Brake using a firm and steady While driving, only shut the
the vehicle is stopped, press the pressure. Do not pump the
vehicle off in an emergency.
ENGINE START/STOP button once brakes repeatedly. This may
to turn the engine off. deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, See Starting the Engine on Ignition Positions (Key
and must be shut off while driving, page 9-18. The ignition will then
press and hold the ENGINE START/ remain in ON/RUN.
Access)
STOP button for longer than
two seconds, or press twice in Service Only Mode
five seconds. This power mode is available for
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber service and diagnostics, and to
Indicator Light): This mode allows verify the proper operation of the
some electrical accessories to be malfunction indicator lamp as may
used when the engine is off. be required for emission inspection
purposes. With the vehicle off, and
With the ignition off, pressing the the brake pedal not applied,
button one time without the brake pressing and holding the button for
pedal applied will place the ignition more than five seconds will place
system in ACC/ACCESSORY. the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
The ignition will switch from ACC/ The instruments and audio systems
ACCESSORY to OFF after will operate as they do in ON/RUN, The ignition switch has four different
five minutes to prevent battery but the vehicle will not be able to be positions.
rundown. driven. The engine will not start in
Service Only Mode. Press the
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator button again to turn the vehicle off. { Caution
Light): This mode is for driving and
starting. With the ignition off, and Using a tool to force the key to
the brake pedal applied, pressing turn in the ignition could cause
the button once will place the damage to the switch or break the
ignition system in ON/RUN/START. key. Use the correct key, make
Once engine cranking begins, sure it is all the way in, and turn it
release the button. Engine cranking (Continued)
will continue until the engine starts.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See
Caution (Continued) vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 9-29.
loss of power assist in the brake
only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see
and steering systems, and disable
the airbags.
{ Warning
your dealer. Turning off the vehicle while
If the vehicle must be shut off in an
emergency: moving may cause loss of power
The key must be fully extended to assist in the brake and steering
start the vehicle. 1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags.
pressure. Do not pump the While driving, only shut the
To shift out of P (Park), turn the brakes repeatedly. This may
ignition to ON/RUN and apply the vehicle off in an emergency.
deplete power assist, requiring
brake pedal. increased brake pedal force.
1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/ 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/ vehicle is moving. After shifting turn the ignition to ACC/
OFF to turn the engine off. Retained to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY.
Accessory Power (RAP) will remain brakes and steer the vehicle to a 2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
active. See Retained Accessory safe location. position provides power to some of
Power (RAP) on page 9-22. the electrical accessories. It unlocks
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
This is the only position from which to P (Park), and turn the ignition the ignition. To move the key from
the key can be removed. This locks to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
the ignition and automatic an automatic transmission, the the shift lever must be in P (Park).
transmission. shift lever must be in P (Park) to 3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
turn the ignition switch to the stays in this position when the
LOCK/OFF position. engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
ventilation fan and 12-volt power Starting the Engine Starting Procedure (Key Access)
outlets, as well as to display some 1. With your foot off the accelerator
warning and indicator lights. This Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). To restart the engine pedal, turn the ignition key to
position can also be used for START. When the engine starts,
service and diagnostics, and to when the vehicle is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. let go of the key. The idle speed
verify the proper operation of the will go down as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp as may warms. Do not race the engine
be required for emission inspection { Caution immediately after starting it.
purposes. The transmission is also Allow the oil to warm up and
unlocked in this position. Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
lubricate all moving parts.
vehicle is moving. If you do, you
The battery could be drained if the
could damage the transmission.
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine Shift to P (Park) only when the { Caution
off. The vehicle might not restart if vehicle is stopped.
Cranking the engine for long
the battery is allowed to drain for an periods of time, by returning the
extended period of time. ignition to the START position
4 (START): This position starts the { Caution immediately after cranking has
engine. When the engine starts, ended, can overheat and damage
release the key. The ignition switch If you add electrical parts or the cranking motor, and drain the
will return to ON/RUN for normal accessories, you could change battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
driving. the way the engine operates. Any between each try, to let the
resulting damage would not be cranking motor cool down.
A warning tone sounds when the
driver door is opened when the
ignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORY See Add-On Electrical Equipment
2. If the engine does not start after
and the key is in the ignition. If the on page 9-63.
five to 10 seconds, especially in
ignition becomes difficult to turn, very cold weather (below −18°C
see Keys on page 2-1. or 0°F), it could be flooded with
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
too much gasoline. Push the Starting Procedure (Keyless

accelerator pedal all the way to Access) { Caution
the floor and hold it there as you 1. With the Keyless Access
hold the key in START for a Cranking the engine for long
system, the Remote Keyless periods of time, by returning the
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at Entry (RKE) transmitter must be
least 15 seconds between each ignition to the START position
in the vehicle. Press the immediately after cranking has
try, to allow the cranking motor ENGINE START/STOP button
to cool. When the engine starts, ended, can overheat and damage
with the brake pedal applied. the cranking motor, and drain the
let go of the key and accelerator. When the engine begins
If the vehicle starts briefly but battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
cranking, let go of the button.
then stops again, repeat the between each try, to let the
procedure. This clears the extra The idle speed will go down as cranking motor cool down.
gasoline from the engine. Do not the engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately race the engine immediately
after starting it. 2. If the engine does not start after
after starting it. Operate the
five to 10 seconds, especially in
engine and transmission gently If the RKE transmitter is not in very cold weather (below −18°C
until the oil warms up and the vehicle, if there is or 0°F), it could be flooded with
lubricates all moving parts. interference, or the RKE battery too much gasoline. Try pushing
is low, a Driver Information the accelerator pedal all the way
Center (DIC) message will to the floor and holding it there
display. See Driver Information as you press the ENGINE
Center (DIC) on page 5-26. START/STOP button, for up to a
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each
try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key or button,
and the accelerator. If the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
vehicle starts briefly but then If equipped with the 2.5L L4 Engine,
. The battery charge is low.
stops again, do the same thing. the vehicle has a fuel saving stop/ . The interior comfort level has not
This clears the extra gasoline start system to shut off the engine to reached the required level for
from the engine. Do not race the help conserve fuel. the climate control system or
engine immediately after starting defog settings. Use the eco
it. Operate the engine and Auto Engine Stop/Start
(green indicator on) air
transmission gently until the oil When the brakes are applied and conditioning mode for better
warms up and lubricates all the vehicle is at a complete stop, efficiency. See Dual Automatic
moving parts. the engine may turn off. When Climate Control System on
stopped, the tachometer displays page 8-3.
Stop/Start System AUTO STOP. See Tachometer on
page 5-12. When the brake pedal is
. The auto stop time is greater
{ Warning released or the accelerator pedal than two minutes.
pushed, the engine will restart.
Exiting the vehicle without first Engine Heater
shifting into P (Park) may cause Auto stop may be deactivated if:
The engine coolant heater,
the vehicle to move. You or others . A minimum vehicle speed is not if equipped, can help in cold
may be injured. Because the reached. weather conditions at or below −18°
vehicle has the auto engine stop/ . The engine or transmission is C (0°F) for easier starting and better
start feature, the vehicle's engine not at the required operating fuel economy during engine
might seem to be shut off; temperature. warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater
however, once the brake pedal is at least four hours before starting
. The outside temperature is not
released, the engine will start up the vehicle. An internal thermostat
in the required operating range,
again. in the plug end of the cord will
typically below -10°C (14°F) or
Shift to P (Park) and turn the above 50°C (122°F). prevent engine coolant heater
operation at temperatures above
ignition to LOCK/OFF, before . The shift lever is in any gear −18°C (0°F).
exiting the vehicle. other than D (Drive).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
To Use the Engine Coolant

Heater { Warning Warning (Continued)
1. Turn off the engine. Improper use of the heater cord overheat and cause a fire,
or an extension cord can damage property damage, electric
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
the cord and may result in shock, and injury.
electrical cord. The electrical
cord is on the driver side of the overheating and fire. . Do not operate the vehicle
engine compartment, between . Plug the cord into a with the heater cord
the fender and the engine three-prong electrical utility permanently attached to the
compartment fuse block. receptacle that is protected vehicle. Possible heater cord
by a ground fault detection and thermostat damage could
Check the heater cord for
function. An ungrounded occur.
damage. If it is damaged, do not
use it. See your dealer for a outlet could cause an electric . While in use, do not let the
replacement. Inspect the cord for shock. heater cord touch vehicle
damage yearly . Use a weatherproof, parts or sharp edges. Never
heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated close the hood on the
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
extension cord if needed. heater cord.
110-volt AC outlet.
Failure to use the . Before starting the vehicle,
recommended extension cord unplug the cord, reattach the
in good operating condition, cover to the plug, and
or using a damaged heater or securely fasten the cord.
extension cord, could make it Keep the cord away from any
(Continued) moving parts.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
4. Before starting the engine, be All these features operate when the Leaving the Vehicle with the
sure to unplug and store the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ Engine Running
cord as it was before to keep it ACCESSORY.
away from moving engine parts.
Shifting Into Park { Warning
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on 1. Hold the brake pedal down and It can be dangerous to leave the
several factors. Ask a dealer in the set the parking brake. See vehicle with the engine running.
area where you will be parking the Parking Brake on page 9-29. It could overheat and catch fire.
vehicle for the best advice on this.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) It is dangerous to get out of the
by holding in the button on the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
Retained Accessory shift lever and pushing the shift in P (Park) with the parking brake
Power (RAP) lever all the way toward the front firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
These vehicle accessories can be of the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle when the
used for up to 10 minutes after the 3. Turn the ignition key to engine is running. If you have left
engine is turned off: LOCK/OFF. the engine running, the vehicle
. Audio System 4. If equipped, remove the key and can move suddenly. You or others
. take it with you. If you can leave could be injured. To be sure the
Power Windows
the vehicle with the ignition key vehicle will not move, even when
. Sunroof (if equipped) in your hand, the vehicle is in you are on fairly level ground,
These features continue to work up P (Park). always set the parking brake and
to 10 minutes after the ignition is move the shift lever to P (Park).
turned to LOCK/OFF. See Shifting Into Park on
page 9-22.
The power windows and sunroof will
work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the
driver door is opened.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If you have to leave the vehicle with If torque lock does occur, your The shift lock release is always
the engine running, be sure the vehicle may need to be pushed functional except in the case of an
vehicle is in P (Park) and the uphill by another vehicle to relieve uncharged or low voltage (less than
parking brake is firmly set before the parking pawl pressure, so you 9-volt) battery.
you leave it. After you have moved can shift out of P (Park). If the vehicle has an uncharged
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the If you are towing a trailer and battery or a battery with low voltage,
regular brake pedal down. Then, parking on a hill, see Driving try charging or jump starting the
see if you can move the shift lever Characteristics and Towing Tips on battery. See Jump Starting on
away from P (Park) without first page 9-58. page 10-66.
pressing the button.
To shift out of P (Park):
If you can, it means that the shift Shifting out of Park
lever was not fully locked in 1. Apply the brake pedal.
P (Park). This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system. 2. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.
Torque Lock The shift lock release is 3. Press the shift lever button.
Torque lock is when the weight of designed to:
4. Move the shift lever to the
the vehicle puts too much force on . Prevent ignition key removal (if desired position.
the parking pawl in the equipped) unless the shift lever
If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
transmission. This happens when is in P (Park) with the shift lever
parking on a hill and shifting the button fully released. 1. Fully release the shift lever
transmission into P (Park) is not button.
. Prevent movement of the shift
done properly, then it is difficult to lever out of P (Park), unless the 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
shift out of P (Park). To prevent ignition is in ON/RUN and the press the shift lever button
torque lock, set the parking brake brake pedal is applied. again.
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see “Shifting Into Park” 3. Move the shift lever to the
listed previously. desired position.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If you are still having a problem Engine Exhaust

shifting, see your dealer. Warning (Continued)
Parking over Things { Warning . There are holes or openings

in the vehicle body from
That Burn Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
{ Warning seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
Things that can burn could touch even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
hot exhaust parts under the coming into the vehicle:
vehicle and ignite. Do not park Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
over papers, leaves, dry grass, . The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
or other things that can burn. with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged, Running the Vehicle
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the vehicle is left with the engine Automatic

running, follow the proper steps to { Warning
be sure the vehicle will not move. Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-22
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-24. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
If parking on a hill and pulling a firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9-58. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9-22.
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is fully in
easily. P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. You must fully apply the
brake pedal then press the shift
lever button before you can shift
from P (Park) while the ignition key
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral): In this position, the

of P (Park), ease pressure on the engine does not connect with the Caution (Continued)
shift lever and push the shift lever wheels. To restart the engine when
all the way into P (Park) as you the vehicle is already moving, use the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
maintain brake application. Then N (Neutral) only. engine is not running at high
move the shift lever into another speed when shifting the vehicle.
gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9-23.
{ Warning
D (Drive): This position is for
R (Reverse): Use this gear to Shifting into a drive gear while the normal driving. It provides the best
back up. engine is running at high speed is fuel economy. If you need more
dangerous. Unless your foot is power for passing, and you are:
{ Caution firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
. Accelerating slowly or
maintaining a constant speed,
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the You could lose control and hit push the accelerator pedal about
vehicle is moving forward could people or objects. Do not shift halfway down.
damage the transmission. The into a drive gear while the engine .
is running at high speed. Accelerating quickly or passing,
repairs would not be covered by push the accelerator all the
the vehicle warranty. Shift to way down.
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
M (Manual Mode): This position
is stopped.
{ Caution allows you to change gears similar
to a manual transmission. If the
To rock the vehicle back and forth to Shifting out of P (Park) or vehicle has this feature, see Manual
get out of snow, ice, or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine Mode on page 9-27.
damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9. damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Manual Mode While using the DSC feature the With the DSC feature, the vehicle
transmission will have firmer shifting can be set to pull away in
Driver Shift Control (DSC) and sportier performance. You can 2 (Second) gear.
To use this feature (if equipped): use this for sport driving or when 1. Move the shift lever from
climbing hills to stay in gear longer D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode).
1. Move the shift lever from or to downshift for more power or
D (Drive) rearward to engine braking. 2. With the vehicle stopped, press
M (Manual Mode). the + (plus) end of the button to
The transmission will only allow you select 2 (Second) gear. The
While driving in Manual Mode, to shift into gears appropriate for the
the transmission will remain in vehicle will start from a stop
vehicle speed and engine position in 2 (Second) gear.
the driver selected gear. When revolutions per minute (rpm):
coming to a stop in the manual 3. Once moving, select the desired
position, the vehicle will
. The transmission will not allow drive gear.
automatically shift into shifting to the next higher gear if
1 (First) gear. the vehicle speed or engine rpm
is too low.
2. Using the button on the shift .
lever, press the + (plus) end of The transmission will not allow
the button to upshift, or press shifting to the next lower gear if
the − (minus) end of the button the vehicle speed or engine rpm
to downshift. is too high.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) Second Gear Start Feature

in the instrument cluster will change When accelerating the vehicle from
from the currently displayed a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
message to the letter “M,” for you may want to shift into
Manual position, and a number 2 (Second) gear. A higher gear
indicating the requested gear. allows you to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
System (ABS) computer senses the wheels are Using ABS
slowing down. If one of the wheels Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
is about to stop rolling, the computer the brake pedal down firmly and let
electronic braking system that helps
will separately work the brakes at ABS work. You may hear the ABS
prevent a braking skid.
each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
When the vehicle begins to drive the brake pedal pulsate. This is
ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself. normal.
to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
might be heard while this test is
you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be ABS allows you to steer and brake
braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves at the same time. In many
a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-21.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Parking Brake Light on page 5-21. There are also light does not come on, or keeps
parking brake-related Driver flashing, have the vehicle serviced.
Information Center (DIC) messages. Do not drive the vehicle if the red
See Brake System Messages on parking brake status light is flashing.
page 5-29. In case of insufficient See your dealer. See Electric
electrical power, the EPB cannot be Parking Brake Light on page 5-20.
applied or released. If the amber parking brake warning
Before leaving the vehicle, check light is on, lift up on the EPB switch
the red parking brake status light to and hold it up. Continue to hold the
ensure that the parking brake is switch until the red parking brake
applied. status light remains on. If the amber
parking brake warning light remains
EPB Apply on, see your dealer.
To apply the EPB: If the EPB is applied while the
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) 1. Be sure the vehicle is at a vehicle is moving, the vehicle will
switch is on the left side of the complete stop. decelerate as long as the switch is
instrument panel. The EPB can held up. If the switch is held up until
2. Lift up the EPB switch
always be activated, even if the the vehicle comes to a stop, the
momentarily.
ignition is off. To prevent draining EPB will remain applied.
the battery, avoid repeated cycles of The red parking brake status light
The vehicle may automatically apply
the EPB when the engine is not will flash and then stay on once the
the EPB in some situations when
running. EPB is fully applied. If the red
the vehicle is not moving. This is
parking brake status light flashes
The system has a red parking brake normal, and is done to periodically
continuously, then the EPB is only
status light and an amber parking check the correct operation of the
partially applied or there is a
brake warning light. See Electric EPB system.
problem with the EPB. A DIC
Parking Brake Light on page 5-20 message will display. Release the
and Service Electric Parking Brake EPB and try to apply it again. If the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear speed in emergency driving

wheels should be blocked to { Caution conditions. This feature uses the
prevent vehicle movement. stability system hydraulic brake
Driving with the parking brake on control module to supplement the
EPB Release can overheat the brake system power brake system under
To release the EPB: and cause premature wear or conditions where the driver has
damage to brake system parts. quickly and forcefully applied the
1. Place the ignition in the ACC/ Make sure that the parking brake brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN is fully released and the brake stop or slow down the vehicle. The
position. warning light is off before driving. stability system hydraulic brake
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. control module increases brake
3. Push down momentarily on the pressure at each corner of the
Automatic EPB Release
EPB switch. vehicle until the ABS activates.
The EPB will automatically release if Minor brake pedal pulsation or
The EPB is released when the red the vehicle is running, placed into pedal movement during this time is
parking brake status light is off. gear, and an attempt is made to normal and the driver should
If the amber parking brake warning drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration continue to apply the brake pedal as
light is on, release the EPB by when the EPB is applied, to the driving situation dictates. The
pushing down on the EPB switch preserve parking brake lining life. Brake Assist feature will
and holding it down. Continue to If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle automatically disengage when the
hold the switch until the red parking is pulling a trailer, see Driving brake pedal is released or brake
brake status light is off. If either light Characteristics and Towing Tips on pedal pressure is quickly
stays on after release is attempted, page 9-58. decreased.
see your dealer.
Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Brake Assist feature is Some vehicles have a Hill Start
designed to assist the driver in Assist (HSA) feature, which may be
stopping or decreasing vehicle useful when the vehicle is stopped
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
on a grade. This feature is designed Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the
to temporarily prevent the vehicle driver in keeping the vehicle on the
from rolling, either forward or intended path.
rearward, during vehicle drive off. Traction Control/
If cruise control is being used and
After the driver completely stops Electronic Stability traction control or StabiliTrak begins
and holds the vehicle in a complete Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
standstill on a grade, HSA will be disengage. Cruise control may be
automatically activated. During the System Operation turned back on when road
transition period between when the conditions allow.
The vehicle has a Traction Control
driver releases the brake pedal and
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an Both systems come on
starts to accelerate to drive off on a
electronic stability control system. automatically when the vehicle is
grade, HSA holds the braking
These systems help limit wheel slip started and begins to move. The
pressure to ensure that there is no
and assist the driver in maintaining systems may be heard or felt while
rolling. The brakes will automatically
control, especially on slippery road they are operating or while
release within a two-second window
conditions. performing diagnostic checks. This
of releasing the brake pedal, and
the vehicle may begin to roll. It will TCS activates if it senses that any is normal and does not mean there
not activate if the vehicle is in a of the drive wheels are spinning or is a problem with the vehicle.
drive gear and facing downhill or if beginning to lose traction. When this It is recommended to leave both
the vehicle is facing uphill and in happens, TCS applies the brakes to systems on for normal driving
R (Reverse). the spinning wheels and reduces conditions, but it may be necessary
engine power to limit wheel spin. to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets
HSA will activate on Stop/Start
vehicles while in gear and facing StabiliTrak activates when the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
down hill to assist in allowing a vehicle senses a difference between See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
smooth auto start. the intended path and the direction page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems
the vehicle is actually traveling. Off and On” later in this section.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If d comes on and stays on:

{ Caution
1. Stop the vehicle.
Do not repeatedly brake or
2. Turn the engine off and wait
accelerate heavily when TCS is
15 seconds.
off. The vehicle driveline could be
3. Start the engine. damaged.
The indicator light for both systems
is in the instrument cluster. This Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
light will: and stays on, the vehicle may need To turn off only TCS, press and
. Flash when TCS is limiting
more time to diagnose the problem. release the g button. The Traction
If the condition persists, see your
wheel spin. Off Light i displays in the
dealer.
. Flash when StabiliTrak is instrument cluster. To turn TCS on
activated. Turning the Systems Off again, press and release the g
and On button. The Traction Off Light i
. Turn on and stay on when either
system is not working. displayed in the instrument cluster
will turn off.
If either system fails to turn on or to
activate, a message displays in the If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
Driver Information Center (DIC), and the g button is pressed, the system
d comes on and stays on to will not turn off until the wheels stop
indicate that the system is inactive spinning.
and is not assisting the driver in The button for TCS and StabiliTrak
maintaining control. The vehicle is To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
is on the center console, behind the press and hold the g button until
safe to drive, but driving should be shift lever.
adjusted accordingly. the Traction Off Light i and
StabiliTrak Off Light g come on and
stay on in the instrument cluster. To
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
turn TCS and StabiliTrak on again, Cruise Control happens, the cruise control will
press and release the g button. The automatically disengage. See
With cruise control, you can Traction Control/Electronic Stability
Traction Off Light i and StabiliTrak maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Control on page 9-31. If a collision
Off Light g in the instrument cluster (25 mph) or more without keeping alert occurs when cruise control is
turn off. your foot on the accelerator. Cruise activated, cruise control is
Adding accessories can affect the control does not work at speeds disengaged. See Forward Collision
vehicle performance. See below about 40 km/h (25 mph). Alert (FCA) System on page 9-46.
Accessories and Modifications on When road conditions allow you to
page 10-3. { Warning safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.
Cruise control can be dangerous If the brakes are applied, the cruise
where you cannot drive safely at control disengages.
a steady speed. Do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
If equipped with the Traction Control

System (TCS), the system may
begin to limit wheel spin while you
are using cruise control. If this
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
5 (On/Off): Press to turn cruise 2. Get up to the desired speed. Increasing Speed While Using
control on or off. A white indicator 3. Press and release SET– . Cruise Control
comes on in the instrument cluster If the cruise control system is
when cruise is on. 4. Remove foot from the
accelerator. already activated:
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): If . Press and hold +RES until the
there is a set speed in memory, The cruise control indicator on the
instrument cluster turns green after desired speed is reached, then
press briefly to resume to that release it.
speed or press and hold to the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed. See Instrument . To increase vehicle speed in
accelerate. If cruise control is
already active, use to increase Cluster on page 5-9. small increments, briefly press
vehicle speed. +RES. For each press, the
Resuming a Set Speed vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
SET–: Press briefly to set the If the cruise control is set at a (1 mph) faster.
speed and activate cruise control. desired speed and then the brakes
If cruise control is already active, The speedometer reading can be
are applied or * is pressed, the displayed in either English or metric
use to decrease vehicle speed.
cruise control is disengaged without units. See Instrument Cluster on
* (Cancel): Press to disengage erasing the set speed from memory. page 5-9. The increment value used
cruise control without erasing the depends on the units displayed.
Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h
selected set speed.
(25 mph) or greater, briefly press Reducing Speed While Using
Setting Cruise Control +RES. The vehicle returns to the Cruise Control
previous set speed.
If 5 is on when not in use, SET− or If the cruise control system is
+RES could get pressed and go into already activated:
cruise when not desired. Keep 5 . Press and hold SET– until the
off when cruise is not being used. desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise
control system on.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. To decrease the vehicle speed in Using Cruise Control on Hills Erasing Speed Memory
smaller increments, briefly press
SET−. For each press, the How well the cruise control works The cruise control set speed is
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h on hills depends upon the vehicle erased from memory if 5 is pressed
(1 mph) slower. speed, the load, and the steepness or the ignition is turned off.
of the hills. When going up steep
The speedometer reading can be hills, you might have to step on the
displayed in either English or metric accelerator pedal to maintain your
Adaptive Cruise Control
units. See Instrument Cluster on speed. When going downhill, you If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control
page 5-9. The increment value used might have to brake or shift to a (ACC) allows the driver to select the
depends on the units displayed. lower gear to keep your speed cruise control set speed and
Passing Another Vehicle While down. If the brake pedal is applied, following gap. Read this entire
Using Cruise Control the cruise control will disengage. section before using this system.
The following gap is the following
Use the accelerator pedal to Ending Cruise Control time between your vehicle and a
increase vehicle speed. When you There are four ways to end cruise vehicle detected directly ahead in
take your foot off the pedal, the control: your path moving in the same
vehicle will slow down to the direction. If no vehicle is detected in
previous set cruise speed. While
. To disengage cruise control,
your path, ACC works like regular
pressing the accelerator pedal or step lightly on the brake pedal.
cruise control. ACC uses a radar
shortly following the release to . Press the *. sensor. See Radio Frequency
override cruise control, briefly Statement on page 13-12.
pressing the SET− button will result . Shift the transmission to
in cruise control set to the current N (Neutral). If a vehicle is detected in your path,
vehicle speed. ACC can apply acceleration or
. To turn off the cruise control, limited, moderate braking to
press 5. maintain the selected following gap.
To disengage ACC, apply the brake.
If ACC is controlling your vehicle
speed when the Traction Control
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak®

System activates, the ACC may { Warning
automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow ACC to be safely Adaptive Cruise Control will not
used, the ACC can be turned back detect or brake for children,
on. If TCS or StabiliTrak have been pedestrians, animals, or other
disabled, the ACC will not engage. objects.
See Traction Control/Electronic Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Stability Control on page 9-31. Control when:
. On winding and hilly roads or
{ Warning when the sensors are
ACC has limited braking ability blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
The system may not detect a
and may not have time to slow
vehicle ahead. Keep the ] (On/Off): Press to turn the
the vehicle down enough to avoid system on or off. A white Adaptive
entire front of the vehicle
a collision with another vehicle Cruise Control indicator comes on.
clean.
you are following. This can occur +RES (Resume/Accelerate):
when vehicles suddenly slow or . Visibility is low, such as in
fog, rain, or snow conditions. Press briefly to resume the previous
stop ahead, or enter your lane. set speed or hold to accelerate.
Also see “Alerting the Driver” in Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is limited under If ACC is already active, use to
this section. Complete attention is increase vehicle speed.
always required while driving and these conditions.
you should be ready to take . On slippery roads where fast SET– (Set/Coast): Press briefly to
changes in tire traction can set the speed and activate ACC.
action and apply the brakes. See
cause excessive wheel slip. If ACC is already active, use to
Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
decrease vehicle speed.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
* (Cancel): Press to disengage 4. Remove foot from the To begin using ACC again, press
ACC without erasing the selected accelerator. the +RES button. The vehicle
set speed. After ACC is set, it may immediately returns to the previous set speed.
GAP (Follow Distance Gap): apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead Increasing Speed While ACC is at
Press to select a following gap time is closer than the selected a Set Speed
(or distance) setting for ACC of Far, following gap.
If ACC is already activated, do one
Medium, or Near. of the following:
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control . Use the accelerator to get to the
If the cruise system is on but not in higher speed. Press the SET–
use, it could get set and go into button. Release the control and
cruise when not desired. Keep the the accelerator pedal. The
cruise control button off when cruise vehicle will now cruise at the
is not being used. The ACC indicator displays on the higher speed.
Select the set speed desired for instrument cluster. When ACC is When the accelerator pedal is
cruise. This is the vehicle speed active, the indicator turns green. pressed, ACC will not brake
when no vehicle is detected in Be mindful of speed limits, because it is overridden.
its path. surrounding traffic speeds, and A warning message will appear
weather conditions when selecting on the Driver Information Center
ACC will not set or resume at a (DIC). See Cruise Control
speed less than 25 km/h (16 mph). the set speed.
Messages on page 5-30.
To set ACC: Resuming a Set Speed . Press and hold the +RES button
1. Press ]. If the ACC is set at a desired speed until the desired set speed
and then the brakes are applied, appears on the display, then
2. Get up to the desired speed. ACC is disengaged without erasing release it.
3. Press and release SET–. the set speed from memory.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. To increase vehicle speed in . Press and hold the SET– button Subsequent presses cycle the gap
small increments, briefly press until the desired lower speed is button through three settings: Far,
+RES. For each press the reached, then release it. Medium, or Near. The gap setting
vehicle goes 5 km/h (1 mph) . To decrease the vehicle speed in will be maintained until it is
faster. smaller increments, briefly press changed.
When it is determined that there is SET–. For each press, the Since each gap setting corresponds
no vehicle ahead or the vehicle is vehicle goes about 5 km/h to a following time (Far, Medium,
beyond the selected following gap, (1 mph) slower. or Near), the following distance will
then the vehicle speed will increase The speedometer reading can be vary based on vehicle speed. The
to the set speed. displayed in either English or metric faster the vehicle speed, the further
The speedometer reading can be units. See Instrument Cluster on back your vehicle will follow a
displayed in either English or metric page 5-9. The increment value used vehicle detected ahead. Consider
units. See Instrument Cluster on depends on the units displayed. traffic and weather conditions when
page 5-9. The increment value used selecting the following gap. The
depends on the units displayed. Selecting the Follow Distance Gap range of selectable gaps may not be
When a slower moving vehicle is appropriate for all drivers and
Reducing Speed While ACC is at a detected ahead within the selected driving conditions.
Set Speed following gap, ACC will adjust the Changing the gap setting
If ACC is already activated, do one vehicle's speed and attempt to automatically changes the alert
of the following: maintain the follow distance gap timing sensitivity (Far, Medium,
. Use the brake to get to the selected. or Near) for the Forward Collision
desired lower speed. Press the Press GAP on the steering wheel to Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward
SET– button and release the adjust the following gap. When Collision Alert (FCA) System on
accelerator pedal. The vehicle pressed, the current gap setting page 9-46.
will now cruise at the lower displays briefly on the instrument
speed. cluster.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Alerting the Driver The vehicle ahead symbol is in Stationary or Very Slow-Moving
the DIC. Objects
The vehicle ahead symbol only
displays when a vehicle is detected { Warning
in your vehicle’s path moving in the
same direction. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
may not detect and react to
If this symbol is not displaying, ACC stopped or slow-moving vehicles
will not respond to or brake to ahead of you. For example, the
If ACC is engaged, driver action vehicles ahead.
may be required when ACC cannot system may not brake for a
apply sufficient braking because of ACC automatically slows the vehicle vehicle it has never detected
approaching a vehicle too rapidly. down and adjusts vehicle speed to moving. This can occur in
follow the vehicle in front at the stop-and-go traffic or when a
When this condition occurs, six red selected follow gap. The vehicle vehicle suddenly appears due to
lights will flash on the windshield speed increases or decreases to a vehicle ahead changing lanes.
and eight beeps will sound from the follow the vehicle in front of you, but Your vehicle may not stop and
front. will not exceed the set speed. It may could cause a crash. Use caution
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3. apply limited braking, if necessary. when using ACC. Your complete
When braking is active, the brake
Approaching and Following a attention is always required while
lights will come on. The automatic
Vehicle driving and you should be ready
braking may feel or sound different
than if the brakes were applied to take action and apply the
manually. This is normal. brakes.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
ACC Automatically Disengages If the stopped vehicle ahead has A DIC warning message may
ACC may automatically disengage driven away and ACC has not been display indicating to shift to P (Park)
and the driver will need to manually resumed, the vehicle ahead symbol before exiting the vehicle. See
apply the brakes to slow the will flash as a reminder to check Vehicle Messages on page 5-28.
vehicle when: traffic ahead before proceeding. In
. The sensors are blocked.
addition, three beeps will sound.
See “Go Notifier” under Collision/
{ Warning
. The Traction Control System Detection systems in Vehicle If ACC has stopped the vehicle,
(TCS) or electronic stability Personalization on page 5-38. and if ACC is disengaged, turned
control system has activated or When the vehicle ahead drives off, or canceled, the vehicle will
been disabled. away, press RES+ or the no longer be held at a stop. The
. There is no traffic or other accelerator pedal to resume cruise vehicle can move. When ACC is
objects to detect. control. If stopped for more than holding the vehicle at a stop,
two minutes or if the driver door is always be prepared to manually
. There is a fault in the system. opened, the ACC automatically apply the brakes.
A message indicating that the cruise applies the Electric Parking Brake to
is disengaging will appear on the hold the vehicle. The Electric
DIC and the ACC active symbol will Parking Brake status light will turn
not be displayed when ACC is no on. See Parking Brake on { Warning
longer active. page 9-29. To resume ACC and
release the Electric Parking Brake, Leaving the vehicle without
Notification to Resume ACC press the accelerator pedal. ACC placing it in P (Park) can be
ACC will maintain a following gap can be resumed when the vehicle is dangerous. Do not leave the
behind a detected vehicle and slow travelling greater than 25 km/h vehicle while it is being held at a
your vehicle to a stop behind that (16 mph). stop by ACC. Always place the
vehicle. vehicle in P (Park) and turn off
the ignition before leaving the
vehicle.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
ACC Override ACC may operate differently in a

Warning (Continued) sharp curve. It may reduce the
If using the accelerator pedal while
ACC is active, a DIC warning vehicle speed if the curve is too
accelerates up to the set speed, sharp.
message will indicate that automatic especially when following a
braking will not occur. See Vehicle vehicle exiting or entering exit
Messages on page 5-28. ACC will ramps. You could lose control of
resume operation when the the vehicle or crash. Do not use
accelerator pedal is not being ACC while driving on an entrance
pressed.
or exit ramp. Always be ready to
use the brakes if necessary.
{ Warning
The ACC will not automatically
apply the brakes if your foot is { Warning When following a vehicle and
resting on the accelerator pedal.
On curves, ACC may respond to entering a curve, ACC may not
You could crash into a vehicle
a vehicle in another lane, or may detect the vehicle ahead and
ahead of you.
not have time to react to a vehicle accelerate to the set speed. When
this happens, the vehicle ahead
in your lane. You could crash into
Curves in the Road symbol will not appear.
a vehicle ahead of you, or lose
control of your vehicle. Give extra
{ Warning attention in curves and be ready
On curves, ACC may not detect a to use the brakes if necessary.
vehicle ahead in your lane. You Select an appropriate speed while
could be startled if the vehicle driving in curves.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Other Vehicle Lane Changes Do not use ACC when driving on

steep hills or when towing a trailer.
ACC will not detect a vehicle in the
lane while driving on steep hills. The
driver will often need to take over
acceleration and braking on steep
hills, especially when towing a
trailer. If the brakes are applied, the
ACC disengages.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is Disengaging ACC
not in your lane and apply the
brakes. ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead There are three ways to
until it is completely in the lane. The disengage ACC:
ACC may occasionally provide an
alert and/or braking that is brakes may need to be manually . Step lightly on the brake pedal.
considered unnecessary. It could applied.
respond to vehicles in different
. Press *.
Do Not Use ACC on Hills and
lanes, signs, guardrails, and other When Towing a Trailer . Press ].
stationary objects when entering or
exiting a curve. This is normal Erasing Speed Memory
operation. The vehicle does not The cruise control set speed is
need service.
erased from memory if ] is
pressed or if the ignition is
turned off.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Cleaning the Sensing System Driver Assistance Warning (Continued)

The radar sensor on the front of the
vehicle can become blocked by
Systems . Detect children, pedestrians,
snow, ice, dirt, or mud. These areas This vehicle may have features that bicyclists, or animals.
need to be cleaned for ACC to work together to help avoid crashes
operate properly.
. Detect vehicles or objects
or reduce crash damage while
outside the area monitored by
For cleaning instructions, see driving, backing, and parking. Read
the system.
“Washing the Vehicle” under this entire section before using
Exterior Care on page 10-72. these systems. . Work at all driving speeds.
System operation may also be

. Warn you or provide you with
limited under snow, heavy rain or
{ Warning enough time to avoid a crash.
road spray conditions. . Work under poor visibility or
Do not rely on the Driver
Assistance Systems. These bad weather conditions.
systems do not replace the need . Work if the detection sensor
for paying attention and driving is not cleaned or is covered
safely. You may not hear or see by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
alerts or warnings provided by Complete attention is always
these systems. Failure to use required while driving, and you
proper care when driving may should be ready to take action
result in injury, death, or vehicle and apply the brakes and/or steer
damage. See Defensive Driving the vehicle to avoid crashes.
on page 9-3.
Under many conditions, these
systems will not:
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Assistance Systems for Warning (Continued)

Parking or Backing
When the vehicle is in R (Reverse), only the RVC screen. Failure to
the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), use proper care before backing
Rear Parking Assist (RPA), and may result in injury, death,
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), or vehicle damage. Always check
if equipped, may help the driver to behind and around the vehicle
avoid a crash or to reduce crash before backing.
damage. 1. View Displayed by the Camera
When the vehicle is shifted into 2. Corners of the Rear Bumper
R (Reverse), the RVC displays an Displayed images may be farther or
image of the area behind the vehicle closer than they appear. The area
in the center stack display. displayed is limited and objects that
are close to either corner of the
{ Warning bumper or under the bumper do not
display.
The RVC system does not display
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, A warning triangle may display on
the RVC screen to show where the
crossing traffic, animals, or any
Rear Parking Assist (RPA) has
other object located outside the detected an object. This triangle
camera's field of view, below the changes from amber to red and
bumper, or under the vehicle. 1. View Displayed by the Camera increases in size the closer the
Perceived distances may be object.
different from actual distances.
Do not back the vehicle using On vehicles with the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA), a red warning
(Continued) triangle with an arrow may also
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
display on the RVC screen to warn The vehicle may have an instrument
of traffic coming from either { Warning cluster parking assist display with
direction. This system detects bars that show “distance to object”
objects coming from up to 20 m The parking assist system does and object location information for
(65 ft) from the left or right side of not detect children, pedestrians, RPA. As the object gets closer,
the vehicle. When an object is bicyclists, animals, or objects more bars light up, and the bars
detected, three beeps sound from located below the bumper or that change color from yellow to amber
the left or right side, depending on are too close or too far from the to red.
the direction of the detected vehicle. vehicle. It is not available at
When an object is first detected in
speeds greater than 8 km/h
With RPA, as the vehicle backs up the rear, one beep will be heard
(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,
at speeds of less than 8 km/h from the rear. When an object is
(5 mph), the sensors on the rear or vehicle damage, even with very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the
bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m parking assist, always check the vehicle rear), five beeps will sound
(8 ft) behind the vehicle that are area around the vehicle and from the rear.
within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off check all mirrors before moving
the ground and below bumper level. forward or backing. Turning the Features On or Off
These detection distances may be
shorter during warmer or humid
weather. Blocked sensors will not
detect objects and can also cause
false detections. Keep the sensors
clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and
slush; and clean sensors after a car
wash in freezing temperatures. The X button on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel is used to turn on or off the
Rear Parking Assist. The indicator
light next to the button comes on
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
when the features are on and turns Alert (SBZA), and/or the Active
off when the features have been Emergency Braking System can { Warning
disabled. help to avoid a crash or reduce
crash damage. FCA is a warning system and
Turn off RPA when towing a trailer. does not apply the brakes. When
The RVC, the RCTA system, Forward Collision Alert approaching a slower-moving or
parking assist symbols, and stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,
guidance lines can be turned on or (FCA) System or when following a vehicle too
off through the infotainment system: If equipped, the FCA system may closely, FCA may not provide a
1. On the infotainment system, help to avoid or reduce the harm warning with enough time to help
press the Settings screen caused by front-end crashes. When avoid a crash. FCA does not warn
button, or turn the MENU knob approaching a vehicle ahead too of pedestrians, animals, signs,
to highlight Settings and quickly, FCA provides a red flashing guardrails, bridges, construction
press MENU. alert on the windshield, and rapidly barrels, or other objects. Be ready
beeps. FCA also lights an amber to take action and apply the
2. Select Rear Camera. visual alert if following another brakes. For more information, see
3. Press Guidance Lines, Rear vehicle much too closely. Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
Cross Traffic Alert, or Rear Park FCA detects vehicles within a
Assist Symbols and then select distance of approximately 60 m
OFF or ON. FCA can be disabled with the FCA
(197 ft) and operates at speeds steering wheel control, or if your
above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Assistance Systems for vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control Cruise Control (ACC), through
Driving (ACC), it can detect vehicles to vehicle personalization. See the
distances of approximately 110 m “Auto Collision Preparation” portion
If equipped, when driving the (360 ft) and operates at all speeds.
vehicle forward, Forward Collision of “Collision/Detection Systems”
See Adaptive Cruise Control on under Vehicle Personalization on
Alert (FCA), Lane Departure page 9-35.
Warning (LDW), Side Blind Zone page 5-38.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead occurs, the brake system may

Warning (Continued) prepare for driver braking to occur
more rapidly which can cause a
or ice, or if the windshield is brief, mild deceleration. Continue to
damaged. It may also not detect a apply the brake pedal as needed.
vehicle on winding or hilly roads, Cruise control may be disengaged
or in conditions that can limit when the Collision Alert occurs.
visibility such as fog, rain,
or snow, or if the headlamps or Tailgating Alert
FCA warnings will not occur unless windshield are not cleaned or in
the FCA system detects a vehicle
proper condition. Keep the
ahead. When a vehicle is detected,
windshield, headlamps, and FCA
the vehicle ahead indicator will
display green. Vehicles may not be sensors clean and in good repair.
detected on curves, highway exit
ramps, or hills; or due to poor Collision Alert
visibility. FCA will not detect another The vehicle ahead indicator will
vehicle ahead until it is completely display amber when you are
in the driving lane. following a detected vehicle ahead
much too closely.
{ Warning Selecting the Alert Timing
FCA does not provide a warning The Collision Alert control is on the
to help avoid a crash, unless it When your vehicle approaches steering wheel. Press 3 / [ to
detects a vehicle. FCA may not another detected vehicle too rapidly, set the FCA timing to Far, Medium,
detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA the red lights will flash on the Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, windshield. Also, eight rapid first button press shows the current
(Continued) high-pitched beeps will sound from setting on the DIC. Additional button
the front. When this Collision Alert presses will change this setting. The
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
chosen setting will remain until it is Cleaning the System Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
changed and will affect the timing of
If the FCA system does not seem to IBA may activate when the brake
both the Collision Alert and the
operate properly, cleaning the pedal is applied quickly by providing
Tailgating Alert features. The timing
outside of the windshield in front of a boost to braking based on the
of both alerts will vary based on
the camera sensor behind the speed of approach and distance to
vehicle speed. The faster the
rearview mirror, and cleaning the a vehicle ahead.
vehicle speed, the farther away the
front of the vehicle where radar Minor brake pedal pulsations or
alert will occur. Consider traffic and
sensors are located, may correct pedal movement during this time is
weather conditions when selecting
the issue. normal and the brake pedal should
the alert timing. The range of
selectable alert timing may not be continue to be applied as needed.
appropriate for all drivers and Active Emergency IBA will automatically disengage
driving conditions. Braking System only when the brake pedal is
released.
If your vehicle is equipped with If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Control (ACC) it also has the Active
changing the FCA timing setting Emergency Braking System, which { Warning
automatically changes the following includes Intelligent Brake
gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near). Assist (IBA) and the Automatic IBA may increase vehicle braking
Collision Preparation (ACP) System. in situations when it may not be
Unnecessary Alerts These systems can provide a boost necessary. You could block the
FCA may provide unnecessary to braking or automatically brake the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take
alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles vehicle to help avoid or lessen the your foot off the brake pedal and
in other lanes, objects that are not severity of crashes when driving in a then apply the brakes as needed.
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts forward gear.
are normal operation and the
vehicle does not need service.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Automatic Collision Automatic Braking

Preparation (ACP) System Warning (Continued)
If ACP detects it is about to crash
When driving in a forward gear . Detect a vehicle ahead on with the vehicle you are following
above 9 km/h (5 mph), ACP may winding or hilly roads. that is moving or has come to a
help reduce crash damage by stop, and the brakes have not been
. Detect a stopped or applied, it may automatically brake
applying the brakes. It has a slow-moving vehicle or other
detection range of approximately 60 hard. This can help to reduce crash
object ahead. damage and it may even help to
m (197 ft). This front automatic
braking can only occur if a vehicle is . Detect a vehicle when avoid some very low speed crashes.
detected. This is shown by the FCA weather limits visibility, such Automatic Braking may slow the
vehicle ahead indicator being lit. as in fog, rain, or snow. In vehicle to a complete stop to try to
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) these situations, ACP sensor avoid a potential crash. The vehicle
System on page 9-46. performance is limited. will only hold at a stop briefly. A firm
Complete attention is always press of the accelerator pedal will
{ Warning required while driving, and you also release Automatic Braking.
should be ready to take action
ACP is an emergency crash
preparation feature and is not
and apply the brakes and/or steer { Warning
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
designed to avoid crashes. Do Automatic Braking may
not rely on ACP to brake the automatically brake the vehicle
vehicle. Brake Preparation
suddenly in situations where it is
ACP may not: When quickly approaching a vehicle unexpected and undesired.
ahead, Brake Preparation reduces It could respond to a turning
. Respond to stopped vehicles, brake response time by having the vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs,
pedestrians, or animals. brake system prepared for driver and other non-moving objects. To
(Continued) braking to occur more rapidly.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Warning (Continued)
Side Blind Zone Warning (Continued)
Alert (SBZA)
override Automatic Braking, firmly If equipped, the SBZA system is a check mirrors, glance over your
press the accelerator pedal, if it is lane-changing aid that assists shoulder, and use the turn
safe to do so. drivers with avoiding crashes that signals.
occur with vehicles in the side blind
Automatic Braking can be disabled zone (or spot) areas. The SBZA SBZA Detection Zones
or reduced through vehicle warning display will light up in the
personalization. See the “Auto corresponding outside side mirror
Collision Preparation” portion of and will flash if the turn signal is on.
“Collision/Detection Systems” under
Vehicle Personalization on { Warning
page 5-38.
SBZA does not alert the driver to
{ Warning vehicles rapidly approaching
outside of the side blind zones,
Using the Automatic Collision pedestrians, bicyclists,
Preparation System while towing or animals. It may not provide
a trailer could cause you to lose alerts when changing lanes under
control of the vehicle and crash. all driving conditions. Failure to
Turn the system off when towing use proper care when changing The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
a trailer. lanes may result in injury, death, approximately one lane over from
or vehicle damage. Before both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m
making a lane change, always (11 ft). The height of the zone is
(Continued) approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. This
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
zone starts at approximately the right side mirror display will light up of the vehicle. This is normal system
middle of the vehicle and goes back if a vehicle is detected in that blind operation; the vehicle does not need
5 m (16 ft). zone. If the turn signal is activated service.
in the same direction of a detected SBZA may not always alert the
How the System Works vehicle, this display will flash as an driver to vehicles in the side blind
The SBZA symbol lights up in the extra warning not to change lanes. zone, especially in wet conditions.
side mirrors when the system SBZA can be disabled through The system does not need to be
detects a vehicle in the next lane vehicle personalization. See serviced. The system may light up
over that is in the side blind zone. “Collision/Detection Systems” under due to guardrails, signs, trees,
This indicates it may be unsafe to Vehicle Personalization on shrubs, and other non-moving
change lanes. Before making a lane page 5-38. If SBZA is disabled by objects. This is normal system
change, check the SBZA display, the driver, the SBZA mirror displays operation; the vehicle does not need
check mirrors, glance over your will not light up. service.
shoulder, and use the turn signals.
When the System Does Not SBZA may not operate when the
Seem to Work Properly SBZA sensors in the left or right
corners of the rear bumper are
SBZA displays may not come on covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
when passing a vehicle quickly or or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For
when towing a trailer. The SBZA cleaning instructions, see "Washing
detection zones that extend back the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
from the side of the vehicle do not page 10-72. If the DIC still displays
Display Display move further back when a trailer is the system unavailable message
towed. Use caution while changing after cleaning both sides of the
When the vehicle is started, both
outside mirror SBZA displays will lanes when towing a trailer. SBZA vehicle toward the rear corners of
briefly come on to indicate the may alert to objects attached to the the vehicle, see your dealer.
vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle,
system is operating. When the
or object extending out to either side
vehicle is moving forward, the left or
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the SBZA displays do not light up

when vehicles are in the blind zone { Warning Warning (Continued)
and the system is clean, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle The LDW system does not steer marking. Always keep your
to your dealer. the vehicle. The LDW system attention on the road and
may not: maintain proper vehicle position
When SBZA is disabled for any within the lane, or vehicle
reason other than the driver turning
. Provide enough time to avoid
a crash. damage, injury, or death could
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On occur. Always keep the
option will not be available on the . Detect lane markings under windshield, headlamps, and
personalization menu. poor weather or visibility camera sensors clean and in
conditions. This can occur if
Radio Frequency Information good repair. Do not use LDW in
the windshield or headlamps
bad weather conditions.
See Radio Frequency Statement on are blocked by dirt, snow,
page 13-12. or ice; if they are not in
proper condition; or if the sun How the System Works
Lane Departure shines directly into the
The LDW camera sensor is on the
Warning (LDW) camera.
windshield ahead of the rearview
. Detect road edges. mirror.
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
crashes due to unintentional lane . Detect lanes on winding or To turn LDW on and off, press @ on
departures. It may provide an alert if hilly roads. the instrument panel to the left of
the vehicle is crossing a lane If LDW only detects lane the steering wheel. The control
without using a turn signal in that indicator will light when LDW is on.
markings on one side of the road,
direction. LDW uses a camera
it will only warn you when
sensor to detect the lane markings
at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or departing the lane on the side
greater. where it has detected a lane
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the LDW system is not functioning Fuel

properly when lane markings are
clearly visible, cleaning the Use of the recommended fuel is an
windshield may help. important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. When
LDW alerts may occur due to tar
driving in the U.S. and Canada, to
marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
help keep the engine clean and
When LDW is on, @ is green if temporary or construction lane
maintain optimum vehicle
LDW is available to warn of a lane markings, or other road
performance, we recommend using
departure. If the vehicle crosses a imperfections. This is normal system
TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
detected lane marking without using operation; the vehicle does not need
See www.toptiergas.com for a list of
the turn signal in that direction, @ service. Turn LDW off if these
TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
conditions continue.
changes to amber and flashes.
Additionally, there will be three
beeps on the right or left, depending
on the lane departure direction.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
The system may not detect lanes as
well when there are:
. Close vehicles ahead.
. Sudden lighting changes, such
as when driving through tunnels.
. Banked roads.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, available in some cities. If these malfunction indicator lamp may turn
E85 or FlexFuel can be used in the gasolines comply with the on. If this occurs, see your dealer
vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on previously described specification, for service.
page 9-55. then they are acceptable to use.
Use regular unleaded gasoline However, E85 (85% ethanol) and California Fuel
other fuels containing more than
meeting ASTM specification D4814
15% ethanol must be used only in
Requirements
with a posted octane rating of 87 or
FlexFuel vehicles. If the vehicle is certified to meet
higher. Do not use gasoline with an
California Emissions Standards, it is
octane rating below 87, as it may
cause engine damage and will lower { Caution designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
fuel economy.
Do not use fuel containing the underhood emission control
Use of Seasonal Fuels methanol. It can corrode metal label. If this fuel is not available in
Use summer and winter fuels in the parts in the fuel system and also states adopting California Emissions
appropriate season. The fuels damage plastic and rubber parts. Standards, the vehicle will operate
industry automatically modifies the That damage would not be satisfactorily on fuels meeting
fuel for the appropriate season. covered under the vehicle federal specifications, but emission
If fuel is left in the vehicle tank for warranty. control system performance might
long periods of time, driving or be affected. The malfunction
starting could be affected. Drive the indicator lamp could turn on and the
Some gasolines, mainly high octane vehicle may not pass a smog-check
vehicle until the fuel is at one-half
racing gasolines, can contain an test. See Malfunction Indicator
tank or less, then refuel with the
octane-enhancing additive called Lamp on page 5-17. If this occurs,
current seasonal fuel.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese return to your authorized dealer for
Prohibited Fuels tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use diagnosis. If it is determined that the
gasolines and/or fuel additives with condition is caused by the type of
Gasolines containing oxygenates
MMT as they can reduce spark plug fuel used, repairs may not be
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
life and affect emission control covered by the vehicle warranty.
as reformulated gasolines, are
system performance. The
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Fuels in Foreign gasoline additive recommended by the fuel if the ethanol content is
General Motors. It is available at greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that
Countries your dealer. do not meet ASTM or CGSB
If planning to drive in countries Do not use additives with E85 or specifications can affect driveability
outside the U.S. or Canada, the FlexFuel. and could cause the malfunction
proper fuel might be hard to find. indicator lamp to come on.
Check regional auto club or fuel
retail brand websites for availability
E85 or FlexFuel The starting characteristics of E85
or FlexFuel make it unsuitable for
in the country where driving. Never Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can use when temperatures fall below
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing use either unleaded gasoline or fuel −18°C (0°F). Use gasoline or add
methanol, manganese, or any other containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). gasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.
fuel not recommended. Costly All other vehicles should use only
repairs caused by use of improper the unleaded gasoline as described Because E85 or FlexFuel has less
fuel would not be covered by the in Fuel on page 9-53. energy per liter (gallon) than
vehicle warranty. gasoline, the vehicle will need to be
The use of E85 or FlexFuel is refilled more often. See Filling the
encouraged when the vehicle is Tank on page 9-56.
Fuel Additives designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel
is made from renewable sources.
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is To help locate fuel stations that
{ Caution
recommended. See Fuel on carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S. Some additives are not
page 9-53. Department of Energy has an compatible with E85 or FlexFuel
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is alternative fuel website. See and can harm the vehicle's fuel
not available, one bottle of Fuel www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/ system. Do not add anything to
System Treatment PLUS added to stations. E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused
the fuel tank at every engine oil E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM by additives would not be covered
change can help. Fuel System Specification D 5798 or CAN/ by the vehicle warranty.
Treatment PLUS is the only CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not use
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
{ Caution Warning (Continued)

Do not use fuel containing . Keep sparks, flames, and
methanol. It can corrode metal smoking materials away
parts in the fuel system and also from fuel.
damage plastic and rubber parts. . Do not leave the fuel pump
That damage would not be unattended.
covered under the vehicle . Do not reenter the vehicle
warranty.
while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the
Filling the Tank fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel. The fuel cap is behind the fuel door
{ Warning . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
on the passenger side of the
vehicle. To open the fuel door, push
cap is opened too quickly. and release the rearward center
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
violently and can cause injury or edge of the door.
tank is nearly full, and is
death. more likely in hot weather. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise
. To help avoid injuries to you Open the fuel cap slowly and to remove. If the vehicle has E85
and others, read and follow wait for any hiss noise to stop fuel capability, the fuel cap will be
all the instructions on the fuel then unscrew the cap all yellow and state that E85 or
pump island. the way. gasoline can be used. See E85 or
FlexFuel on page 9-55. While
. Turn off the engine when refueling, hang the fuel cap from the
refueling. hook on the fuel door. Reinstall the
(Continued) cap by turning it clockwise until it
clicks.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the cap is not properly installed,

the malfunction indicator lamp may Caution (Continued) Warning (Continued)
come on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 5-17. of fuel cap may not fit properly, . Remove the container from
may cause the malfunction the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
Do not top off or overfill the tank and indicator lamp to light, and could bed before filling.
wait a few seconds before removing damage the fuel tank and
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
. Place the container on the
emissions system. See ground.
surfaces as soon as possible. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
Exterior Care on page 10-72. . Place the nozzle inside the fill
page 5-17.
opening of the container
{ Warning before dispensing fuel, and
Filling a Portable Fuel keep it in contact with the fill
If a fire starts while you are opening until filling is
Container complete.
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by . Fill the container no more
shutting off the pump or by { Warning than 95% full to allow for
notifying the station attendant. Filling a portable fuel container expansion.
Leave the area immediately. while it is in the vehicle can cause . Do not smoke, light matches,
fuel vapors that can ignite either or use lighters while
by static electricity or other pumping fuel.
{ Caution means. You or others could be
badly burned and the vehicle
. Avoid using cell phones or
other electronic devices.
If a new fuel cap is needed, be could be damaged. Always:
sure to get the right type of cap . Use approved fuel
from your dealer. The wrong type containers.
(Continued) (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Do not tow a trailer during the
Towing first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent { Warning
damage to the engine, axle,
General Towing or other parts. When towing a trailer, exhaust
Information gases may collect at the rear of
. Then during the first 800 km
the vehicle and enter if the
Only use towing equipment that has (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
been designed for the vehicle. window is open.
Contact your dealer or trailering do not make starts at full throttle.
dealer for assistance with preparing . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). When towing a trailer:
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read Shift the transmission to a lower . Do not drive with the liftgate,
the entire section before towing a gear if the transmission shifts trunk/hatch, or rear-most
trailer. too often under heavy loads and/ window open.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see or hilly conditions. . Fully open the air outlets on
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70. . Do not use Adaptive Cruise or under the instrument
For towing the vehicle behind Control when towing. panel.
another vehicle such as a motor
home, see Recreational Vehicle
. The Automatic Collision . Also adjust the climate
Towing on page 10-70. Preparation System should be control system to a setting
set to Off when towing. See that brings in only outside air.
Active Emergency Braking See “Climate Control
Driving Characteristics System on page 9-48. Systems” in the Index.
and Towing Tips . Turn off Park Assist when For more information about
Driving with a Trailer towing. Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
When towing a trailer: Exhaust on page 9-24.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to
trailer towing.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Towing a trailer requires a certain Passing

amount of experience. The Caution (Continued)
More passing distance is needed
combination you are driving is
when towing a trailer. The The vehicle could be damaged.
longer and not as responsive as the
combination will not accelerate as Avoid making very sharp turns
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
quickly and is longer so it is while trailering.
the handling and braking of the rig
necessary to go much farther
before setting out for the open road.
beyond the passed vehicle before
Before starting, check all trailer hitch returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, make
parts and attachments, safety wider turns than normal. Do this so
chains, electrical connectors, lamps, Backing Up the trailer will not strike soft
tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has Hold the bottom of the steering shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
electric brakes, start the wheel with one hand. To move the or other objects. Avoid jerky or
combination moving and then apply trailer to the left, move that hand to sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
the trailer brake controller by hand the left. To move the trailer to the advance.
to be sure the brakes work. right, move your hand to the right. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
During the trip, check occasionally Always back up slowly and, out, the arrows on the instrument
to be sure that the load is secure if possible, have someone cluster will still flash for turns. It is
and the lamps and any trailer guide you. important to check occasionally to
brakes still work. be sure the trailer bulbs are still
Making Turns working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the { Caution Driving on Grades
vehicle ahead as you would when Reduce speed and shift to a lower
Making very sharp turns while gear before starting down a long or
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
trailering could cause the trailer to steep downgrade. If the
This can help to avoid heavy
come in contact with the vehicle. transmission is not shifted down, the
braking and sudden turns.
(Continued) brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
the transmission to a lower gear if apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
{ Warning into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
conditions. Parking the vehicle on a hill with
When towing at high altitude on the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill
steep uphill grades, consider the dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
following: Engine coolant will boil at wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both 2. Start the engine.
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear.
immediately after towing at high damaged. When possible, always 4. Release the parking brake.
altitude on steep uphill grades, the park the rig on a flat surface.
vehicle may show signs similar to 5. Let up on the brake pedal.
engine overheating. To avoid this, 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
let the engine run while parked, If parking the rig on a hill:
clear of the chocks.
preferably on level ground, with the 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
automatic transmission in P (Park) not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 7. Stop and have someone pick up
for a few minutes before turning the the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks.
engine off. If the overheat warning downhill or into traffic if facing Maintenance when Trailer
comes on, see Engine Overheating uphill. Towing
on page 10-18.
2. Have someone place chocks The vehicle needs service more
under the trailer wheels. often when pulling a trailer. See
3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on
place, release the regular brakes page 11-3. Things that are
until the chocks absorb the load. especially important in trailer
operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and It should never weigh more than Weight of the Trailer Tongue
brake system. It is a good idea to 454 kg (1,000 lb). But even that can
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
inspect these before and during be too heavy.
an important weight to measure
the trip. It depends on how the rig is used. because it affects the total gross
Check periodically to see that all For example, speed, altitude, road weight of the vehicle. The Gross
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. grades, outside temperature, and Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
how much the vehicle is used to pull curb weight of the vehicle, any
Trailer Towing (Bi-Fuel) a trailer are all important. It can cargo carried in it, and the people
depend on any special equipment who will be riding in the vehicle.
The vehicle is neither designed nor on the vehicle, and the amount of If there are a lot of options,
intended to tow a trailer. tongue weight the vehicle can carry. equipment, passengers, or cargo in
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Trailer Towing (All except later in this section. weight the vehicle can carry, which
Bi-Fuel) Maximum trailer weight is calculated will also reduce the trailer weight the
assuming only the driver is in the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
Before pulling a trailer, three
tow vehicle and it has all the the tongue load must be added to
important considerations have to do
required trailering equipment. The the GVW because the vehicle will
with weight:
weight of additional optional be carrying that weight, too. See
. Weight of the trailer. equipment, passengers, and cargo Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
. Weight of the trailer tongue. in the tow vehicle must be
subtracted from the maximum trailer
. Total weight on your vehicle's
weight.
tires.
Ask your dealer for trailering
Weight of the Trailer information or advice, or write us at
How heavy can a trailer safely be? our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
on page 13-3.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
on the Tire and Loading Information exhaust can get into the vehicle.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on See Engine Exhaust on
page 9-10. Make sure not to go over page 9-24.
the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer Safety Chains
tongue. Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
Towing Equipment safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Hitches from contacting the road if it
Use the correct hitch equipment. becomes separated from the hitch.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for Leave enough slack so the rig can
assistance. turn. Never allow safety chains to
The trailer tongue (1) should weigh
drag on the ground.
10 % of the total loaded trailer . The rear bumper on the vehicle
weight (2). is not intended for hitches. Do Trailer Brakes
After loading the trailer, weigh the not attach rental hitches or other
Does the trailer have its own
trailer and then the tongue, bumper-type hitches to it. Use
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
separately, to see if the weights are only a frame-mounted hitch that the instructions for the trailer brakes
proper. If they are not, adjustments does not attach to the bumper. so they are installed, adjusted, and
might be made by moving some . Will any holes be made in the maintained properly.
items around in the trailer. body of the vehicle when the
Because the vehicle has antilock
trailer hitch is installed? If so,
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
seal the holes when the hitch is brake system. If this is done, both
Tires removed. If the holes are not
brake systems will not work well or
Be sure the vehicle's tires are sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
at all.
inflated to the upper limit for cold carbon monoxide (CO) from the
tires. These numbers can be found
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
{ Caution
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle or cause
components to not work and
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-31 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-31.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-1
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Vehicle Care Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29
General Information Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-23 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Automatic Transmission Shift
California Proposition Lock Control Function Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 High Voltage Devices and
California Perchlorate Ignition Transmission Lock Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Electrical System
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Wiper Blade Engine Compartment Fuse
Vehicle Checks Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Instrument Panel Fuse
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Engine Compartment Wheels and Tires
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Bulb Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Automatic Transmission High Intensity Discharge Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Headlamps, Front Turn Tire Terminology and
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Signal, Sidemarker, and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Overheated Engine Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Protection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Appearance Care General Information

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Tire Pressure Monitor Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 For service and parts needs, visit
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 your dealer. You will receive
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 and supported service people.
When It Is Time for New Genuine GM parts have one of
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 these marks:
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
California Proposition
Towing the Vehicle
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-70 65 Warning
Recreational Vehicle Most motor vehicles, including this
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
California Perchlorate
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ Warning
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have
Certain types of automotive the proper knowledge, service
installation or use of non‐GM
applications, such as airbag manual, tools, or parts. Always
certified parts, including control
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, follow owner manual procedures
module or software modifications, is
and lithium batteries contained in and consult the service manual
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for service work.
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
perchlorate. complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
Modifications installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Adding non‐dealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13-11.
can affect vehicle performance and page 3-31.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-4 Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood 2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
Before attempting to do your own find the secondary hood release
service work, see Airbag System To open the hood: handle. The handle is under the
Check on page 3-32. front edge of the hood near the
Keep a record with all parts receipts center. Push the handle to the
and list the mileage and the date of right and at the same time raise
any service work performed. See the hood.
Maintenance Records on To close the hood:
page 11-13. 1. Before closing the hood, be sure
1. Pull the hood release lever with all the filler caps are properly
{ Caution this symbol on it. It is inside the installed.
Even small amounts of vehicle on the lower side of the 2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)
instrument panel. above the vehicle and release it
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow so it fully latches. Check to
contaminants to contact the fluids, make sure the hood is firmly
reservoir caps, or dipsticks. closed. Repeat the process if
necessary.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview
2.5L L4 Engine
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-6 Vehicle Care
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of 9. Battery (Under Cover). See
page 10-12. View). See Cooling System on Battery on page 10-22.
2. Engine Cover. page 10-14. 10. Windshield Washer Fluid
3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine 6. Transmission Fluid Cap. See Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Oil on page 10-8. Automatic Transmission Fluid on on page 10-19.
page 10-12. 11. Engine Compartment Fuse
4. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10-8. 7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Block on page 10-32.
Brakes on page 10-20.
8. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10-15.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-7
3.6L V6 Engine
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-8 Vehicle Care
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 11. Engine Compartment Fuse Checking Engine Oil
page 10-12. Block on page 10-32.
It is a good idea to check the engine
2. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Oil on page 10-8. Engine Oil get an accurate reading, the vehicle
3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine To ensure proper engine must be on level ground. The
Oil on page 10-8. performance and long life, careful engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
attention must be paid to engine oil. See Engine Compartment Overview
4. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of Following these simple, but on page 10-5 for the location of the
View). See Cooling System on important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick.
page 10-14. your investment: Obtaining an accurate oil level
5. Engine Cover. . Always use engine oil approved reading is essential:
6. Transmission Fluid Cap and to the proper specification and of 1. If the engine has been running
Dipstick (Out of View). See the proper viscosity grade. See recently, turn off the engine and
Automatic Transmission Fluid on “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” allow several minutes for the oil
page 10-12. in this section. to drain back into the oil pan.
7. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See . Check the engine oil level Checking the oil level too soon
Brakes on page 10-20. regularly and maintain the after engine shutoff will not
proper oil level. See “Checking provide an accurate oil level
8. Coolant Surge Tank and reading.
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Engine Oil” in this section.
Coolant on page 10-15.
9. Battery (Under Cover). See
. Change the engine oil at the { Warning
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Battery on page 10-22. The engine oil dipstick handle
Life System on page 10-10.
10. Windshield Washer Fluid may be hot; it could burn you.
. Always dispose of engine oil Use a towel or glove to touch the
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
properly. See “What to Do with dipstick handle.
on page 10-19.
Used Oil” in this section.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-9
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it Selecting the Right Engine Oil
with a clean paper towel or cloth, { Caution Selecting the right engine oil
then push it back in all the way.
Do not add too much oil. Oil depends on both the proper oil
Remove it again, keeping the tip
levels above or below the specification and viscosity grade.
down, and check the level.
acceptable operating range See Recommended Fluids and
When to Add Engine Oil shown on the dipstick are harmful Lubricants on page 11-11.
to the engine. If you find that you Specification
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine Use and ask for licensed engine oils
has so much oil that the oil level with the dexos1® approved
certification mark. Engine oils
gets above the upper mark that
meeting the requirements for the
shows the proper operating
vehicle should have the dexos1
2.5L L4 Shown, 3.6L V6 Similar range, the engine could be approved certification mark. This
damaged. You should drain out certification mark indicates that the
If the oil is below the cross-hatched the excess oil or limit driving of
area at the tip of the dipstick, add oil has been approved to the dexos1
the vehicle and seek a service specification. See
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
professional to remove the www.gmdexos.com.
and then recheck the level. See
excess amount of oil.
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine See Engine Compartment Overview
oil crankcase capacity, see on page 10-5 for the location of the
Capacities and Specifications on engine oil fill cap.
page 12-2. Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-10 Vehicle Care
viscosity grade, always select an oil containing used engine oil. See the
{ Caution of the correct specification. See manufacturer's warnings about the
“Specification” earlier in this section use and disposal of oil products.
Failure to use the recommended for more information.
engine oil can result in engine Used oil can be a threat to the
damage not covered by the Engine Oil Additives/Engine environment. If you change your
vehicle warranty. Check with your Oil Flushes own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
dealer or service provider on from the filter before disposal. Never
Do not add anything to the oil. The dispose of oil by putting it in the
whether the oil is approved to the recommended oils with the dexos trash or pouring it on the ground,
dexos1 specification. specification and displaying the into sewers, or into streams or
dexos certification mark are all that bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
Viscosity Grade is needed for good performance and it to a place that collects used oil.
engine protection.
Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade
engine oil for the 3.6L V6 engine. Engine oil system flushes are not Engine Oil Life System
recommended and could cause
Use SAE 5W-20 viscosity grade engine damage not covered by the When to Change Engine Oil
engine oil for the 2.5L L4 engine. vehicle warranty. This vehicle has a computer system
SAE 0W-20 may be used as an
that indicates when to change the
alternative. What to Do with Used Oil engine oil and filter. This is based
Cold Temperature Operation: In an Used engine oil contains certain on a combination of factors which
area of extreme cold, where the elements that can be unhealthy for include engine revolutions, engine
temperature falls below −29°C (−20° your skin and could even cause temperature, and miles driven.
F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Based on driving conditions, the
for the 3.6L V6 engine. An oil of this your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is
viscosity grade will provide easier skin and nails with soap and water, indicated can vary considerably. For
cold starting for the engine at or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the oil life system to work properly,
extremely low temperatures. When properly dispose of clothing or rags the system must be reset every time
selecting an oil of the appropriate the oil is changed.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-11
When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil changed. It cannot be reset
that oil life has been diminished, it Life System accurately until the next oil
indicates that an oil change is change.
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the The oil life system can also be reset
OIL SOON message comes on. See as follows:
Engine Oil Messages on page 5-31. system can calculate the next
Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil change. To reset the 1. Turn the ignition on with the
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). system: engine off.
It is possible that, if driving under 1. Using the DIC controls on the 2. Fully press and release the
the best conditions, the oil life right side of the steering wheel, accelerator pedal three times
system might indicate that an oil display REMAINING OIL LIFE within five seconds.
change is not necessary for up to a on the DIC. See Driver
year. The engine oil and filter must Information Center (DIC) on If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
be changed at least once a year page 5-26. When remaining oil SOON message is not on, the
and at this time the system must be life is low, the CHANGE system is reset.
reset. Your dealer has trained ENGINE OIL SOON message The system is reset when the
service people who will perform this will appear on the display. See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
work and reset the system. It is also Engine Oil Messages on message is off.
important to check the oil regularly page 5-31.
over the course of an oil drain If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
interval and keep it at the proper 2. Press V on the DIC controls and message comes back on when the
level. hold down for a few seconds to vehicle is started, the engine oil life
clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL system has not been reset. Repeat
If the system is ever reset SOON message and reset the the procedure.
accidentally, the oil must be oil life at 100%.
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change. Be careful not to reset the oil life
Remember to reset the oil life display accidentally at any time
system whenever the oil is changed. other than after the oil is
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-12 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission Change the fluid at the intervals How to Inspect the Engine Air
listed in Maintenance Schedule on Cleaner/Filter
Fluid page 11-3, and be sure to use the
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
How to Check Automatic remove the filter from the vehicle
Transmission Fluid and Lubricants on page 11-11.
and lightly shake the filter to release
It is not necessary to check the loose dust and dirt. If the filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter remains covered with dirt, a new
transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only The engine air cleaner/filter is in the filter is required.
reason for fluid loss. If a leak engine compartment on the
occurs, take the vehicle to your passenger side of the vehicle. See
dealer service department and have Engine Compartment Overview on
it repaired as soon as possible. page 10-5 for more information on
location.
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the When to Inspect the Engine Air
transmission fluid. Because this Cleaner/Filter
procedure is difficult, you should
have this done at your dealer Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
service department. Contact your scheduled maintenance intervals
dealer for additional information or and replace it at the first oil change
the procedure can be found in the after each 90 000 km (60,000 mi)
service manual. To purchase a interval. See Maintenance Schedule
2.5L L4 Engine
service manual, see Service on page 11-3. If you are driving in
Publications Ordering Information dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the 1. Screws
on page 13-11. filter at each engine oil change.
2. Secondary Air Hose (If
Equipped)
3. Electrical Connector
4. Air Duct Clamp
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-13
To inspect or replace the engine air 3. Disconnect the secondary air

cleaner/filter: hose (2) (if equipped).
1. Open the hood. See Hood on 4. Disconnect the electrical
page 10-4. connector (3).
2. Remove the screws (1) on top of 5. Disconnect the outlet duct by
the engine air cleaner/filter loosening the air duct clamp (4).
housing. 6. Lift the filter cover housing away
3. Disconnect the secondary air from the engine air cleaner/filter
hose (2) (if equipped). housing.
4. Disconnect the electrical 7. Pull out the filter.
connector (3). 8. Inspect or replace the engine air
3.6L V6 Engine
5. Disconnect the outlet duct by cleaner/filter.
loosening the air duct clamp (4). 1. Screws 9. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstall
6. Lift the filter cover housing away 2. Secondary Air Hose (If the filter cover housing.
from the engine air cleaner/filter Equipped)
housing. 3. Electrical Connector
4. Air Duct Clamp
{ Warning
7. Pull out the filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air Operating the engine with the air
8. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter off can cause you or
cleaner/filter:
cleaner/filter. others to be burned. The air
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
9. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstall cleaner not only cleans the air; it
page 10-4.
the filter cover housing. helps to stop flames if the engine
2. Remove the screws (1) on top of backfires. Use caution when
the engine air cleaner/filter working on the engine and do not
housing. drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-14 Vehicle Care
{ Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
can easily get into the engine,
which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct 2.5L L4 Engine 3.6L V6 Engine
working temperature.
1. Engine Cooling Fans (Out 1. Engine Cooling Fans (Out
of View) of View)
2. Coolant Surge Tank and 2. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap Pressure Cap
{ Warning
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-15
What to Use
{ Warning Caution (Continued)
Heater and radiator hoses, and vehicle warranty. Always use { Warning
other engine parts, can be very DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
Adding only plain water or some
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, in the vehicle.
other liquid to the cooling system
you can be burned.
can be dangerous. Plain water
Do not run the engine if there is a Engine Coolant and other liquids, can boil before
leak. If you run the engine, it the proper coolant mixture will.
could lose all coolant. That could The cooling system in the vehicle is
The coolant warning system is set
cause an engine fire, and you filled with DEX-COOL® engine
for the proper coolant mixture.
coolant. This coolant is designed to
could be burned. Get any leak With plain water or the wrong
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
fixed before you drive the vehicle. mixture, the engine could get too
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
The following explains the cooling could catch fire and you or others
{ Caution system and how to check and add could be burned. Use a 50/
coolant when it is low. If there is a
Using coolant other than 50 mixture of clean, drinkable
problem with engine overheating,
DEX-COOL® can cause water and DEX-COOL coolant.
see Engine Overheating on
premature engine, heater core, page 10-18.
or radiator corrosion. In addition, Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
the engine coolant could require drinkable water and DEX-COOL
changing sooner. Any repairs coolant. If using this mixture,
would not be covered by the nothing else needs to be added.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-16 Vehicle Care
This mixture: If coolant is visible but the coolant

Caution (Continued) level is not at or above the mark
. Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of
proper mixture of engine coolant clean drinkable water and
temperature. for the cooling system. See DEX-COOL coolant.
. Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and
129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11-11. Be sure the cooling system is cool
temperature. before this is done.
. Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by If no coolant is visible in the coolant
corrosion. putting it in the trash, pouring it on surge tank, add coolant as follows:
. Will not damage aluminum parts. the ground, or into sewers, streams, How to Add Coolant to the
or bodies of water. Have the coolant Coolant Surge Tank
. Help keep the proper engine changed by an authorized service
temperature. center, familiar with legal
requirements regarding used { Caution
{ Caution coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
If improper coolant mixture, health.
follow this procedure could cause
inhibitors, or additives are used in
the vehicle cooling system, the Checking Coolant the engine to overheat and be
The vehicle must be on a level severely damaged.
engine could overheat and be
damaged. Too much water in the surface when checking the coolant
mixture can freeze and crack level. If no problem is found, check to see
engine cooling parts. The repairs Check to see if coolant is visible in if coolant is visible in the coolant
would not be covered by the the coolant surge tank. If the coolant surge tank. If coolant is visible but
vehicle warranty. Use only the inside the coolant surge tank is the coolant level is not at the
boiling, do not do anything else until indicated level mark, add a 50/
(Continued)
it cools down. 50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-17
and DEX-COOL coolant at the will allow any pressure still left to
coolant surge tank, but be sure the { Warning be vented out the
cooling system, including the discharge hose.
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
cool before you do it. slowly and remove it.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
{ Warning are hot enough. Do not spill
Steam and scalding liquids from a coolant on a hot engine.
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn
the cap when the cooling system,
including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and surge tank pressure
cap to cool.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
{ Caution system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper DEX-COOL coolant
In cold weather, water can freeze upper radiator hose, is no mixture to the indicated
and crack the engine, radiator, longer hot. level mark.
heater core, and other parts. Use Turn the pressure cap slowly
the recommended coolant and counterclockwise about
the proper coolant mixture. one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-18 Vehicle Care
4. With the coolant surge tank Engine Overheating

pressure cap off, start the { Caution
engine and let it run until you There is a coolant temperature
can feel the upper radiator hose gauge on the instrument cluster that Running the engine without
getting hot. Watch out for the indicates an overheated engine coolant may cause damage or a
engine cooling fans. condition. See Engine Coolant fire. Vehicle damage would not be
Temperature Gauge on page 5-14. covered by the vehicle warranty.
By this time, the coolant level See Overheated Engine
inside the coolant surge tank If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when this warning appears, Protection Operating Mode on
may be lower. If the level is
get service help right away. See page 10-19 for information on
lower, add more of the proper
Roadside Assistance Program on driving to a safe place in an
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the page 13-5. emergency.
level reaches the indicated If the decision is made to lift the
level mark. hood, make sure the vehicle is If Steam Is Coming from the
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. parked on a level surface. Engine Compartment
Check the level in the coolant surge Then check to see if the engine See Overheated Engine Protection
tank when the cooling system has cooling fans are running. If the Operating Mode on page 10-19 for
cooled down. If the coolant is not at engine is overheating, the fans information on driving to a safe
the proper level, repeat Steps 1– should be running. If not, do not place in an emergency.
3 and reinstall the pressure cap. continue to run the engine and have
If the coolant still is not at the proper the vehicle serviced.
level when the system cools down
again, see your dealer.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-19
If No Steam Is Coming from If the coolant temperature gauge is Overheated Engine

the Engine Compartment no longer in the overheat zone, the
vehicle can be driven. Continue to
Protection
If an engine overheat warning is drive the vehicle slowly for about Operating Mode
displayed but no steam can be seen 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle
or heard, the problem might not be This emergency operating mode
distance from the vehicle in front. allows the vehicle to be driven to a
too serious. Sometimes the engine If the warning does not come back
can get a little too hot when the safe place in an emergency
on, continue to drive normally and situation. If an overheated engine
vehicle: have the cooling system checked condition exists, an overheat
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. for proper fill and function. protection mode which alternates
. Stops after high-speed driving. If the warning continues, pull over, firing groups of cylinders helps
stop, and park the vehicle prevent engine damage. In this
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
right away. mode, there is significant loss in
. Tows a trailer. power and engine performance.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the
If the overheat warning displays with engine for three minutes while The engine coolant temperature
no sign of steam: parked. If the warning is still gauge indicates if an overheat
1. Turn the air conditioning off. displayed, turn off the engine until it condition exists. Driving extended
cools down. Also, see Overheated distances and/or towing a trailer in
2. Turn the heater on to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode the overheat protection mode
temperature and to the highest on page 10-19. should be avoided.
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary. Washer Fluid
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park) or What to Use
N (Neutral), and let the When windshield washer fluid is
engine idle. needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-20 Vehicle Care
use. If operating the vehicle in an heard all the time when the vehicle
area where the temperature may fall Caution (Continued) is moving, except when applying the
below freezing, use a fluid that has brake pedal firmly.
sufficient protection against
. Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
freezing.
Water can cause the solution { Warning
Adding Washer Fluid to freeze and damage the
The brake wear warning sound
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
. When using concentrated a crash. When the brake wear
washer fluid, follow the warning sound is heard, have the
manufacturer instructions for vehicle serviced.
adding water.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
Open the cap with the washer three-quarters full when it is
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until very cold. This allows for fluid { Caution
the tank is full. See Engine expansion if freezing occurs,
Compartment Overview on Continuing to drive with worn-out
which could damage the tank
page 10-5 for reservoir location. if it is completely full. brake pads could result in costly
brake repair.
{ Caution Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
. Do not use engine coolant
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc can cause a brake squeal when the
(antifreeze) in the windshield
brake pads have built-in wear brakes are first applied or lightly
washer. It can damage the
indicators that make a high-pitched applied. This does not mean
windshield washer system
warning sound when the brake pads something is wrong with the brakes.
and paint.
are worn and new pads are needed.
(Continued) The sound can come and go or be
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-21
Properly torqued wheel nuts are if the vehicle is to have really good Engine Compartment Overview on
necessary to help prevent brake braking. The vehicle was designed page 10-5 for the location of the
pulsation. When tires are rotated, and tested with top-quality brake reservoir.
inspect brake pads for wear and parts. When parts of the braking There are only two reasons why the
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the system are replaced, be sure to get brake fluid level in the reservoir
proper sequence to torque new, approved replacement parts. might go down:
specifications. See Capacities and If this is not done, the brakes might
Specifications on page 12-2. not work properly. For example, . The brake fluid level goes down
installing disc brake pads that are because of normal brake lining
Brake pads should be replaced as wear. When new linings are
complete sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and installed, the fluid level goes
Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes — for the worse. The back up.
braking performance expected can . A fluid leak in the brake
See your dealer if the brake pedal
change in many other ways if the hydraulic system can also cause
does not return to normal height,
wrong replacement brake parts are a low fluid level. Have the brake
or if there is a rapid increase in
installed. hydraulic system fixed, since a
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be leak means that sooner or later
required. Brake Fluid the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Brake Adjustment
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
Every time the brakes are applied, If fluid is added when the linings are
with or without the vehicle moving, worn, there will be too much fluid
the brakes adjust for wear. when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
Replacing Brake System Parts as necessary, only when work is
The braking system on a vehicle is The brake master cylinder reservoir done on the brake hydraulic system.
complex. Its many parts have to be is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
of top quality and work well together indicated on the reservoir cap. See
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-22 Vehicle Care
{ Warning { Warning Caution (Continued)

If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
can spill on the engine and burn, brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This the paint finish can be
or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not to
the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
Add brake fluid only when work is vehicle. If you do, wash it off
done on the brake hydraulic immediately.
system.
{ Caution Battery
. Using the wrong fluid can
When the brake fluid falls to a low This vehicle has a standard 12-volt
level, the brake warning light comes badly damage brake battery under the hood. See Engine
on. See Brake System Warning hydraulic system parts. For Compartment Overview on
Light on page 5-20. example, just a few drops of page 10-5. Refer to the replacement
mineral-based oil, such as number shown on the original
What to Add engine oil, in the brake battery label when a new 12-volt
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid hydraulic system can damage battery is needed.
from a sealed container. See brake hydraulic system parts
Recommended Fluids and so badly that they will have to Stop/Start System
Lubricants on page 11-11. be replaced. Do not let If equipped with the 2.5L L4 Engine,
someone put in the wrong the vehicle has a stop/start system
Always clean the brake fluid
kind of fluid. to shut off the engine to help
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This (Continued) conserve fuel. See Starting the
helps keep dirt from entering the Engine on page 9-18.
reservoir.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-23
Vehicles with Stop/Start have an Remember to reconnect the battery

Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt Warning (Continued) when ready to drive the vehicle.
underhood battery. Installation of a
known to the State of California to
standard 12-volt battery will result in
cause cancer and reproductive
Starter Switch Check
reduced 12-volt battery life.
harm. Wash hands after handling.
There is also an auxiliary AGM { Warning
battery behind the access panel in
the left rear of the trunk. This Vehicle Storage When you are doing this
battery is for managing the stop/ inspection, the vehicle could
start auxiliary loads and is not to be
used for any other purpose. See
{ Warning move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
your dealer if the auxiliary battery Batteries have acid that can burn injured.
needs service. you and gas that can explode.
When using a 12-volt battery You can be badly hurt if you are
1. Before starting this check, be
charger on the 12-volt AGM battery, not careful. See Jump Starting on
sure there is enough room
some chargers have an AGM page 10-66 for tips on working around the vehicle.
battery setting on the charger. around a battery without
If available, use the AGM setting on getting hurt. 2. Apply both the parking brake
the charger, to limit charge voltage and the regular brake.
to 14.8 volts. Infrequent Usage: Remove the Do not use the accelerator
12-volt battery black, negative (−) pedal, and be ready to turn off
{ Warning cable from the battery to keep the the engine immediately if it
starts.
battery from running down.
Battery posts, terminals, and 3. Try to start the engine in each
related accessories contain lead Extended Storage: Remove the
12-volt battery black, negative (−) gear. The vehicle should start
and lead compounds, chemicals only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
cable from the battery or use a
(Continued) battery trickle charger.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-24 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle starts in any other 3. With the engine off, turn the Park Brake and P (Park)
position, contact your dealer for ignition on, but do not start the
service. engine. Without applying the
Mechanism Check
regular brake, try to move the
Automatic Transmission shift lever out of P (Park) with { Warning
normal effort. If the shift lever
Shift Lock Control moves out of P (Park), contact When you are doing this check,
Function Check your dealer for service. the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
{ Warning Ignition Transmission and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
When you are doing this
Lock Check of the vehicle in case it begins to
inspection, the vehicle could If equipped with a key type ignition, roll. Be ready to apply the regular
move suddenly. If the vehicle while parked and with the parking brake at once should the vehicle
moves, you or others could be brake set, try to turn the ignition to begin to move.
injured. LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
. The ignition should turn to
1. Before starting this check, be vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
sure there is enough room LOCK/OFF only when the shift your foot on the regular brake, set
around the vehicle. It should be lever is in P (Park). the parking brake.
parked on a level surface. . The ignition key should come . To check the parking brake's
2. Apply the parking brake. Be out only in LOCK/OFF. holding ability: With the engine
ready to apply the regular brake Contact your dealer if service is running and the transmission in
immediately if the vehicle begins required. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
to move. pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-25

. To check the P (Park) 3. With the latch open, pull the
mechanism's holding ability: Caution (Continued) wiper blade down toward the
With the engine running, shift to windshield far enough to release
P (Park). Then release the the windshield. Any damage that it from the J-hooked end of the
parking brake followed by the occurs would not be covered by wiper arm.
regular brake. your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper arm to touch the windshield. 4. Remove the wiper blade.
Contact your dealer if service is
required. 5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
To replace the wiper blade: blade replacement.
Wiper Blade Replacement 1. Pull the wiper assembly away
Windshield wiper blades should be from the windshield.
inspected for wear or cracking.
It is a good idea to clean the wiper
blade assembly on a regular basis.
When worn, or when cleaning is
ineffective, replace the wiper blade.
For proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11-12.
{ Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch
the windshield when no wiper
blade is installed could damage 2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
of the wiper blade where the
(Continued)
wiper arm attaches.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-26 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-30. { Warning
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure The high intensity discharge
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact lighting system operates at a very
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components,
Halogen Bulbs you could be seriously injured.
Have your dealer or a qualified
{ Warning technician service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you The vehicle may have HID
drop or scratch the bulb. You or headlamps. After an HID headlamp
others could be injured. Be sure bulb has been replaced, you may
to read and follow the instructions notice that the beam is a slightly
on the bulb package. different shade than it was originally.
This is normal.
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-27
Headlamps, Front Turn To replace one of the headlamp 6. Install a new bulb in the lamp
bulbs: assembly.
Signal, Sidemarker, and
Parking Lamps 1. Open the hood. See Hood on 7. Connect the electrical connector.
page 10-4. 8. Replace the cap on the back of
Base Headlamp Assembly 2. For the driver side bulb, remove the headlamp assembly by
The base model vehicle has the windshield washer bottle turning it clockwise.
halogen high/low-beam headlamps, filler neck by firmly pulling it 9. For the driver side, reinstall the
a parking/turn signal lamp, and a straight up and out of the bottle. windshield washer bottle filler
sidemarker lamp on the headlamp 3. Remove the cap from the back neck by firmly pushing it straight
assembly. of the headlamp assembly by into the bottle. Ensure that the
turning it counterclockwise. filler neck clip engages into the
underhood electrical center
retainer.
Uplevel Headlamp Assembly
The uplevel model vehicle has a
high intensity discharge (HID) high/
low beam headlamp, a parking/turn
signal lamp, and a sidemarker lamp
on the headlamp assembly.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar For replacement of the headlamp on
4. Disconnect the electrical an HID assembly, contact your
1. Sidemarker Lamp connector. dealer. See High Intensity
2. High/Low-Beam Headlamp 5. Remove the bulb from the lamp Discharge (HID) Lighting on
assembly by turning page 10-26.
3. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp
counterclockwise.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-28 Vehicle Care
3. Remove the bulb from the

socket.
4. Replace the bulb in the bulb
socket.
5. Install the bulb socket in the
headlamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
6. For the driver side, reinstall the
Driver Side Shown, Passenger windshield washer bottle filler
Side Similar neck by firmly pushing it straight
1. Sidemarker Lamp into the bottle. Ensure that the
filler neck clip engages into the 3. Remove the bulb socket by
2. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp underhood electrical center turning counterclockwise and
Front Turn Signal, Parking, and retainer. pulling straight out.
Sidemarker Lamps 4. Remove the bulb from the
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
To replace one of these lamps on a socket by pulling it straight out.
base, or uplevel assembly: Stoplamps, and Back-Up
5. Install the new bulb in the bulb
1. For the driver side bulb, remove Lamps socket.
the windshield washer bottle Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamp 6. Install the bulb socket by turning
filler neck by firmly pulling it clockwise.
straight up and out of the bottle. 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2-15. 7. Install the trunk deck trim.
2. Remove the bulb socket from
the headlamp assembly by 2. Remove the push pins and pull
turning it counterclockwise. back the trunk deck trim.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-29
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal 6. Install the bulb socket into the

Lamp and Back-Up Lamp { Caution taillamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
Improper lamp assembly removal
and installation can cause leaks 7. Install the trunk trim and
and water intrusion which may push pins.
cause damage to the taillamp. Do
not remove the taillamp assembly License Plate Lamp
to replace a bulb. Use the trunk To replace one of these bulbs:
opening to access the bulb.
To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 2-15.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger 2. Remove the push pins and pull
Side Similar the trunk trim away from the
taillamp assembly.
1. Back-Up Lamp
3. Remove the bulb socket from
2. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn the taillamp assembly by turning
Signal Lamp it counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the Passenger Side Shown, Driver
socket by turning the bulb Side Similar
counterclockwise one-quarter 1. Push the lamp assembly toward
turn and pulling it straight out. the right.
5. Install a new bulb into the 2. Pull the lamp assembly down to
socket. remove.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-30 Vehicle Care
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System

Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number High Voltage Devices and
Back-Up Lamp 7440 Wiring
Deck Lid Taillamp 194
Front Parking/Turn 7444 NA
{ Warning
Signal Lamp PLATINUM Exposure to high voltage can
Front 194 cause shock, burns, and even
Sidemarker Lamp death. The high voltage
components in the vehicle can
High/Low-Beam HIR– only be serviced by technicians
3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
Headlamp (Base) 2 (9012) with special training.
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (3). License Plate Lamp W5W LL High voltage components are
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of Stoplamp/Taillamp/ 7443 LL identified by labels. Do not
the bulb socket. Turn Signal Lamp remove, open, take apart,
5. Push the replacement bulb or modify these components.
straight into the bulb socket and For replacement bulbs not listed High voltage cable or wiring has
turn the bulb socket clockwise to here, contact your dealer. orange covering. Do not probe,
install it into the lamp assembly. tamper with, cut, or modify high
voltage cable or wiring.
6. Push the lamp assembly back
into position until the release tab
locks into place.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-31
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses

Overload An electrical overload may cause The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
the lamps to go on and off, or in protected from short circuits by
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
some cases to remain off. Have the fuses. This greatly reduces the
breakers to protect against an
headlamp wiring checked right away chance of damage caused by
electrical system overload.
if the lamps go on and off or electrical problems.
When the current electrical load is remain off.
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens To check a fuse, look at the
and closes, protecting the circuit Windshield Wipers silver-colored band inside the fuse.
until the current load returns to If the band is broken or melted,
If the wiper motor overheats due to
normal or the problem is fixed. This replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
greatly reduces the chance of circuit a bad fuse with a new one of the
wipers will stop until the motor cools
overload and fire caused by identical size and rating.
and will then restart.
electrical problems. Fuses of the same amperage can
Although the circuit is protected
Fuses and circuit breakers protect be temporarily borrowed from
from electrical overload, overload
power devices in the vehicle. another fuse location, if a fuse goes
due to heavy snow or ice may
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
Replace a bad fuse with a new one cause wiper linkage damage.
possible.
of the identical size and rating. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the To identify and check fuses, circuit
If there is a problem on the road and windshield wipers. breakers, and relays, see Engine
a fuse needs to be replaced, the Compartment Fuse Block on
same amperage fuse can be If the overload is caused by an
page 10-32 and Instrument Panel
borrowed. Choose some feature of electrical problem and not snow or
Fuse Block on page 10-36.
the vehicle that is not needed to use ice, be sure to get it fixed.
and replace it as soon as possible.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-32 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block
is on the driver side of the engine
compartment, near the battery.
{ Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical
component on the vehicle may
damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical
component.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-33

2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-34 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped Mini Mini

with all of the fuses, relays, and Usage Usage
Fuses Fuses
features shown.
15 Not Used 33 Right Front
Mini
Usage Heated Seat
Fuses 16 Aero Shutter
1 Transmission Control 34 Antilock Brake
17 Seat Cooling Fans/
System Valve
Module Battery Heated Steering
Wheel 35 Amplifier
2 Engine Control
Module Battery 19 Aero Shutter 37 Right High Beam
3 Air Conditioning 23 Adaptive Cruise 38 Left High Beam
Compressor Clutch Control
46 Cooling Fan
5 Engine Control 29 Passive Entry/Passive
47 Emissions
Module Ignition Start Battery
48 Not Used
8 Ignition Coils – Even 30 Canister Vent
Solenoid 49 Right HID Lighting
9 Ignition Coils – Odd
31 Left Front 50 Left HID Lighting
10 Engine Control
Module Heated Seat 51 Horn/Dual Horn
11 Emissions 32 Right Rear Stop. Turn
52 Cluster Ignition
Tail Lamp, RAP
13 Transmission Control Relay, Ambient 53 Inside Rearview
Module/Chassis Lighting Control, Mirror/Rear Camera
Control Module Interior Switch
Ignition Backlighting
14 SAIR Solenoid
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-35
Mini J-Case Usage Mini Usage

Usage
Fuses Fuses Relays
54 Reflected LED 6 Front Wiper 7 Powertrain
Display, Console LED
12 Starter 9 Cooling Fan K2
Display, Heating,
Ventilation and Air 21 Rear Power Window 13 Cooling Fan K1
Conditioning Module 22 Sunroof 15 Run/Crank
55 Outside Rearview 24 Front Power Window 16 Air Pump Emissions
Mirror
25 Accessory Relay 17 Window/Mirror
56 Windshield Washer
Defogger
26 Antilock Brake
60 Heated Mirror System Pump
62 Rear Camera/Park Micro Usage
27 Electric Parking Brake Relays
Assist/Side Blind
Zone Alert 28 Rear Defogger 1 Air Conditioning
66 Trunk Release 41 Vacuum Pump Compressor Clutch
67 Chassis Control 42 Cooling Fan K2 2 Starter Solenoid
Module 44 Not Used 4 Front Wiper Speed
69 Battery Voltage 45 Cooling Fan K1 5 Front Wiper Control
Sensor
59 Air Pump Emissions 6 Air Pump Solenoid
70 Not Used Emissions
71 Memory Seat 10 Cooling Fan K3
11 Not Used
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-36 Vehicle Care
Micro Usage To access the fuses on vehicles 3. Press the lower edge of the
Relays equipped with a storage bin: cover until the clips engage.
1. Push forward on the top edge of
14 Low Beam HID
the bin to unlatch it.
22 Not Used
2. Press in on the sides of the bin
to release it from the instrument
Instrument Panel Fuse panel.
Block 3. Pivot the door downward,
The instrument panel fuse block is allowing it to hang from the
in the instrument panel, on the instrument panel.
driver side of the vehicle. 4. To close the bin, swing it upward
and push in until closed.
To access the fuses on vehicles not
equipped with a storage bin: Instrument Panel Fuse Block
1. Pull the lower edge of the cover The vehicle may not be equipped
rearward. The clips on the lower with all of the fuses, relays, and
edge will release, and the upper features shown.
edge will fall away from the Mini Fuses Usage
instrument panel. 1 Telematics
2. To replace the cover, hook the
2 Rear Turn Stoplamp,
upper edge of the cover on the
Courtesy Lamps,
instrument panel, and swing the
Back-up Lamps,
lower edge of the cover into
Shift Lock Solenoid,
place.
Puddle Lamps
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-37
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

3 LED Indicator Light 14 Diagnostic Link 25 Tilt/Telescope
Connector Steering Column
4 Radio
15 Airbag/SDM 26 110V AC
5 Display
16 Not Used
6 Power Outlet – J–Case Usage
Console Bin 17 Heater, Ventilation Fuses
and Air Conditioning
7 Power Outlet – 10 Door Unlock
Controller
Forward/
Console Rear 18 Logistics 11 Front Heater,
Ventilation, and Air
8 Trunk Release, 19 Not Used Conditioning Blower
Brake Pedal Apply,
20 Ignition Switch
Keyless Start
Indicators, Hazard 21 Not Used Circuit Usage
Switch Illumination, Breakers
22 Steering Wheel
CHMSL/Brake Controls 12 Power Seat–
Relay, Sidemarker Passenger
Lamps, Washer 23 Left Low Beam/DRL,
Relay, Run/Crank Left Front Turn 13 Power Seat–Driver
Relay Lamp, Left Rear
Park/Stoplamp, Relays Usage
9 Trunk Lamp, Right Child Lock Relay
Low Beam/DRL, K1 Not Used
Right Front Turn 24 Theft Deterrent LED,
Lamp, Right Rear Key Capture K2 Logistic
Park/Stoplamp Solenoid, Run Relay K3 Power Outlet Relay
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-38 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Tires and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread
high-quality tires made by a page 9-10. is badly worn,
leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose replace them.
the warranty manual for the same danger as . Replace any tires that
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The have been damaged by
warranty and where to get resulting crash could impacts with potholes,
service. For additional cause serious injury. curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires
manufacturer. to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
{ Warning Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
checked when the tires center should repair,
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are replace, dismount, and
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires.
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a excess of 56 km/h
impact — such as when (35 mph) on slippery
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive
(Continued) pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-39
See Tire Pressure for traction or performance as winter

. Use only radial ply tires of the
High-Speed Operation on tires on snow or ice-covered roads. same size, load range, and
See Winter Tires on page 10-39. speed rating as the original
page 10-46 for inflation pressure equipment tires.
adjustment for high-speed
driving. Winter Tires Winter tires with the same speed
This vehicle was not originally rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires are designed for increased
This vehicle may come with tires with a lower speed rating are
traction on snow and ice-covered
all-season tires. These tires are chosen, never exceed the tire's
roads. Consider installing winter
designed to provide good overall maximum speed capability.
tires on the vehicle if frequent
performance on most road surfaces
driving on ice or snow covered
and weather conditions. Original
roads is expected. See your dealer Summer Tires
equipment tires designed to GM's
for details regarding winter tire This vehicle may come with high
specific tire performance criteria
availability and proper tire selection. performance summer tires. These
have a TPC specification code
Also, see Buying New Tires on tires have a special tread and
molded onto the sidewall. Original
page 10-54. compound that are optimized for
equipment all-season tires can be
identified by the last two characters With winter tires, there may be maximum dry and wet road
of this TPC code, which will decreased dry road traction, performance. This special tread and
be “MS.” increased road noise, and shorter compound will have decreased
tread life. After changing to winter performance in cold climates, and
Consider installing winter tires on on ice and snow. We recommend
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
the vehicle if frequent driving on installing winter tires on the vehicle
handling and braking.
snow or ice-covered roads is if frequent driving at temperatures
expected. All-season tires provide If using winter tires: below approximately 5°C (40°F) or
adequate performance for most . Use tires of the same brand and on ice or snow covered roads is
winter driving conditions, but they tread type on all four wheel expected. See Winter Tires on
may not offer the same level of positions. page 10-39.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-40 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the digits represent the week (01–
“Tire Size” illustration later in this 52) and the last two digits, the
Useful information about a tire is section. year. For example, the third
molded into its sidewall. The week of the year 2010 would
examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date
passenger vehicle tire and a of 0310.
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
combination of letters and Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to
manufactured date. The first two grade tires based on three
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-41
performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation
traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that
resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the
see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to
Grading on page 10-56. The compact spare tire is for support that load.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact
can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to
maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
support that load. Tire on page 10-65 and If a Tire information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 10-59. inflation see Tire Pressure on
(3) Tire Identification Number page 10-45.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture.
(1) Tire Ply Material : The type Specification): Original
of cord and number of plies in equipment tires designed to
the sidewall and under the tread. GM's specific tire performance
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-42 Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These
exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load
guidelines. number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
The following is an example of a
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
typical passenger vehicle
tire size. For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
item 3 of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
(4) Construction Code: A letter outward on each square inch of
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
of ply construction in the tire. expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: or psi (pounds per square inch).
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
metric tire sizing system. The construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional
the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are
construction.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-43
automatic transmission, power before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See
conditioning. on page 10-45. Vehicle Load Limits on
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a page 9-10.
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See
cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on
tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without page 9-10.
steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo. Intended Outboard Sidewall :
materials. DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward
steel wires wrapped by steel signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle.
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
the rim. Department of Transportation unit for air pressure.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification tire used on light duty trucks and
alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric some multipurpose passenger
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also vehicles.
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer, Load Index: An assigned
Cold Tire Pressure: The production plant, brand, and number ranging from 1 to 279
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production. that corresponds to the load
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight carrying capacity of a tire.
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-44 Vehicle Care
Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that tire in which the ply cords that
which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears extend to the beads are laid at
The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears 90 degrees to the centerline of
molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Rim: A metal support for a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall are seated.
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A between the tread and the bead.
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An
weight, accessory weight, alphanumeric code assigned to
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
a tire indicating the maximum
production options weight. Recommended Inflation speed at which a tire can
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle operate.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown Traction: The friction between
is designed to seat multiplied by the tire and the road surface.
68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10-45 and The amount of grip provided.
Limits on page 9-10.
Vehicle Load Limits on Tread: The portion of a tire that
Occupant Distribution : page 9-10. comes into contact with
Designated seating positions. the road.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
side of an asymmetrical tire that bands, sometimes called wear
has a particular side that faces bars, that show across the tread
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-45
of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/ Vehicle Maximum Load on the

16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire { Caution
When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory Neither tire underinflation nor
on page 10-53. weight, occupant weight, and overinflation is good.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight. Underinflated tires, or tires
Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label that do not have enough air,
information system that provides permanently attached to a can result in:
consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle . Tire overloading and
tire's traction, temperature, and capacity weight and the original overheating which could
treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and lead to a blowout.
determined by tire recommended inflation pressure.
manufacturers using See “Tire and Loading
. Premature or
government testing procedures. Information Label” under Vehicle irregular wear.
The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 9-10. . Poor handling.
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on Tire Pressure
. Reduced fuel economy.
page 10-56. Overinflated tires, or tires that
Tires need the correct amount of
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The have too much air, can
air pressure to operate
result in:
number of designated seating effectively.
positions multiplied by . Unusual wear.
68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated . Poor handling.
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10.
. Rough ride.
. Needless damage from
road hazards.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-46 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading How to Check Recheck the tire pressure with
Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge.
indicates the original equipment gauge to check tire pressure. Return the valve caps on the
tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be valve stems to prevent leaks
inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire. and keep out dirt and moisture.
recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure
minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning Tire Pressure for
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
load carrying capacity. See High-Speed Operation
for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.
more than 1.6 km (1 mi). { Warning
Remove the valve cap from the
How the vehicle is loaded tire valve stem. Press the tire Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
affects vehicle handling and ride (100 mph) or higher, puts an
gauge firmly onto the valve to
comfort. Never load the vehicle additional strain on tires.
get a pressure measurement. Sustained high-speed driving
with more weight than it was If the cold tire inflation pressure
designed to carry. causes excessive heat buildup
matches the recommended and can cause sudden tire failure.
When to Check pressure on the Tire and You could have a crash and you
Loading Information label, no or others could be killed. Some
Check the tires once a month or
further adjustment is necessary. high-speed rated tires require
more. Do not forget the compact
If the inflation pressure is low, inflation pressure adjustment for
spare, if the vehicle has one.
add air until the recommended high-speed operation. When
The cold compact spare tire
pressure is reached. If the speed limits and road conditions
pressure should be at 420 kPa
inflation pressure is high, press are such that a vehicle can be
(60 psi). See Compact Spare
on the metal stem in the center driven at high speeds, make sure
Tire on page 10-65.
of the tire valve to release air. (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-47
Warning (Continued)
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly
System under-inflated.
the tires are rated for high-speed The Tire Pressure Monitor System
operation, in excellent condition, Accordingly, when the low tire
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you
and set to the correct cold tire technology to check tire pressure
inflation pressure for the should stop and check your tires as
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them
vehicle load. the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a
transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under-inflated tire
Vehicles with P245/45R19 and receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can
P245/40R20 size tires require Each tire, including the spare (if lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
inflation pressure adjustment when provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
driving the vehicle at speeds of monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the
160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping
the cold inflation pressure to by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability.
270 kPa (39 psi). vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is not a
Return the tires to the pressure label. (If your vehicle has substitute for proper tire
recommended cold tire inflation tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's
pressure when high-speed driving indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
on page 9-10 and Tire Pressure on should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger
page 10-45. inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire
As an added safety feature, your pressure telltale.
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been
tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-48 Vehicle Care
The TPMS malfunction indicator is See Radio Frequency Statement on located on the instrument cluster.
combined with the low tire pressure page 13-12. If the warning light comes on, stop
telltale. When the system detects a as soon as possible and inflate the
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
approximately one minute and then shown on the Tire and Loading
remain continuously illuminated.
Operation Information label. See Vehicle Load
This sequence will continue upon This vehicle may have a Tire Limits on page 9-10.
subsequent vehicle start-ups as Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
A message to check the pressure in
long as the malfunction exists. The TPMS is designed to warn the
a specific tire displays in the Driver
driver when a low tire pressure
When the malfunction indicator is Information Center (DIC). The low
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
illuminated, the system may not be tire pressure warning light and the
mounted onto each tire and wheel
able to detect or signal low tire DIC warning message come on at
assembly, excluding the spare tire
pressure as intended. TPMS each ignition cycle until the tires are
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety inflated to the correct inflation
sensors monitor the air pressure in
of reasons, including the installation pressure. Using the DIC, tire
the tires and transmits the tire
of replacement or alternate tires or pressure levels can be viewed. For
pressure readings to a receiver
wheels on the vehicle that prevent additional information and details
located in the vehicle.
the TPMS from functioning properly. about the DIC operation and
Always check the TPMS malfunction displays see Driver Information
telltale after replacing one or more Center (DIC) on page 5-26.
tires or wheels on your vehicle to The low tire pressure warning light
ensure that the replacement or may come on in cool weather when
alternate tires and wheels allow the the vehicle is first started, and then
TPMS to continue to function turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
properly. could be an early indicator that the
When a low tire pressure condition
See Tire Pressure Monitor air pressure is getting low and
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
Operation on page 10-48. needs to be inflated to the proper
the low tire pressure warning light
pressure.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-49
A Tire and Loading Information TPMS sensor. The malfunction

label, attached to your vehicle, Caution (Continued) light and DIC message should
shows the size of the original go off after the road tire is
equipment tires and the correct vehicle warranty. Always use only replaced and the sensor
inflation pressure for the tires when the GM approved tire sealant matching process is performed
they are cold. See Vehicle Load available through your dealer or successfully. See “TPMS Sensor
Limits on page 9-10, for an example included in the vehicle. Matching Process” later in this
of the Tire and Loading Information section.
label and its location. Also see Tire TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching
Pressure on page 10-45. Message process was not done or not
The TPMS can warn about a low completed successfully after
The TPMS will not function properly
tire pressure condition but it does rotating the tires. The
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
not replace normal tire malfunction light and the DIC
are missing or inoperable. When the
maintenance. See Tire Inspection message should go off after
system detects a malfunction, the
on page 10-51, Tire Rotation on successfully completing the
low tire warning light flashes for
page 10-51 and Tires on about one minute and then stays on sensor matching process. See
page 10-38. "TPMS Sensor Matching
for the remainder of the ignition
Process" later in this section.
cycle. A DIC warning message also
{ Caution displays. The malfunction light and . One or more TPMS sensors are
DIC warning message come on at missing or damaged. The
Tire sealant materials are not all each ignition cycle until the problem malfunction light and the DIC
the same. A non-approved tire is corrected. Some of the conditions message should go off when the
sealant could damage the TPMS that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and
sensors. TPMS sensor damage on are: the sensor matching process is
caused by using an incorrect tire performed successfully. See
. One of the road tires has been
sealant is not covered by the your dealer for service.
replaced with the spare tire. The
(Continued) spare tire does not have a
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-50 Vehicle Care

. Replacement tires or wheels do should also be performed after The TPMS sensor matching
not match the original equipment replacing a spare tire with a road process is:
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels tire containing the TPMS sensor.
other than those recommended 1. Set the parking brake.
The malfunction light and the DIC
could prevent the TPMS from message should go off at the next 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
functioning properly. See Buying ignition cycle. The sensors are the engine off or place the
New Tires on page 10-54. matched to the tire/wheel positions, vehicle power mode in ON/RUN/
. Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the START. See Ignition Positions
being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire, (Keyless Access) on page 9-14
wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger or Ignition Positions (Key
TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear. Access) on page 9-16.
sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to 3. Make sure the Tire Pressure info
purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS page option is turned on. The
If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool can also be purchased.
properly it cannot detect or signal a info pages on the DIC can be
See Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor turned on and off through the
low tire condition. See your dealer Activation Tool at
for service if the TPMS malfunction Settings menu. See Driver
www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or Information Center (DIC) on
light and DIC message comes on call 1-800-GM TOOLS
and stays on. page 5-26.
(1-800-468-6657).
4. Use the DIC controls on the right
TPMS Sensor Matching There are two minutes to match the side of the steering wheel to
Process first tire/wheel position, and scroll to the Tire Pressure
Each TPMS sensor has a unique five minutes overall to match all four screen under the DIC info page.
identification code. The identification tire/wheel positions. If it takes
code needs to be matched to a new longer, the matching process stops
tire/wheel position after rotating the and must be restarted.
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-51
5. Press and hold the V (Set/ 10. Proceed to the driver side rear . The indicators at three or
Reset) button located in the tire, and repeat the procedure more places around the tire
center of the DIC controls. in Step 7. The horn sounds two can be seen.
times to indicate the sensor
The horn sounds twice to signal identification code has been
. There is cord or fabric
the receiver is in relearn mode matched to the driver side rear showing through the tire's
and the TIRE LEARNING tire, and the TPMS sensor rubber.
ACTIVE message displays on matching process is no longer
the DIC screen.
. The tread or sidewall is
active. The TIRE LEARNING
cracked, cut, or snagged
6. Start with the driver side ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off. deep enough to show cord or
front tire.
fabric.
7. Place the relearn tool against 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
the tire sidewall, near the valve or press STOP to turn the
. The tire has a bump, bulge,
stem. Then press the button to ignition off. or split.
activate the TPMS sensor. 12. Set all four tires to the . The tire has a puncture, cut,
A horn chirp confirms that the recommended air pressure or other damage that cannot
sensor identification code has level as indicated on the Tire be repaired well because of
been matched to this tire and and Loading Information label.
wheel position. the size or location of the
damage.
8. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
front tire, and repeat the Tire Rotation
procedure in Step 7. We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the Tires should be rotated every
9. Proceed to the passenger side vehicle has one, be inspected
rear tire, and repeat the 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
for signs of wear or damage at Maintenance Schedule on
procedure in Step 7.
least once a month. page 11-3.
Replace the tire if:
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-52 Vehicle Care
Tires are rotated to achieve a Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor

uniform wear for all tires. The System. See Tire Pressure
first rotation is the most Monitor Operation on
important. page 10-48.
Anytime unusual wear is Check that all wheel nuts are
noticed, rotate the tires as soon properly tightened. See “Wheel
as possible, check for proper tire Nut Torque” under Capacities
inflation pressure, and check for and Specifications on
damaged tires or wheels. If the page 12-2.
unusual wear continues after the
rotation, check the wheel { Warning
alignment. See When It Is Time Use this rotation pattern when
for New Tires on page 10-53 rotating the tires. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
and Wheel Replacement on parts to which it is fastened, can
Do not include the compact make wheel nuts become loose
page 10-57. spare tire in the tire rotation. after time. The wheel could come
Adjust the front and rear tires to off and cause an accident. When
the recommended inflation changing a wheel, remove any
pressure on the Tire and rust or dirt from places where the
Loading Information label after wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
the tires have been rotated. See
towel can be used; however, use
Tire Pressure on page 10-45
a scraper or wire brush later to
and Vehicle Load Limits on remove all rust or dirt.
page 9-10.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-53
Lightly coat the center of the equipped, be replaced after six

wheel hub with wheel bearing years, regardless of tread wear. The
grease after a wheel change or tire manufacture date is the last four
tire rotation to prevent corrosion digits of the DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN) which is molded into
or rust build-up. Do not get
one side of the tire sidewall. The
grease on the flat wheel first two digits represent the week
mounting surface or on the (01–52) and the last two digits, the
wheel nuts or bolts. year. For example, the third week of
the year 2010 would have a
When It Is Time for New four-digit DOT date of 0310.
Tires Vehicle Storage
Factors such as maintenance, Treadwear indicators are one way to
Tires age when stored normally
temperatures, driving speeds, tell when it is time for new tires.
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
vehicle loading, and road conditions Treadwear indicators appear when
a vehicle that will be stored for at
affect the wear rate of the tires. the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
area away from direct sunlight to
Inspection on page 10-51 and Tire
slow aging. This area should be free
Rotation on page 10-51.
of grease, gasoline, or other
The rubber in tires ages over time. substances that can deteriorate
This also applies to the spare tire, rubber.
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
Parking for an extended period can
never used. Multiple factors
cause flat spots on the tires that
including temperatures, loading
may result in vibrations while
conditions, and inflation pressure
driving. When storing a vehicle for
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-54 Vehicle Care
at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's Winter tires with the same speed
raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the rating as the original equipment
weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread tires may not be available for H,
design, the TPC Spec number V, W, Y and ZR speed rated
Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud tires. Never exceed the winter
GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall tires’ maximum speed capability
specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10-40. when using winter tires with a
original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn lower speed rating.
were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires { Warning
Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
system rating. When Tires could explode during
performance of the vehicle. improper service. Attempting
replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
GM strongly recommends to mount or dismount a tire
performance may be adversely could cause injury or death.
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
Spec rating. Only your dealer or authorized
replaced at the same time. tire service center should
GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and mount or dismount the tires.
system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
vehicle, including brake system Rotation on page 10-51.
performance, ride and handling, However, if it is necessary to
traction control, and tire replace only one axle set of
pressure monitoring worn tires, place the new tires
performance. GM's TPC Spec on the rear axle.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-55
sure they are the same size, may be affected. If the vehicle has
{ Warning load range, speed rating, and electronic systems such as antilock
construction (radial) as the brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Mixing tires of different sizes, control, electronic stability control,
brands, or types may cause original tires.
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance
loss of control of the vehicle, Vehicles that have a tire of these systems can also be
resulting in a crash or other pressure monitoring system affected.
vehicle damage. Use the could give an inaccurate
correct size, brand, and type low-pressure warning if non-TPC { Warning
of tires on all wheels. Spec rated tires are installed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor If different sized wheels are used,
System on page 10-47. there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
{ Warning The Tire and Loading tires not recommended for those
Information label indicates the wheels are selected. This
Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the increases the chance of a crash
vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits and serious injury. Only use GM
rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9-10. specific wheel and tire systems
after many miles of driving. developed for the vehicle, and
A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and have them properly installed by a
suddenly and cause a crash. GM certified technician.
Use only radial-ply tires with
Wheels
the wheels on the vehicle. If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original See Buying New Tires on
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle page 10-54 and Accessories and
If the vehicle tires must be performance, including its braking, Modifications on page 10-3.
replaced with a tire that does not ride and handling characteristics,
have a TPC Spec number, make stability, and resistance to rollover
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-56 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and
Grading 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire
Quality grades can be found tires. graded 100. The relative
where applicable on the tire performance of tires depends
sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
and maximum section width. For their use, however, and may
example: and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they depart significantly from the
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal norm due to variations in driving
Temperature A safety requirements and habits, service practices and
additional General Motors Tire differences in road
The following information relates characteristics and climate.
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
United States National Highway standards. Traction
Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from
(NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent
temperature performance. This These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet
applies only to vehicles sold in pavement as measured under
the United States. The grades Treadwear
controlled conditions on
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a specified government test
most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and
Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may
(UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance.
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test Warning: The traction grade
compact spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-57
straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory surface variations such as troughs
tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is
acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The vibrating when driving on a smooth
hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is road, the tires and wheels may need
to be rebalanced. See your dealer
characteristics. established for a tire that is
for proper diagnosis.
properly inflated and not
Temperature
overloaded. Excessive speed, Wheel Replacement
The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
(the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in Replace any wheel that is bent,
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat cracked, or badly rusted or
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure. corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
ability to dissipate heat when loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
conditions on a specified indoor Balance Some aluminum wheels can be
laboratory test wheel. Sustained repaired. See your dealer if any of
high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to these conditions exist.
material of the tire to degenerate provide the longest tire life and best Your dealer will know the kind of
and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to wheel that is needed.
excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
to sudden tire failure. The grade Each new wheel should have the
are not necessary on a regular same load-carrying capacity,
C corresponds to a level of basis. Consider an alignment check diameter, width, offset, and be
performance which all if there is unusual tire wear or the mounted the same way as the one it
passenger car tires must meet vehicle is significantly pulling to one replaces.
under the Federal Motor Safety side or the other. Some slight pull to
Standard No. 109. Grades B and the left or right, depending on the
A represent higher levels of crown of the road and/or other road
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-58 Vehicle Care
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel

Caution (Continued)
Tire Chains
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts. ground clearance, and tire or tire { Warning
chain clearance to the body and
chassis. Do not use tire chains. There is
{ Warning not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels proper amount of clearance can
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel cause damage to the brakes,
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
{ Warning suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, Replacing a wheel with a used tire chains could cause loss of
and cause loss of control, causing one is dangerous. How it has control and a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct been used or how far it has been
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel driven may be unknown. It could Use another type of traction
nuts for replacement. fail suddenly and cause a crash. device only if its manufacturer
When replacing wheels, use a recommends it for the vehicle's
new GM original equipment tire size combination and road
wheel. conditions. Follow that
{ Caution manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow
The wrong wheel can also cause
and readjust or remove the
problems with bearing life, brake
traction device if it contacts the
cooling, speedometer or
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
odometer calibration, headlamp
If traction devices are used, install
aim, bumper height, vehicle
them on the front tires.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-59
If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blow out
while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for
are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could
on page 10-38. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been be badly injured or killed if the
tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only
blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
what to expect and what to do: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
If a front tire fails, the flat tire that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized to a level place, well off the road,
the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or if possible. Turn on the hazard
steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard
maintain lane position, and then possible. Warning Flashers on page 6-3.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
{ Warning
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ Warning Changing a tire can be
may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip
used in a skid. Stop pressing the it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall
accelerator pedal and steer to dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a
straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire. To
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with help prevent the vehicle from
to a stop, well off the road, moving:
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued) (Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-60 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Tools
2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle 1. Wheel Block
is raised. 2. Flat Tire
4. Do not allow passengers to The following information explains
remain in the vehicle. how to repair or change a tire.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed. 1. Screwdriver
2. Tow Hook (If Equipped)
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
3. Jack
use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of 4. Wrench (In Bag)
the wheel blocks (1). 5. Trim Removal (If Equipped)
6. Fastener (If Equipped)
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the trunk.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-61
2. Remove the spare tire cover. Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-59.
2. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove the wheel nut caps.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
from the cover or center cap.
3. Pull the cover or center cap
away from the wheel. Store the 4. Turn the wheel wrench
wheel cover in the cargo area counterclockwise to loosen all
3. Turn the retainer nut until you have the flat tire the wheel nuts, but do not
counterclockwise and remove repaired or replaced. remove them yet.
the spare tire. Place the spare 5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
tire next to the tire being
changed. 6. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
4. The jack and tools are stored
below the spare tire. Remove
them from their container and { Warning
place them near the tire being
Getting under a vehicle when it is
changed.
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-62 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued) { Warning { Caution

you could be badly injured or Lifting a vehicle and getting under Make sure that the jack lift head
killed. Never get under a vehicle it to do maintenance or repairs is is in the correct position or you
when it is supported only by dangerous without the may damage your vehicle. The
a jack. appropriate safety equipment and repairs would not be covered by
training. If a jack is provided with your warranty.
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
{ Warning anything else, you or others could
Raising the vehicle with the jack be badly injured or killed if the
improperly positioned can vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
damage the vehicle and even is provided with the vehicle, only
make the vehicle fall. To help use it for changing a flat tire.
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift 7. Attach the jack lift assist tool to
head into the proper location the jack by fitting both ends of
before raising the vehicle. the jack and tool over one
another.
8. Place the jack under the vehicle.
9. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire.
The location is indicated by a
notch on the bottom edge of the
body side. The jack must not be
used in any other position.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-63
Warning (Continued)
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
10. Raise the vehicle by turning the 11. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
jack handle clockwise. Raise 12. Remove the flat tire.
the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough
room for the road tire to clear { Warning
the ground.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come 13. Remove any rust or dirt from
off and cause an accident. When the wheel bolts, mounting
changing a wheel, remove any surfaces, and spare wheel.
rust or dirt from places where the
14. Place the compact spare tire
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In on the wheel-mounting surface.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-64 Vehicle Care

Never use oil or grease on bolts aftermarket manufacturer when
or nuts because the nuts might using accessory locking wheel
come loose. The vehicle's wheel nuts. See Capacities and
could fall off, causing a crash. Specifications on page 12-2 for
original equipment wheel nut
15. Reinstall the wheel nuts. torque specifications.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub. { Caution
16. Lower the vehicle by turning 17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
the jack handle Improperly tightened wheel nuts a crisscross sequence, as
counterclockwise. can lead to brake pulsation and shown.
rotor damage. To avoid expensive
18. Lower the jack all the way and
{ Warning brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or sequence and to the proper
incorrectly tightened can cause torque specification. See 19. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
the wheels to become loose or Capacities and Specifications for with the wheel wrench.
come off. The wheel nuts should the wheel nut torque specification. When reinstalling the wheel cover or
be tightened with a torque wrench center cap on the full-size tire,
to the proper torque specification tighten all five plastic caps hand
after replacing. Follow the torque snug, then tighten them with the
specification supplied by the wheel wrench an additional
one-quarter turn.
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-65
To store the compact spare tire, use

{ Caution the shorter mounting bolt.
Wheel covers will not fit on the The compact spare is for temporary
vehicle's compact spare. If you try use only. Replace the compact
to put a wheel cover on the spare tire with a full-size tire as
compact spare, the cover or the soon as you can.
spare could be damaged.
Compact Spare Tire
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{ Warning
Driving with more than one
1. Turn the wrench
{ Warning counterclockwise to remove the
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
Storing a jack, a tire, or other fastener.
handling. This could lead to a
equipment in the passenger 2. Replace the fastener with the crash and you or others could be
compartment of the vehicle could one provided in the foam. injured. Use only one compact
cause injury. In a sudden stop or 3. Turn the wrench clockwise to spare tire at a time.
collision, loose equipment could tighten the fastener.
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place. 4. Replace the foam, jack and If this vehicle has a compact spare
tools, and the tire. tire, it was fully inflated when new;
however, it can lose air over time.
5. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
Check the inflation pressure
to secure the tire.
regularly. It should be 420 kPa
6. Place the floor cover on the (60 psi).
wheel.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-66 Vehicle Care
Stop as soon as possible and check Jump Starting

that the spare tire is correctly { Caution
inflated after being installed on the For more information about the
vehicle. The compact spare tire is When the compact spare is vehicle battery, see Battery on
designed for temporary use only. installed, do not take the vehicle page 10-22.
The vehicle will perform differently through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact If the battery has run down, try to
with the spare tire installed and it is use another vehicle and some
recommended that the vehicle spare can get caught on the rails
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
speed be limited to 80 km/h which can damage the tire, wheel,
Be sure to use the following steps to
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of and other parts of the vehicle.
do it safely.
the spare tire, have the standard tire
repaired or replaced as soon as
convenient and return the spare tire
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
{ Warning
to the storage area.
Do not mix the compact spare tire or Batteries can hurt you. They can
When using a compact spare tire, wheel with other wheels or tires. be dangerous because:
the ABS and Traction Control They will not fit. Keep the spare tire . They contain acid that can
systems may engage until the spare and its wheel together. burn you.
tire is recognized by the vehicle,
especially on slippery roads. Adjust . They contain gas that can
driving to reduce possible { Caution explode or ignite.
wheel slip. . They contain enough
Tire chains will not fit the compact
spare. Using them can damage electricity to burn you.
the vehicle and the chains. Do not If you do not follow these steps
use tire chains on the compact exactly, some or all of these
spare. things can hurt you.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-67
1. Clips
{ Caution 2. Pivot Points
Ignoring these steps could result To remove the battery cover:
in costly damage to the vehicle 1. Release the two rear clips (1).
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Trying to start 2. Lift the battery cover up towards
the vehicle by pushing or pulling it the front of the vehicle to release
it from the pivot points (2) and
will not work, and it could damage
remove.
the vehicle.
3. Reverse Steps 1–2 to reinstall
the battery cover.
The vehicle has a battery cover
which must be removed to gain The jump start positive (+) terminal
1. Jump Start Positive (+)
access to the battery for jump is under a trim cover. It is in under
Terminal
starting. the battery cover on the driver side
of the vehicle. You should always 2. Jump Start Negative (-)
use this remote positive (+) terminal. Grounding Post
The jump start negative (-) ground 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
post is on the driver side shock have a 12-volt battery with a
tower. negative ground system.
These locations are used instead of

a direct connection to the battery.
{ Caution
If the other vehicle does not have
a 12-volt system with a negative
ground, both vehicles can be
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-68 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued) Caution (Continued) { Warning

damaged. Only use a vehicle that warranty. Whenever possible, turn Using a match near a battery can
has a 12-volt system with a off or unplug all accessories on cause battery gas to explode.
negative ground for jump starting. either vehicle when jump starting. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
2. Position the two vehicles so that 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF Use a flashlight if you need more
they are not touching. and switch off all lights and light.
3. To avoid the possibility of the accessories in both vehicles, Be sure the battery has enough
vehicles rolling, set the parking except the hazard warning water. You do not need to add
brake firmly on both vehicles flashers if needed. water to the battery installed in
involved in the jump start your new vehicle. But if a battery
procedure. Put an automatic { Warning has filler caps, be sure the right
transmission in P (Park) or a amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
manual transmission in Neutral An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that
before setting the parking brake. when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present.
{ Caution clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan. Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
If any accessories are left on or
you. If you accidentally get it in
plugged in during the jump
your eyes or on your skin, flush
starting procedure, they could be
the place with water and get
damaged. The repairs would not
medical help immediately.
be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-69
7. Connect one end of the black

{ Warning negative (–) cable to the { Caution
negative (–) terminal of the good
Fans or other moving engine battery. Use a remote If the jumper cables are
parts can injure you badly. Keep negative (−) terminal if the connected or removed in the
your hands away from moving vehicle has one. wrong order, electrical shorting
parts once the engine is running. may occur and damage the
Do not let the other end touch vehicle. The repairs would not be
anything until the next step. The covered by the vehicle warranty.
5. Connect one end of the red other end of the negative (–)
positive (+) cable to the jump Always connect and remove the
cable does not go to the dead
start positive (+) terminal (1). jumper cables in the correct order,
battery. It goes to a remote
Use a remote positive (+) negative (–) post on the driver making sure that the cables do
terminal if the vehicle has one. side shock tower. not touch each other or other
metal.
6. Do not let the other end of the 8. Connect the other end of the
red positive (+) cable touch black negative (–) cable to the
metal. Connect it to the jump start negative (-) grounding Jumper Cable Removal
positive (+) terminal of the good post (2). Reverse the sequence exactly when
battery. Use a remote removing the jumper cables.
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 9. Start the engine in the vehicle
has one. with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
10. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-70 Vehicle Care

. Is the vehicle ready to be
Towing the Vehicle of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly towed? Just as preparing the
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
{ Caution vehicle with all four wheels on the the vehicle is prepared to be
ground. Dolly towing is towing the towed.
Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle with two wheels on the
vehicle may cause damage. The Dinghy Towing
ground and two wheels up on a
damage would not be covered by device known as a dolly.
the vehicle warranty.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
Have the vehicle towed on a wheel towing:
lift tow truck. A flatbed car carrier
could damage the vehicle. The
. What is the towing capacity of
wheel lift tow truck must raise the the towing vehicle? Be sure to
rear of the vehicle and wheel dollies read the tow vehicle
must be used to lift the front wheels manufacturer's
off the ground. recommendations.
Consult your dealer or a

. How far will the vehicle be
professional towing service if the towed? Some vehicles have
disabled vehicle must be towed. restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow. { Caution
Recreational Vehicle . Does the vehicle have the
proper towing equipment? See If the vehicle is towed with all four
Towing your dealer or trailering wheels on the ground, the
Recreational vehicle towing means professional for additional advice drivetrain components could be
towing the vehicle behind another and equipment damaged. The repairs would not
vehicle – such as behind a motor recommendations. (Continued)
home. The two most common types
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-71
Tow the vehicle with the two rear

Caution (Continued) wheels on the ground and the front { Caution
wheels on a dolly.
be covered by the vehicle Towing the vehicle from the rear
warranty. Do not tow the vehicle To tow the vehicle with two wheels could damage it. Also, repairs
with all four wheels on the on the ground and a dolly: would not be covered by the
ground. 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. vehicle warranty. Never have the
vehicle towed from the rear.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
The vehicle was not designed to be
3. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used. See
“Dolly Towing” following.
Dolly Towing
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-72 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

washed. This could cause damage
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
Locks manufacturer directions regarding comply with the car wash
Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary instructions. The windshield wiper
Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and and rear window wiper, if equipped,
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any must be off. Remove any
locks greased after using. See accessories that may be damaged
vehicle care product.
Recommended Fluids and or interfere with the car wash
Lubricants on page 11-11. equipment.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
Washing the Vehicle { Caution washing and after, to remove all
To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure are allowed to dry on the surface,
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) they could stain.
to the surface of the vehicle. Use
of power washers exceeding Dry the finish with a soft, clean
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
spotting.
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals.
agents as they can damage the Finish Care
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic This symbol e is on any Application of aftermarket clearcoat
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical sealant/wax materials is not
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power recommended. If painted surfaces
warranty. Approved cleaning are damaged, see your dealer to
(Continued) have the damage assessed and
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-73
repaired. Foreign materials such as The bright metal moldings on the

calcium chloride and other salts, ice { Caution vehicle are aluminum or stainless
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree steel. To prevent damage always
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from Machine compounding or follow these cleaning instructions:
industrial chimneys, etc., can aggressive polishing on a
. Be sure the molding is cool to
damage the vehicle's finish if they basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only the touch before applying any
remain on painted surfaces. Wash cleaning solution.
the vehicle as soon as possible. non-abrasive waxes and polishes
If necessary, use non-abrasive that are made for a basecoat/ . Use a cleaning solution
cleaners that are marked safe for clearcoat paint finish on the approved for aluminum or
painted surfaces to remove foreign vehicle. stainless steel. Some cleaners
matter. are highly acidic or contain
alkaline substances and can
Occasional hand waxing or mild To keep the paint finish looking new, damage the moldings.
polishing should be done to remove keep the vehicle garaged or
residue from the paint finish. See covered whenever possible. . Always dilute a concentrated
your dealer for approved cleaning cleaner according to the
products. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal manufacturer’s instructions.
Moldings
Do not apply waxes or polishes to . Do not use chrome cleaners.
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
{ Caution . Do not use cleaners that are not
intended for automotive use.
as damage can occur. Failure to clean and protect the . Use a nonabrasive wax on the
bright metal moldings can result vehicle after washing to protect
in a hazy white finish or pitting. and extend the molding finish.
This damage would not be
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-74 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Aftermarket appearance caps or Shutter System
Lenses, Emblems, Decals and covers while the lamps are
illuminated, due to excessive
Stripes heat generated.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses,
{ Caution
emblems, decals and stripes. Follow Failure to clean lamps properly
instructions under "Washing the can cause damage to the lamp
Vehicle" previously in this section. cover that would not be covered
Lamp covers are made of plastic, by the vehicle warranty.
and some have a UV protective
coating. Do not clean or wipe them Air Intakes
while they are dry.
Clear debris from the air intakes,
Do not use any of the following on The vehicle may have a shutter
between the hood and windshield,
lamp covers: system designed to help increase
when washing the vehicle.
. Abrasive or caustic agents. fuel economy. Keep the shutter
system clean for proper operation.
. Washer fluids and other cleaning
agents in higher concentrations Windshield and Wiper Blades
than suggested by the Clean the outside of the windshield
manufacturer. with glass cleaner.
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, Clean rubber blades using lint-free
or other harsh cleaners. cloth or paper towel soaked with
. Ice scrapers or other hard items. windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-75
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax least once a year. Hot. dry climates or Chrome
treatments may cause wiper may require more frequent
streaking. application. Black marks from Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
rubber material on painted surfaces soap and water to clean the wheels.
Replace the wiper blades if they are After rinsing thoroughly with clean
worn or damaged. Damage can be can be removed by rubbing with a
clean cloth. See Recommended water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
caused by extreme dusty A wax may then be applied.
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, Fluids and Lubricants on
snow, and ice. page 11-11.
Tires
{ Caution
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Chrome wheels and other chrome
to the windshield, carefully loosen clean the tires. trim may be damaged if the
them or thaw them. Damaged wiper vehicle is not washed after driving
blades should be replaced. See on roads that have been sprayed
Wiper Blade Replacement on { Caution with magnesium, calcium,
page 10-25. Using petroleum-based tire or sodium chloride. These
Heavy snow or ice can overload the dressing products on the vehicle chlorides are used on roads for
wipers. If the wiper motor overheats, may damage the paint finish and/ conditions such as ice and dust.
the windshield wipers will stop until or tires. When applying a tire Always wash the chrome with
the motor cools and the wiper dressing, always wipe off any soap and water after exposure.
control is turned off. See Electrical overspray from all painted
System Overload on page 10-31. surfaces on the vehicle.
Weatherstrips
Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-76 Vehicle Care
Inspect power steering for proper repair shop applies anti-corrosion

{ Caution hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, material to parts repaired or
chafing, etc. replaced to restore corrosion
To avoid surface damage, do not protection.
use strong soaps, chemicals, Visually check constant velocity joint
abrasive polishes, cleaners, boots and axle seals for leaks. Original manufacturer replacement
brushes, or cleaners that contain parts will provide the corrosion
Body Component Lubrication protection while maintaining the
acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. Use only Lubricate all key lock cylinders, vehicle warranty.
approved cleaners. Also, never hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel
fuel door hinge, unless the Finish Damage
drive a vehicle with aluminum or
components are plastic. Applying Quickly repair minor chips and
chrome-plated wheels through an
silicone grease on weatherstrips scratches with touch-up materials
automatic car wash that uses
with a clean cloth will make them available from your dealer to avoid
silicone carbide tire cleaning last longer, seal better, and not stick corrosion. Larger areas of finish
brushes. Damage could occur or squeak. damage can be corrected in your
and the repairs would not be dealer's body and paint shop.
covered by the vehicle warranty. Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall
Chemical Paint Spotting
Steering, Suspension, and use plain water to flush any Airborne pollutants can fall upon
Chassis Components corrosive materials from the and attack painted vehicle surfaces
underbody. Take care to thoroughly causing blotchy, ring-shaped
Visually inspect steering, clean any areas where mud and discolorations, and small, irregular
suspension, and chassis other debris can collect. dark spots etched into the paint
components for damaged, loose, surface. See “Finish Care”
or missing parts or signs of wear at Sheet Metal Damage previously in this section.
least once a year. If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-77
Interior Care remain on the surface being 3.8 L (1 gal) of water.

cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time. leave a residue that creates
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
that newspapers or dark garments or caustic soap.
that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
furnishings can also permanently and adhere to all safety instructions . Do not heavily saturate the
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning.
interior. interior, maintain adequate . Do not use solvents or cleaners
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove windows.
dust from knobs and crevices on the Interior Glass
instrument cluster. Using a mild To prevent damage, do not clean
soap solution, immediately remove the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
repellent from all interior surfaces or . Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth.
permanent damage may result. sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
Your dealer may have products for the interior glass with plain water.
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners . Never use a brush with stiff
specifically designed for the bristles.
surfaces being cleaned to prevent { Caution
. Never rub any surface
permanent damage. Apply all
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use
cleaners directly to the cleaning
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
on any switches or controls. . Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or
Cleaners should be removed dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage
quickly. Never allow cleaners to degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger.
use approximately 20 drops per
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-78 Vehicle Care
Cleaning the windshield with water Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the
during the first three to six months soil and gently rub toward the
Start by vacuuming the surface
of ownership will reduce tendency center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
using a soft brush attachment. If a
to fog. a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being
prevent forcing the soil in to the
Speaker Covers used during vacuuming, only use it
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the
gently, so that the speaker will not as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no
be damaged. Clean spots with just following techniques: longer any color transfer from
water and mild soap. the soil to the cleaning cloth.
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
Coated Moldings towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely
Coated moldings should be cleaned. more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap
solution followed only by plain
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
. For solid soils, remove as much
water.
sponge or soft lint-free cloth as possible prior to vacuuming.
dampened with water. If the soil is not completely
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to
. When heavily soiled, use warm 1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
soapy water. colorfast cloth with water. cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
Microfiber cloth is recommended hidden area for colorfastness before
to prevent lint transfer to the using a commercial upholstery
fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-79
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,

and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued)
Radio Displays Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and these solvents can permanently
For vehicles with high gloss Natural Open Pore Wood change the appearance and feel
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended.
Before wiping the surface with the dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not use cleaners that increase
brush to remove dirt that could thorough cleaning, use a soft gloss, especially on the instrument
scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth dampened with a panel. Reflected glare can decrease
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to mild soap solution. visibility through the windshield
clean. Never use window cleaners
under certain conditions.
or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately,
{ Caution
using mild soap. Do not use bleach Soaking or saturating leather, { Caution
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly especially perforated leather, as
and air dry before next use. Use of air fresheners may cause
well as other interior surfaces, permanent damage to plastics
may cause permanent damage. and painted surfaces. If an air
{ Caution Wipe excess moisture from these freshener comes in contact with
surfaces after cleaning and allow any plastic or painted surface in
Do not attach a device with a
them to dry naturally. Never use the vehicle, blot immediately and
suction cup to the display. This
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot clean with a soft cloth dampened
may cause damage and would
removers. Do not use cleaners with a mild soap solution.
not be covered by the warranty.
that contain silicone or wax-based Damage caused by air fresheners
products. Cleaners containing would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-80 Vehicle Care

. Use the floor mat with the
Cargo Cover and Floor Mats correct side up. Do not turn
Convenience Net
it over.
Wash with warm water and mild { Warning . Do not place anything on top of
detergent. Do not use chlorine
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and If a floor mat is the wrong size or the driver side floor mat.
then dry completely. is not properly installed, it can . Use only a single floor mat on
interfere with the pedals. the driver side.
Care of Safety Belts Interference with the pedals can . Do not place one floor mat on
Keep belts clean and dry. cause unintended acceleration top of another.
and/or increased stopping
{ Warning distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. mat does not interfere with the Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
It may severely weaken them. In pedals. to unlock each retainer and remove.
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection. Use the following guidelines for
Clean safety belts only with mild proper floor mat usage:
soap and lukewarm water.
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Care 10-81
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snapping into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
10-82 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Recommended Fluids and transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Maintenance Replacement needs. have your dealer perform these
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-13 competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
There may need to be more competitive driving. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services -
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: service.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10-8.
the Tire and Loading Information Required Services - Severe chart.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Once a Month
on page 9-10. { Warning . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving page 10-45.
be dangerous and can cause
limits. serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
. Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 10-51.
Fuel on page 9-53. required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
Refer to the information in the and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Maintenance Schedule Additional If they are not, see your dealer to page 10-19.
Required Services - Normal chart. have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Engine Oil Change
The Additional Required Services -
Service Work on page 10-3. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Severe are for vehicles that are:
SOON message displays, have the
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic engine oil and filter changed within
in hot weather. the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
. Mainly driven in hilly or under the best conditions, the
mountainous terrain. engine oil life system may not
indicate the need for vehicle service
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
for up to a year. The engine oil and

. Check engine coolant level. See or missing parts or signs of
filter must be changed at least once Engine Coolant on page 10-15. wear. See Exterior Care on
a year and the oil life system must . Check windshield washer fluid page 10-72.
be reset. Your trained dealer level. See Washer Fluid on . Check restraint system
technician can perform this work. page 10-19. components. See Safety System
If the engine oil life system is reset Check on page 3-18.
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the blades for wear, cracking, . Visually inspect fuel system for
last service. Reset the oil life or contamination. See Exterior damage or leaks.
system when the oil is changed. Care on page 10-72. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
. Visually inspect exhaust system
See Engine Oil Life System on and nearby heat shields for
page 10-10. See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10-25. loose or damaged parts.
Tire Rotation and Required . Check tire inflation pressures.
. Lubricate body components. See
Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on Exterior Care on page 10-72.
7,500 mi page 10-45. . Check starter switch. See Starter
Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire Switch Check on page 10-23.
the vehicle, and perform the Inspection on page 10-51. . Check automatic transmission
following services. See Tire . shift lock control function. See
Rotation on page 10-51. Visually check for fluid leaks.
Automatic Transmission Shift
. Check engine oil level and oil
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Lock Control Function Check on
life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10-24.
change engine oil and filter, and page 10-12. . Check ignition transmission lock.
reset oil life system. See Engine . Inspect brake system. See Ignition Transmission Lock
Oil on page 10-8 and Engine Oil Check on page 10-24.
. Visually inspect steering,
Life System on page 10-10.
suspension, and chassis
components for damaged, loose,
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Check parking brake and . Visually inspect gas strut for
automatic transmission park signs of wear, cracks, or other
mechanism. See Park Brake and damage. Check the hold open
P (Park) Mechanism Check on ability of the strut. See your
page 10-24. dealer if service is required.
. Check accelerator pedal for . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
damage, high effort, or binding. if equipped. See Sunroof on
Replace if needed. page 2-24.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
Replace brake fluid. (6) @
Footnotes — Maintenance Replacement may also be needed if If driving in dusty conditions, inspect
Schedule Additional Required there is a reduction in air flow, the air filter at each engine oil
Services - Normal excessive window fogging, or odors. change.
(1) Or every two years, whichever (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. More frequent and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. See Cooling System on
replacement may be needed if the routing, and condition. page 10-14.
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
(3) Or every four years, whichever
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
comes first.
or areas with high dust levels.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever (6) Or every 10 years, whichever

comes first. Inspect for fraying, comes first.
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. @ @ @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
Replace brake fluid. (6) @
Footnotes — Maintenance or areas with high dust levels. (3) Or every four years, whichever
Schedule Additional Required Replacement may also be needed if comes first.
Services - Severe there is a reduction in air flow, If driving in dusty conditions, inspect
(1) Or every two years, whichever excessive window fogging, or odors. the air filter at each engine oil
comes first. More frequent (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines change.
replacement may be needed if the and hoses for proper hook-up,
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy routing, and condition.
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
(4) Or every five years, whichever Special Application Additional

comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-14. Services Maintenance and Care
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
comes first. Inspect for fraying, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
excessive cracking, or damage; components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
replace, if needed. 3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever . Have underbody flushing service performance, additional
comes first. performed. See "Underbody maintenance services may be
Maintenance" in Exterior Care required.
on page 10-72. It is recommended that your dealer
perform these services — their
trained dealer technicians know
your vehicle best. Your dealer can
also perform a thorough
assessment with a multi-point
inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to
explain the services and conditions
to look for that may indicate
services are required.
Battery
The battery supplies power to start
the engine and operate any
additional electrical accessories.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. To avoid break-down or failure to . Trained dealer technicians have Lamps
start the vehicle, maintain a access to tools and equipment
battery with full cranking power. to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
. Trained dealer technicians have important to see and be seen on
the diagnostic equipment to test engineered for the vehicle.
the road.
the battery and ensure that the Fluids
connections and cables are
. Signs that the headlamps need
corrosion-free. Proper fluid levels and approved attention include dimming, failure
fluids protect the vehicle’s systems to light, cracking, or damage.
Belts and components. See The brake lamps need to be
. Belts may need replacing if they Recommended Fluids and checked periodically to ensure
squeak or show signs of Lubricants on page 11-11 for GM that they light when braking.
cracking or splitting. approved fluids. . With a multi-point inspection,
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Engine oil and windshield your dealer can check the lamps
access to tools and equipment washer fluid levels should be and note any concerns.
to inspect the belts and checked at every fuel fill.
Shocks and Struts
recommend adjustment or . Instrument cluster lights may
replacement when necessary. come on to indicate that fluids Shocks and struts help aid in control
may be low and need to be for a smoother ride.
Brakes filled. . Signs of wear may include
Brakes stop the vehicle and are steering wheel vibration, bounce/
crucial to safe driving. Hoses
sway while braking, longer
. Signs of brake wear may include Hoses transport fluids and should stopping distance, or uneven
chirping, grinding, or squealing be regularly inspected to ensure tire wear.
noises, or difficulty stopping. that there are no cracks or leaks. . As part of the multi-point
With a multi-point inspection, your
inspection, trained dealer
dealer can inspect the hoses and
technicians can visually inspect
advise if replacement is needed.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care

. Signs of damage include
of leaking, blown seals, scratches, cracks, and chips.
To help keep the vehicle looking like
or damage, and can advise new, vehicle care products are
. Trained dealer technicians can
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For inspect the windshield and
Tires information on how to clean and recommend proper replacement
protect the vehicle’s interior and if needed.
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining Wiper Blades
page 10-77 and Exterior Care on
the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-72. Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and can reduce the risk of tire and kept in good condition to
failure. Wheel Alignment provide a clear view.
. Signs that the tires need to be Wheel alignment is critical for . Signs of wear include streaking,
replaced include three or more ensuring that the tires deliver skipping across the windshield,
visible treadwear indicators; cord optimal wear and performance. and worn or split rubber.
or fabric showing through the . Signs that the alignment may
rubber; cracks or cuts in the
. Trained dealer technicians can
need to be adjusted include check the wiper blades and
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or pulling, improper vehicle
split in the tire. replace them when needed.
handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Trained dealer technicians can . Your dealer has the required
inspect and recommend the right equipment to ensure proper
tires. Your dealer can also wheel alignment.
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth Windshield
vehicle operation at all speeds. For safety, appearance, and the
Your dealer sells and services best viewing, keep the windshield
name brand tires. clean and clear.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 ® specification of the proper
SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended.
See Engine Oil on page 10-8.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-15.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category
Release Pawl LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.5L L4 Engine 20972654 A3174C
3.6L V6 Engine 22753242 A3176C
Engine Oil Filter
2.5L L4 Engine 12640445 PF64
3.6L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
CJ2 13356914 CF184
C67 13356916 CF185
Spark Plugs
2.5L L4 Engine 12627160 41-115
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 92231676 —
Passenger Side – 47.5 cm (18.7 in) 22846938 —
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Odometer
Reading
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Odometer
Reading
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
This label, in either the glove box or
the trunk area, has the following
information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.5L L4 Engine 7.4 L 7.8 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 9.4 L 9.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.5L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
2.5L L4 Engine 70.0 L 18.5 gal
3.6L V6 Engine 70.0 L 18.5 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y 110 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.5L L4 Engine L Automatic 0.09–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
3.6L V6 Engine 3 Automatic 0.09–1.10 mm (0.037–
0.043 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.6L V6 Engine
2.5L L4 Engine
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-11 of your dealership or the general
Radio Frequency manager.
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800–222–1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business Bureaus,
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View and
the U.S. can communicate with print dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio (if equipped), and OnStar
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
account information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
alerts, OnStar onboard vehicle
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14

. Model, year, color, and license driver if they decide the claims are must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. made too often, or the same type of properly inflated. It is the owner's
. Odometer reading, Vehicle claim is made many times. responsibility for the repair or
Identification Number (VIN), and replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem.
Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Roadside Assistance
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification . Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the Service is not provided if a vehicle
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nearest Chevrolet dealer for is in an area that is not accessible
General Motors North America and warranty service, or if the vehicle to the service vehicle or is not a
Chevrolet reserve the right to make was in a crash and cannot be regularly traveled or maintained
any changes or discontinue the driven. Assistance is not given public road, which includes ice and
Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the winter roads. Off-road use is not
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow. covered.
General Motors North America and . Flat Tire Change: Service to
Chevrolet reserve the right to limit change a flat tire with the spare
services or payment to an owner or tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Services Specific to permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles emergency road service. You will your dealership, let them know this,
receive payment, up to $100, and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement after sending the original receipt
is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel If your dealer requests you to bring
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are
delivery may be restricted. Mechanical failures may be
Propane and other fuels are not urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for
provided through this service. parts and labor for repairs not same-day repair.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
150 kilometers from where your Appointments To enhance your ownership
trip was started to qualify. experience, we and our participating
When the vehicle requires warranty dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and Transportation, a customer support
Limited requires
request an appointment. By program for vehicles with the
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant Coverage period in Canada),
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your extended powertrain, and/or
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your hybrid-specific warranties in both
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience. the U.S. and Canada.
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
payment. into the service department options are available to assist in
. immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Courtesy Transportation is not a by GM for shuttle service. If U.S. It may not be possible to provide a
part of the New Vehicle Limited customers arrange their own like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Warranty. A separate booklet transportation, limited
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimbursement for reasonable fuel Additional Program
Owner Assistance Information” expenses may be available. Claim Information
furnished with each new vehicle amounts should reflect actual costs All program options, such as shuttle
provides detailed warranty coverage and be supported by original service, may not be available at
information. receipts. See your dealer for every dealer. Contact your dealer
information. for specific availability.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle General Motors reserves the right to
Warranty service can generally be
For an overnight warranty repair, the unilaterally modify, change,
completed while you wait. However,
dealer may provide an available or discontinue Courtesy
if you are unable to do so, your
courtesy rental vehicle or provide for Transportation at any time and to
dealer may offer the following
reimbursement of a rental vehicle. resolve all questions of claim
transportation options:
Reimbursement is limited and must eligibility pursuant to the terms and
Shuttle Service be supported by original receipts as conditions described herein at its
well as a signed and completed sole discretion.
This includes one-way or round-trip
shuttle service within reasonable rental agreement and meet state/
time and distance parameters of provincial, local, and rental vehicle Collision Damage Repair
your dealer's area. provider requirements. If the vehicle is involved in a
Requirements vary and may include collision and it is damaged, have the
Public Transportation or Fuel minimum age requirements,
Reimbursement damage repaired by a qualified
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. technician using the proper
If overnight warranty repairs are Additional fees such as fuel usage equipment and quality replacement
needed, and public transportation is charges, taxes, levies, usage fees, parts. Poorly performed collision
used, the expense must be excessive mileage, or rental usage repairs diminish the vehicle resale
supported by original receipts and beyond the completion of the repair
within the maximum amount allowed are also your responsibility.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment.
related failures are not covered by
Collision Parts that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs by using
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-25. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions ORDER TOLL FREE:
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle. 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
repair valuation based on that For Credit Card Orders Only
insurance company's collision policy Owner Information
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational Or write to:
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The Helm, Incorporated
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the Attention: Customer Service
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all 47911 Halyard Drive
models. Plymouth, MI 48170
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Prices are subject to change without
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty notice and without incurring
Manual. obligation. Allow ample time for
Service Manuals
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 – delivery.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
and repair information on the shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
engines, transmission, axle,
Without Pouch: Owner Manual only. funds.
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Radio Frequency
Service Bulletins Identification (RFID)
shipping fees.
Service Bulletins give additional RFID technology is used in some
technical service information Current and Past Models
vehicles for functions such as tire
needed to knowledgeably service Technical Service Bulletins and pressure monitoring and ignition
General Motors cars and trucks. Manuals are available for current system security, as well as in
and past model GM vehicles.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
connection with conveniences such 2. The device must accept any Reporting Safety
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) interference received, including
transmitters for remote door locking/ interference that may cause Defects
unlocking and starting, and undesired operation of the
in-vehicle transmitters for garage device. Reporting Safety Defects
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
Changes or modifications to any of to the United States
these systems by other than an Government
personal information or link with any authorized service facility could void
other GM system containing authorization to use this equipment. If you believe that your vehicle
personal information.
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
Radio Frequency death, you should immediately
Statement inform the National Highway
This vehicle has systems that Traffic Safety Administration
operate on a radio frequency that (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the General Motors.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with If NHTSA receives similar
Industry Canada Standards complaints, it may open an
RSS-GEN/210/220/310. investigation, and if it finds that
Operation is subject to the following
a safety defect exists in a group
two conditions: of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
1. The device may not cause However, NHTSA cannot
harmful interference.
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian Chevrolet Motor Division
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: Chevrolet Customer Assistance
1-800-424-9153); go to http://
Government Center
www.safercar.gov; or write to: If you live in Canada, and you P.O. Box 33170
believe that the vehicle has a safety Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Administrator, NHTSA defect, notify Transport Canada
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
immediately, and notify General
Washington, D.C. 20590 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
(French), or write:
You can also obtain other Transport Canada at
information about motor vehicle 1-800-333-0510 or write to: General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
safety from http:// Transport Canada
CA1-163-005
www.safercar.gov. Road Safety Branch
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
80 rue Noel
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Gatineau , QC J8Z 0A1
Reporting Safety Defects

to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a
The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under
about the vehicle’s performance and bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender,
vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties,
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation.
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
.
special equipment, can read the
retain personal preferences, such as How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar Terms and Conditions and
consent of the lessee; in response Privacy Statement on the OnStar
to an official request by police or website.
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through Infotainment System
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM If the vehicle is equipped with a
collects or receives may also be navigation system as part of the
used for GM research needs or may infotainment system, use of the
be made available to others for system may result in the storage of
research purposes, where a need is destinations, addresses, telephone
shown and the data is not tied to a numbers, and other trip information.
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. See the infotainment manual for
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
OnStar®
If the vehicle is equipped with
OnStar® and has an active
subscription, additional data may be
collected through the OnStar
system. This includes information
about the vehicle’s operation;
collisions involving the vehicle; the
use of the vehicle and its features;
and, in certain situations, the
location and approximate GPS
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
2 NOTES
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview vehicle, including location

information. See OnStar’s Terms
and Conditions and Privacy
Statement for more details including
OnStar Overview
system limitations at
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
OnStar Services www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 The OnStar system status light is
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 next to the OnStar buttons. If the
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 = Voice Command Button status light is:
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Q Blue OnStar Button
Vehicle Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
. Solid Green: System is on.
> Emergency Button . Flashing Green: On a call.
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional This vehicle may be equipped with a . Red: Indicates a problem.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar
. Off: System is off. Press the blue
Advisor for Emergency, Security, OnStar button twice to speak
Navigation, Connection, and with an OnStar Advisor.
Diagnostic Services. OnStar Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
services may require a paid (1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
subscription. OnStar requires the Advisor.
vehicle battery and electrical
system, cellular service, and GPS Press = to:
satellite signals to be available and
operating. OnStar acts as a link to
. Make a call, end a call,
existing public emergency service or answer an incoming call.
providers. OnStar may collect . Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
information about you and your voice commands.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
14-2 OnStar
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn . Be a Good Samaritan or
Navigation voice commands. respond to an AMBER Alert. OnStar Services
Requires a specific OnStar . Get assistance in severe
subscription plan. weather or other crisis and
Emergency
. Obtain the WiFi network name, evacuation routes. With Automatic Crash Response,
or Service Set Identifier or SSID, the OnStar system can
and passphrase (if equipped). automatically connect to an OnStar
Emergency Advisor. The built-in
Press Q to connect to a live system can automatically connect to
Advisor to: help in certain crashes.
. Verify account information or
Press > to connect to an OnStar
update contact information.
Emergency Advisor. GPS
. Get driving directions. Requires technology is used to identify the
a specific OnStar vehicle location and can provide
subscription plan.. important information to emergency
. Receive On-Demand personnel. OnStar Emergency
Diagnostics for a check of the Advisors are trained to provide
vehicle’s key operating systems. assistance and link to existing
public emergency service providers
. Receive Roadside Assistance. in emergency situations.
. Manage WiFi Settings (if With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially
equipped). trained Crisis Advisors are available
Press > to get a priority connection 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to
provide a central point of contact,
to an OnStar Emergency Advisor
assistance, and information if a
available 24/7 to:
crisis occurs.
. Get help for an emergency.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
OnStar 14-3
Security 4. Follow the voice-guided 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds

commands. with the last direction given, then
OnStar provides services including responds with “OnStar ready,”
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Using Voice Commands then a tone.
Ignition Block, and Roadside During a Planned Route
Assistance, if equipped. OnStar can Get My Destination
unlock the vehicle doors remotely, Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
if equipped with automatic door 1. Press =. System responds:
locks, and can help police locate the “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say
vehicle if it is stolen. “Cancel route.” System 2. Say “Get my destination.”
responds: “Do you want to System responds with the
Navigation cancel directions?” address and the distance to the
destination, then responds with
OnStar navigation requires a 2. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
specific OnStar subscription plan. “OK, request completed, thank
you, goodbye.” Other Navigation Services
Press Q to receive directions or Available from OnStar
have them sent to the vehicle Route Preview
navigation screen, if equipped. OnStar eNav: Subscribers can
Destinations can also be forwarded 1. Press =. System responds: send destinations from
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com. “OnStar ready,” then a tone. MapQuest.com to the vehicle
2. Say “Route preview.” System Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
Turn-by-Turn Navigation responds with the next three screen-based navigation system (if
maneuvers. equipped). When ready, the
1. Press Q to connect to a live
directions will be downloaded to the
Advisor. Repeat vehicle.
2. Request directions.
1. Press =. System responds: Destination Download: Press Q,
3. Directions are downloaded to the “OnStar ready,” then a tone. then request the Advisor to
vehicle. download directions to the
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
14-4 OnStar
navigation system in the vehicle (if WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped) pressure (if the vehicle is equipped
equipped). After the call ends, press The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot that with the tire pressure monitoring
the “Go” button on the navigation provides a high-speed, wireless system); or activate remote horn
screen to begin driving directions. Internet connection to connect and lights. Also remote start the
If directions are downloaded to the multiple mobile devices (data plan vehicle (if factory equipped) or
navigation system, the route can required). unlock the doors from anywhere
only be canceled through the with a wireless connection (if
1. To retrieve WiFi hotspot equipped with automatic locks).
navigation system.
information, press = and select With a required specific OnStar
Destinations can also be or say “WiFi settings.” subscription plan, a destination can
downloaded on the go. For be sent to the vehicle. For OnStar
information about eNav or 2. The WiFi settings will display the RemoteLink information and
Destination Download, see WiFi network name/SSID, compatibility, see www.onstar.com
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or passphrase, and level of (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
www.onstar.ca (Canada). encryption.
3. To change the SSID or OnStar RemoteLink® Key Fob
Connections Services
passphrase, press Q or call
1-888-4-ONSTAR to connect This feature is included for five
The required specific Onstar
with an Advisor. years and allows for remote door
subscription plan includes the
lock/unlock (if equipped with
services that follow to help OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App automatic locks), remote start (if
customers stay connected. (If Equipped) factory equipped), or activation of
For coverage maps, see Download the OnStar RemoteLink horn and lights from anywhere with
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or mobile app to select Apple®, a wireless signal. Download the app
www.onstar.ca (Canada). Android™, and BlackBerry® or and start using it any time during the
Windows 7 or 8 mobile devices. trial period to get started.
From the mobile device, check the
vehicle’s fuel level, oil life, or tire
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Hands-Free Calling 4. Say “Call.” System responds: 4. Pick a name tag. System
“OK, dialing 911.” responds: “About to store <name
This service allows calls to be made
tag>. Does that sound OK?”
and received from the vehicle. Retrieve My Number
5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
To Make a Call 1. Press =. System responds: again. System responds: “OK,
1. Press =. System responds: “OnStar ready.” storing <name tag>.”
“OnStar ready.” 2. Say “My number.” System Place a Call Using a Stored
2. Say “Call.” System responds: responds: “Your OnStar Number
“Call. Please say the name or Hands-Free Calling number is,”
number to call.” then says the number. 1. Press =. System responds:
“OnStar ready.”
3. Say the entire number without End a Call
pausing, including a “1” and the 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
Press =. System responds: “Call responds: “OK, calling
area code. System responds:
“OK calling.” ended.” <name tag>.”
Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed Verify Minutes and Expiration
Dialing
1. Press =. System responds: Press = and say “Minutes” then
“OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds: “Verify” to check how many minutes
a tone. “OnStar ready.” remain and their expiration date.
2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the number you Vehicle Diagnostics
“Call. Please say the name or
number to call.” would like to store.” OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics can
3. Say the entire number without perform a vehicle check every
3. Say “911” without pausing.
pausing. System responds: month. It will check the engine,
System responds: “911.”
“Please say the name tag.” transmission, antilock brakes, and
other major vehicle systems. It also
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
14-6 OnStar
checks the tire pressures, if the OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Information Automatic Crash Response,
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
needed, press Q, and an Advisor Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
can run a check. Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
account information. all OnStar services are available
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
Selling/Transferring the more information, a full description
Vehicle of OnStar services, system
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediately limitations, and OnStar terms and
to terminate your OnStar services if conditions:
the vehicle is disposed of, sold, . Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
transferred, or if the lease ends. (1-888-466-7827).
Reactivation for Subsequent . See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
Owners . See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible. The Advisor will update
. Press Q to speak with an
vehicle records and explain the Advisor.
OnStar service options available. OnStar services cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
OnStar 14-7
in that area. The wireless service Services for People with OnStar Personal Identification
provider must also have coverage, Disabilities Number (PIN)
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar Advisors provide services to help A PIN is needed to access some of
services. Service involving location subscribers with physical disabilities the OnStar services, like Remote
information about the vehicle cannot and medical conditions. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
work unless GPS signals are Assistance. The PIN will need to be
Press Q for help with: changed the first time when
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar . Locating a gas station with an speaking with an Advisor. To
hardware. OnStar services may not attendant to pump gas. change the OnStar PIN, contact an
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
properly installed or it has not been that meets accessibility needs. calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
. Providing directions to the Warranty
or modified, OnStar services may closest hospital or pharmacy in OnStar equipment may be
not work. Other problems beyond urgent situations. warranted as part of the vehicle
the control of OnStar may prevent TTY Users warranty.
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system OnStar has the ability to Languages
design and architecture of the communicate to deaf, The vehicle can be programmed to
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired respond in multiple languages.
crash, or wireless phone network customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
congestion or jamming. Advisors are available in English,
system can provide in-vehicle
See Radio Frequency Statement on access to all of the OnStar services, Spanish, and French. Available
page 13-12. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar languages may vary by country.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
14-8 OnStar
Potential Issues A temporary loss of GPS can cause to function properly. These systems
loss of the ability to send a may not operate if the battery is
OnStar cannot perform Remote
Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The discharged or disconnected.
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Advisor may give a verbal route or
Assistance after the vehicle has Add-on Electrical Equipment
may ask for a call back after the
been off continuously for five days.
vehicle is driven into an open area. The OnStar system is integrated
After five days, OnStar can contact
Roadside Assistance and a into the electrical architecture of the
Cellular and GPS Antennas vehicle. Do not add any electrical
locksmith to help gain access to the
vehicle. Do not place items over or near the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
antenna to prevent blocking cellular Equipment on page 9-63. Added
Global Positioning and GPS signal reception. Cellular electrical equipment may interfere
System (GPS) reception is required for OnStar to with the operation of the OnStar
send remote signals to the vehicle. system and cause it to not operate.
. Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall Unable to Connect to OnStar Privacy
buildings; in parking garages; Message The complete OnStar Privacy
around airports; in tunnels,
If there is limited cellular coverage Statement may be found at
underpasses; or in an area with
or the cellular network has reached www.onstar.com (U.S.),
very dense trees. If GPS signals
maximum capacity, this message or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We
are not available, the OnStar
may come on. Press Q to try the recommend that you review it. If you
system should still operate to
call again or try again after driving a have any questions, call
call OnStar. However, OnStar
few miles into another cellular area. 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
could have difficulty identifying
the exact location. or press Q to speak with an
Vehicle and Power Issues Advisor. Users of wireless
. In emergency situations, OnStar communications are cautioned that
OnStar services require a vehicle
can use the last stored GPS the privacy of any information sent
electrical system, wireless service,
location to send to emergency via wireless cellular communications
and GPS satellite technologies to be
responders. cannot be assured. Third parties
available and operating for features
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
OnStar 14-9
may unlawfully intercept or access IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT unzip:

transmissions and private LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
communications without consent. OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS Info-ZIP copyright and license. The
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE definitive version of this document
OnStar - libcurl and unzip AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
acknowledgments should be available at ftp://
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
Certain OnStar components include EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR license.html indefinitely.
libcurl and unzip software. Below COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
are the notices and licenses LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All
associated with this software: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, rights reserved.
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF For the purposes of this copyright
libcurl: CONTRACT, TORT OR and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, the following set of individuals:
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. THE SOFTWARE. Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
All rights reserved. Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Except as contained in this notice, Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Permission to use, copy, modify, the name of a copyright holder shall Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
and distribute this software for any not be used in advertising or Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
purpose with or without fee is otherwise to promote the sale, use Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
hereby granted, provided that the or other dealings in this Software Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
above copyright notice and this without prior written authorization of Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
permission notice appear in all the copyright holder. George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai
copies. Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
14-10 OnStar
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White. to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the addresses or of the
incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not Info-ZIP URL(s).
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
inability to use this software. disabled. the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports and “MacZip” for its own source
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces, and binary releases.
freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
marked as such and must not be
1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
(compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Makes an Airbag Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
What Will You See after an Armrest
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Active Emergency
When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Braking System . . . . . . . . 1-21, 9-48
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-35
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-22 Assistance Systems for
Add-On Electrical
Airbags Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Adding Equipment to the Assistance Systems for
Additional Information
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-44
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Additional Maintenance
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Adjustments
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12
Alarm Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Automatic
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Alert Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-50 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Airbag System
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12
How Does an Airbag
Antenna Automatic Transmission
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-2 INDEX
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Carbon Monoxide

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
B Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Headlamps, Front Turn Card Reader
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Signal, Sidemarker, and SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Voltage and Charging Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Cargo
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 High Intensity Discharge Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Cautions, Danger, and
Bluetooth License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Overview . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-26 Taillamps, Turn Signal, CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Brake Stoplamps, and Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20 Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Check
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 C Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Ignition
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 California Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-24
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Child Restraints
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Perchlorate Materials Infants and Young
Braking System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Active Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Lower Anchors and
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41
Capacities and Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-3
Cleaning Coolant D
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Engine Temperature
Danger, Warnings, and
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Daytime Running
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 5-6 Courtesy Transportation
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Compartments Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Door
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Connections Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Text Telephone (TTY)
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Control Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3
Traction and Electronic Customer Information
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-43
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Service Publications
Driver Information
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Customer Satisfaction
Driving
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont'd) Electrical System Engine (cont'd)

Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Compartment Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-24 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Instrument Panel Fuse Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Track Events and Emergency Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Engine Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Check and Service Engine Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Dual Automatic Climate Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-1
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 F
E Coolant Temperature Features
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-20 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Filter,
Electrical Equipment, Cooling System Messages . . .5-31 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 FlexFuel
Overheated Protection E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-5
Fluid Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 H

Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-12 Engine Compartment
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Instrument Panel Fuse
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Headlamps
Forward Collision Alert
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 G Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Frequency Statement Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Daytime Running
Front Seats Gauges Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Engine Coolant Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Headlamps, Front Turn
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Signal, Sidemarker, and
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 High Intensity Discharge
Filling a Portable Fuel Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Warning Lights and High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 General Information Heated
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-24 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Requirements, California . . . . .9-54 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Heated and Ventilated Front
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heater
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-6 INDEX
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Instrument Panel Lamps (cont'd)

High Voltage Devices and Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-21 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-46 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7 J Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Jack Lane Departure
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Lane Departure Warning
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
How to Wear Safety Belts Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 K LATCH System
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-32 Replacing Parts after a
Keyless Entry
I Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-14, 9-16 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 L Lighting
Indicator Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-40 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Lamps Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Infants and Young Children, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Lights
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Exterior Lamps Off Antilock Brake System
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Messages (cont'd)

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-31
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 for Children (LATCH Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-20 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1 M Object Detection System . . . . .5-33
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-22 Maintenance Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15 Maintenance and Care Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Service Electric Parking Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-3 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Recommended Fluids Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Traction Control System Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Locks Messages Mirrors
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Automatic Dimming
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Battery Voltage and Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-8 INDEX
Mirrors (cont'd) Oil Outlets

Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Overheated Engine
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Protection
Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-21 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Monitor System, Tire Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Overview, Infotainment
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
OnStar®
N System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 P
Navigation OnStar® Additional Park
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
O OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Brake and P (Park)
Object Detection System Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 OnStar® Vehicle
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Parking or Backing
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Operating Mode
Off-Road Passenger Airbag Status
Overheated Engine Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Passenger Compartment Air
Ordering Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-9
Perchlorate Materials R Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Replacement Parts
Radio Frequency
Personalization Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Radio Frequency
Phone Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-32
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-26 Replacing LATCH System
Radios
Port Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Replacing Safety Belt
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Power System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-19
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Reporting Safety Defects
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Restraints
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Pregnancy, Using Safety Retained Accessory
Recommended Fluids and
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Privacy Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Records
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14 Ride Control Systems
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Program Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Recreational Vehicle
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7 Roads
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Proposition 65 Warning, Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Reimbursement Program,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Roadside Assistance
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Remote Keyless Entry
Roof
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-10 INDEX
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Seats Service (cont'd)

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Running the Vehicle While Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Publications Ordering
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Heated and Ventilated Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
S Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Service Electric Parking
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5 Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Services
How to Wear Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Securing Child Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50 Shift Lock Control Function
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Security Check, Automatic
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-19 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-18 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Shifting
Safety Defects Reporting OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Side Blind Zone
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Service Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Accessories and Signals, Turn and
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Spare Tire
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-13 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Maintenance, General Special Application Services . . . 11-8
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Tires (cont'd)

StabiliTrak Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 System Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-48
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Active Emergency Braking . . . .9-48 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Forward Collision Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 13-15 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Starting the Vehicle Systems Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-47
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 T Terminology and
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Taillamps Uniform Tire Quality
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Storage Areas Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-18 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 5-6 When It Is Time for New
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Towing
Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-58
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-70
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-12 INDEX
Track Events and U Vehicle (cont'd)

Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Traction Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Uniform Tire Quality
Control System (TCS)/ Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-22
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-44
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Vehicle Care
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Traction Control/Electronic Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Vehicle Data Recording
Updates
Trademarks and License and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Vehicle Diagnostics
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Trailer OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Transmission Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 V Voltage Devices and
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Vehicle Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Transportation Program, Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Identification
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Turn and Lane-Change Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Turn Signal Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
INDEX i-13
W Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25
Warning
Wiring, High Voltage
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-52
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-39
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
2015 - CRC 1st Edition - 4/2/14
i-14 INDEX
2 NOTES

Impala 2015 Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Impala 2015 Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2k15_chev_impala_22941531 Aai

(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

2015 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2015 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

model variants, country Canadian Vehicle Owners

Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Side Blind Zone

22. Shift Lever. See Automatic Initial Drive

passenger doors. See Remote Power Door Locks Trunk

To adjust a manual seat:

Seat Height Adjuster Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment

Lumbar with Power Recline

Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright

To recline a manual seatback:

Safety Belts Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status

Refer to the following sections for

Interior Lighting To change the dome lamp settings, Reading Lamps

Front Reading Lamps

The interior lamps control in the

Rear Reading Lamps

INT: Move the lever up to INT for

See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 2. A/C (Air Conditioning) 6. Recirculation

Vehicle Features {: Press to go to the Home Page. Setting the Clock

1. Favorites: Press to select the +RES: If there is a set speed in

Express Open/Express Close: Performance and

Replace the vehicle's tires with

the same TPC Spec number

TTY Users (U.S. Only):

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

With an active OnStar subscription,

Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

start the engine from outside the Keyless Unlocking/Locking from

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from If passive locking is enabled, the Programming Transmitters to

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Battery Replacement Remote Vehicle Start

5. Snap the battery cover back on Laws in some local communities

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Key Cylinder Access

3. Move the cap forward and press

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Doors Warning (Continued)

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

trunk and lift to open. See Remote Vehicle Security

If equipped with the anti-theft alarm

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows